Nastar Operator Guide(V600R002_06)

Nastar V600R002

Operator Guide Issue

06

Date

2010-08-18

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Nastar Operator Guide

About This Document

About This Document Intended Audience The intended audiences of this document are: l

Network planning and optimization engineers

l

Operation and maintenance (OM) engineers

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

06 (2010-08-18) This is the sixth formal release.

05 (2010-06-30) This is the fifth formal release.

04 (2010-03-15) This is the fourth formal release.

03 (2009-09-21) This is the third formal release.

02 (2009-08-17) This is the second formal release. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


iii


About This Document

01 (2009-07-02) This is the first formal release.

iv


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contents

Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Overview of the Nastar Performance Analysis System......................................................1-1 1.1 Introduction to the Nastar Performance Analysis System...............................................................................1-2 1.2 Position of the Nastar on the network.............................................................................................................1-6 1.3 Performance Analysis Process........................................................................................................................1-7

2 Getting Started............................................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Logging In to the Nastar..................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.1 Logging In to the Nastar Server.............................................................................................................2-3 2.1.2 Logging Out the User Account..............................................................................................................2-4 2.1.3 Exiting the Nastar Client........................................................................................................................2-4 2.2 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User .....................................................................................................2-5 2.3 Customizing Client GUI Effect.......................................................................................................................2-5 2.3.1 Setting Font Size....................................................................................................................................2-6 2.3.2 Setting Output Information....................................................................................................................2-6 2.4 Setting the Toolbar..........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.5 Customizing Client Time Display Mode........................................................................................................2-7 2.5.1 Setting the Time Format of the Client....................................................................................................2-7 2.5.2 Setting the Time Mode of the Client......................................................................................................2-8 2.5.3 Setting the Date Format of the Client.....................................................................................................2-9 2.6 Setting the Display Mode of Numbers............................................................................................................2-9 2.7 Locking Client...............................................................................................................................................2-10 2.7.1 Locking the Client Automatically........................................................................................................2-10 2.7.2 Locking the Client Manually................................................................................................................2-10 2.8 Unlocking the Client.....................................................................................................................................2-11 2.9 Broadcast Messages......................................................................................................................................2-11 2.9.1 Setting Broadcast Parameters...............................................................................................................2-11 2.9.2 Sending Broadcast Messages...............................................................................................................2-12 2.10 Setting the Alarm Sound When the Network Is Disconnected...................................................................2-12 2.11 Managing the Nastar License......................................................................................................................2-13 2.11.1 Querying the Nastar License..............................................................................................................2-13 2.11.2 Updating the Nastar License..............................................................................................................2-13 2.12 Collecting Nastar Log File..........................................................................................................................2-14 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


v


Contents

2.13 Engineering Parameter Management..........................................................................................................2-14 2.13.1 Importing/Exporting Engineering Parameters...................................................................................2-15 2.13.2 Querying Engineering Parameters.....................................................................................................2-17 2.14 Creating Custom NE Groups.......................................................................................................................2-18 2.15 Querying NE Data.......................................................................................................................................2-20 2.16 Reference for the Performance Analysis System GUI................................................................................2-22 2.16.1 Interface Description: Nastar Client...................................................................................................2-22 2.16.2 Nastar Menu Function Reference.......................................................................................................2-24 2.16.3 Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................................................2-27 2.16.4 Parameters for Server Information.....................................................................................................2-29 2.16.5 Parameters for Logging In to the Nastar Server.................................................................................2-29 2.16.6 Parameters for Output GUI Information............................................................................................2-30 2.16.7 Parameters for Setting the Time/Date Style.......................................................................................2-31 2.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log Files.......................................................................................2-32 2.16.9 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Engineering Parameters....................................................2-33 2.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE Groups..........................................................2-37

3 Monitoring the Status of the Nastar.......................................................................................3-1 3.1 Basic Knowledge of System Monitoring........................................................................................................3-2 3.1.1 System Monitoring Functions................................................................................................................3-2 3.1.2 Relation Between Threshold and Alarm................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Setting Nastar Server Thresholds....................................................................................................................3-3 3.2.1 Setting the Parameters for the System Resources Monitoring...............................................................3-3 3.2.2 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Hard Disk Monitoring................................................................3-4 3.2.3 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Database Monitoring..................................................................3-4 3.2.4 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Service Monitoring.....................................................................3-4 3.3 Monitoring the Nastar..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.3.1 Monitoring the Nastar Service Status.....................................................................................................3-5 3.3.2 Monitoring the Nastar Process Status.................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.3 Monitoring the Nastar Hard Disk Status................................................................................................3-6 3.3.4 Monitoring the Nastar Database Status..................................................................................................3-7 3.3.5 Monitoring the System Resource Status of the Nastar Server...............................................................3-7 3.3.6 Viewing the Information of Nastar Components...................................................................................3-7 3.3.7 Viewing Operation Logs on the System Monitor Client........................................................................3-7 3.3.8 Refreshing the Monitoring Information.................................................................................................3-8 3.3.9 Saving the Monitoring Information........................................................................................................3-8 3.4 Reference of System Monitoring GUIs...........................................................................................................3-9 3.4.1 Parameters for Setting Thresholds of the Nastar Server........................................................................ 3-9 3.4.2 Parameters for Monitoring Services of the Nastar Server....................................................................3-16 3.4.3 Parameters for Monitoring Process of the Nastar Server.....................................................................3-17 3.4.4 Parameters for Monitoring Hard Disk of the Nastar Server.................................................................3-17 3.4.5 Parameters for Monitoring Database of the Nastar Server...................................................................3-18 3.4.6 Parameters for Monitoring System Resources of the Nastar Server....................................................3-19 vi


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contents

3.4.7 Parameters for Viewing the Component Information of the Nastar Server.........................................3-20 3.4.8 Parameters for Viewing System Monitoring Operation Logs..............................................................3-20

4 Security Management................................................................................................................4-1 4.1 Basic Knowledge of Security Management....................................................................................................4-3 4.1.1 Security Management.............................................................................................................................4-3 4.1.2 Concepts of Nastar Security...................................................................................................................4-3 4.1.3 Nastar User Rights Management Policies..............................................................................................4-5 4.1.4 Operation Right List...............................................................................................................................4-5 4.2 Changing the Password of the Current User...................................................................................................4-6 4.3 Setting the Security Policy of the Nastar........................................................................................................4-7 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy...................................................................................................................4-7 4.3.2 Setting the Account Policy.....................................................................................................................4-8 4.3.3 Setting the System Policy.......................................................................................................................4-8 4.4 Setting Nastar System Login Mode................................................................................................................4-9 4.5 Setting the System ACL................................................................................................................................4-10 4.6 Creating a Nastar User..................................................................................................................................4-11 4.6.1 Procedure for Creating Nastar Users....................................................................................................4-12 4.6.2 Creating an Operation Set....................................................................................................................4-13 4.6.3 Creating a Nastar User Group..............................................................................................................4-14 4.6.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User Group..................................................................4-15 4.6.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User Group...........................................................................4-15 4.6.6 Creating an Nastar User Account.........................................................................................................4-16 4.6.7 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group..............................................................................................4-17 4.6.8 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User..............................................................................4-17 4.6.9 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User......................................................................................4-18 4.6.10 Assigning the User ACL....................................................................................................................4-18 4.7 Modifying a Nastar User...............................................................................................................................4-19 4.7.1 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User ..........................................................................................4-20 4.7.2 Modifying the Information About a Nastar User ................................................................................4-20 4.7.3 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group..............................................................................................4-21 4.7.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User..............................................................................4-21 4.7.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User......................................................................................4-22 4.7.6 Modifying the Nastar Access Control List...........................................................................................4-22 4.8 Comparing the Nastar User Rights................................................................................................................4-23 4.9 Monitoring a Nastar User..............................................................................................................................4-23 4.9.1 Unlocking a Nastar User......................................................................................................................4-23 4.9.2 Monitoring the Nastar User Operations...............................................................................................4-24 4.9.3 Forcing a Nastar User to Quit..............................................................................................................4-25 4.10 Reference of the Security Management GUI..............................................................................................4-25 4.10.1 Operation Right List...........................................................................................................................4-26 4.10.2 Parameters for the System Security Policy........................................................................................4-27 4.10.3 Parameters for Creating a Nastar User Account................................................................................4-31 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


vii


Contents

4.10.4 Parameters for the Nastar User Information.......................................................................................4-33 4.10.5 Parameters for Adding a Nastar User Group......................................................................................4-35 4.10.6 Parameters for Assigning Operation Rights to Nastar User/User Groups.........................................4-36

5 Log Management........................................................................................................................5-1 5.1 Basic Knowledge of Log Management...........................................................................................................5-2 5.1.1 Log Management Function....................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.2 Log Types...............................................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Managing Operation Logs...............................................................................................................................5-2 5.2.1 Querying Operation Logs.......................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.2 Collecting Statistics on Operation Logs.................................................................................................5-3 5.3 Managing System Logs...................................................................................................................................5-4 5.3.1 Querying System Logs...........................................................................................................................5-4 5.3.2 Collecting Statistics on System Logs.....................................................................................................5-5 5.4 Managing Security Logs.................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4.1 Querying Security Logs.........................................................................................................................5-5 5.4.2 Collecting Statistics on Security Logs...................................................................................................5-6 5.5 Managing Log Templates................................................................................................................................5-6 5.5.1 Creating a Log Query Template.............................................................................................................5-7 5.5.2 Creating a Log Statistical Template.......................................................................................................5-7 5.5.3 Modifying a Log Template....................................................................................................................5-8 5.5.4 Deleting a Log Template........................................................................................................................5-8 5.6 Reference of the Log Management GUI.........................................................................................................5-9 5.6.1 Parameters for Querying Operation Logs..............................................................................................5-9 5.6.2 Parameters for Operation Log Statistics...............................................................................................5-11 5.6.3 Parameters for Operation Log Details..................................................................................................5-13 5.6.4 Parameters for Querying System Logs.................................................................................................5-14 5.6.5 Parameters for System Log Statistics...................................................................................................5-15 5.6.6 Parameters for System Log Details......................................................................................................5-16 5.6.7 Parameters for Querying Security Logs...............................................................................................5-16 5.6.8 Parameters for Security Log Statistics.................................................................................................5-18 5.6.9 Parameters for Security Log Details....................................................................................................5-20

6 OSS Management.......................................................................................................................6-1 6.1 Basic Knowledge of OSS Management..........................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Creating an OSS..............................................................................................................................................6-2 6.3 Viewing the Attributes of an OSS...................................................................................................................6-4 6.4 Modifying the Attributes of an OSS...............................................................................................................6-5 6.5 Reference for the OSS Management GUI.......................................................................................................6-5 6.5.1 Interface Description: OSS Management...............................................................................................6-6 6.5.2 Parameters for Setting the Object Attributes of OSS Management.......................................................6-7

7 GSM Centralized Task Management.....................................................................................7-1 7.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management......................................................................................7-3 viii


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contents

7.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks...........................................................................................................................7-3 7.1.2 System Timing Tasks.............................................................................................................................7-4 7.1.3 User Timing Task...................................................................................................................................7-4 7.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters.................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.1.5 States of a Timing Task..........................................................................................................................7-5 7.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks........................................................................ 7-6 7.2 Creating a GSM User-Defined Timing Task.................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task............................................................................................................ 7-8 7.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data........................................................................7-12 7.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data......................................................................7-15 7.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data...................................................7-17 7.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task Data.............................................................7-19 7.2.6 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters..............................................................7-22 7.3 Modifying a GSM User-Defined Timing Task.............................................................................................7-24 7.3.1 Modifying a Data Collection Task.......................................................................................................7-25 7.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data....................................................................7-25 7.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data..................................................................7-26 7.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data...............................................7-27 7.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task File Data...................................................7-27 7.3.6 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters...........................................................7-28 7.4 Modifying a GSM Data Deletion Task.........................................................................................................7-29 7.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data............................................................................7-29 7.4.2 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data...................................................................7-30 7.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data.................................................................7-31 7.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data..................................................7-32 7.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Measurement-Task File Data.....................................................7-32 7.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data......................................................................................................7-33 7.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task...............................................................................7-34 7.7 Viewing Timing Tasks..................................................................................................................................7-35 7.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks.........................................................................................7-35 7.7.2 Checking the Task Progress.................................................................................................................7-35 7.7.3 Checking the Task Execution...............................................................................................................7-36 7.8 Reference for the GSM Centralized Task Management GUI.......................................................................7-36 7.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management.........................................................................7-37 7.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions.......................................................................................7-39 7.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks............................................................7-40 7.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task..............................................................7-41 7.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task...........................................................7-42 7.8.6 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a Data Collection Task............................................................7-42 7.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data.............................................................7-44 7.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data...........................................7-45 7.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data.........................................7-45 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


ix


Contents

7.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data..............7-46 7.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Measurement-Task File Data.................7-46 7.8.12 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data...................................................................7-47 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task............................................................................7-47

8 GSM MR Analysis.....................................................................................................................8-1 8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM MR Analysis........................................................................................................8-3 8.1.1 GSM MR Analysis Function..................................................................................................................8-3 8.1.2 TopN KPIs..............................................................................................................................................8-4 8.1.3 GSM MR Topics....................................................................................................................................8-7 8.2 Process of GSM MR Analysis........................................................................................................................8-8 8.3 Managing GSM MR Analysis Tasks............................................................................................................8-10 8.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task...................................................................................................................8-10 8.3.2 Creating a GSM MR Analysis Task.....................................................................................................8-13 8.3.3 Modifying a GSM MR Analysis Task.................................................................................................8-15 8.3.4 Checking a GSM MR Analysis Task...................................................................................................8-16 8.4 Querying the GSM MR Overview Report....................................................................................................8-17 8.4.1 Querying the GBSC Report..................................................................................................................8-18 8.4.2 Querying the GSM Cell Group Report................................................................................................8-21 8.4.3 Querying a GSM TopN TRX Report...................................................................................................8-24 8.4.4 Querying a GSM MR Topic Analysis Report......................................................................................8-26 8.5 Querying the MR Results of GSM Cells.......................................................................................................8-27 8.6 Comparing the GSM MR Analysis Results..................................................................................................8-29 8.7 Reference for the GSM MR Analysis GUI...................................................................................................8-30 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis...........................................................................................8-31 8.7.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks............................................................................................8-34 8.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM MR Analysis Tasks.....................................................8-37 8.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSC Reports.............................................................................................8-41 8.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM Cell Group Reports......................................................................8-49 8.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSM TopN TRX Reports......................................................................8-57 8.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MR Topic Analysis Reports.........................................................8-63 8.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR Analysis Results of GSM Cells......................................................8-69 8.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR Analysis Results.......................................................................8-75

9 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis............................................................................................9-1 9.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis...................................................................................9-3 9.1.1 GSM Neighbor Cell Analysis Function.................................................................................................9-3 9.1.2 Algorithms for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis.............................................................................9-4 9.2 Procedure for Using GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis...................................................................................9-6 9.3 Managing GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.........................................................................................9-7 9.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task.....................................................................................................................9-8 9.3.2 Creating a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task...............................................................................9-10 9.3.3 Modifying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task............................................................................9-12 9.3.4 Checking a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task.............................................................................9-12 x


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contents

9.4 Querying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Report....................................................................................9-14 9.5 Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Reports.................................................................9-15 9.6 Querying Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports...................................................................9-16 9.7 Exporting Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports..............................................................................................9-17 9.8 Reference for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI..............................................................................9-19 9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis.....................................................................9-20 9.8.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks............................................................................................9-21 9.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks...............................9-24 9.8.4 Parameters for Querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells........................................9-26 9.8.5 Parameters for Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Report..................................9-30 9.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports............................9-31

10 GSM Frequency Analysis.....................................................................................................10-1 10.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Frequency Analysis..........................................................................................10-3 10.1.1 GSM Frequency Analysis Function...................................................................................................10-3 10.1.2 Process of GSM Frequency Analysis.................................................................................................10-4 10.1.3 Process of GSM Frequency Optimization..........................................................................................10-5 10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs.......................................................................................................10-6 10.2 Procedure for Using GSM Frequency Analysis..........................................................................................10-7 10.3 Managing GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks................................................................................................10-9 10.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task.................................................................................................................10-9 10.3.2 Creating a GSM Frequency Analysis Task......................................................................................10-11 10.3.3 Modifying a GSM Frequency Analysis Task...................................................................................10-13 10.3.4 Checking a GSM Frequency Analysis Task....................................................................................10-14 10.4 Querying GSM Frequency Analysis Reports............................................................................................10-15 10.4.1 Querying the Interference Matrix Report of GSM Measurement Cells...........................................10-16 10.4.2 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Interference Matrix.............................................................10-17 10.4.3 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix...........................................10-18 10.5 Querying the GSM Frequency Optimization Report................................................................................10-19 10.6 Exporting GSM Interference Analysis Reports........................................................................................10-22 10.7 Exporting GSM Frequency Optimization Reports....................................................................................10-24 10.8 Reference for the GSM Frequency Analysis GUI.....................................................................................10-25 10.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Analysis............................................................................10-25 10.8.2 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Optimization.....................................................................10-28 10.8.3 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks........................................................................................10-29 10.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks......................................10-32 10.8.5 Parameters for Querying the Overview Report of the GSM Test Cells...........................................10-34 10.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report of GSM Cell Interference Matrix...........................................10-35 10.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix...................10-37 10.8.8 Parameters for Querying GSM Frequency Optimization Reports...................................................10-39

11 GSM Uplink Interference Analysis....................................................................................11-1 11.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Uplink Interference Analysis...........................................................................11-2 11.2 Procedure for Using GSM Uplink Interference Analysis...........................................................................11-2 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


xi


Contents

11.3 Managing GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks.................................................................................11-4 11.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task.................................................................................................................11-4 11.3.2 Creating a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task..........................................................................11-7 11.3.3 Modifying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task......................................................................11-9 11.3.4 Checking a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task........................................................................11-9 11.4 Querying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Report............................................................................11-11 11.5 Reference for the GSM Uplink Interference Analysis GUI......................................................................11-12 11.5.1 Interface Description: GSM Uplink Interference Analysis..............................................................11-12 11.5.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks........................................................................................11-14 11.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks.......................11-17 11.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of GSM Cells........................11-18

12 UMTS Centralized Task Management.............................................................................. 12-1 12.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management..................................................................................12-3 12.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks.......................................................................................................................12-3 12.1.2 System Timing Tasks.........................................................................................................................12-3 12.1.3 User Timing Task...............................................................................................................................12-4 12.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters..............................................................................................................12-4 12.1.5 States of a Timing Task......................................................................................................................12-5 12.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks....................................................................12-5 12.2 Creating a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task............................................................................................12-6 12.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink-Interference Data........................................................12-7 12.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data..........................................12-10 12.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data...............................................................12-12 12.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data.......................................................12-15 12.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters........................................................12-17 12.3 Modifying a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task.......................................................................................12-19 12.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink Interference Data...................................................12-20 12.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data.......................................12-20 12.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data............................................................12-21 12.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data....................................................12-22 12.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters.....................................................12-22 12.4 Modifying a UMTS Data Deletion Task...................................................................................................12-23 12.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data........................................................................12-24 12.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data.....................................................12-24 12.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data......................................12-25 12.4.4 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data...........................................................12-26 12.4.5 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data...................................................12-26 12.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data..................................................................................................12-27 12.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task...........................................................................12-28 12.7 Viewing Timing Tasks..............................................................................................................................12-29 12.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks.....................................................................................12-29 12.7.2 Checking the Task Progress.............................................................................................................12-29 xii


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contents

12.7.3 Checking the Task Execution...........................................................................................................12-30 12.8 Reference to the UMTS Centralized Task Management Interface...........................................................12-30 12.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management.....................................................................12-31 12.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions...................................................................................12-33 12.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks........................................................12-34 12.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task..........................................................12-35 12.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task.......................................................12-36 12.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data.........................................................12-36 12.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data..........................12-37 12.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting Neighboring UMTS Cell Analysis Data..............12-38 12.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data...................................12-38 12.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data.........................12-39 12.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data...............................................................12-39 12.8.12 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task........................................................................12-40

13 UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis.................................................................................13-1 13.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis........................................................................13-2 13.2 Process of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis........................................................................................13-2 13.3 Managing UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks...............................................................................13-4 13.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task...............................................................................................................13-4 13.3.2 Creating a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task.......................................................................13-6 13.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis Task...................................................................13-8 13.3.4 Checking a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task......................................................................13-8 13.4 Querying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Report..........................................................................13-10 13.5 Reference for the UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis GUI....................................................................13-11 13.5.1 Interface for UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis...........................................................................13-12 13.5.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task..............................................................13-13 13.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task......................13-13 13.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of UMTS Cells......................13-14

14 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis...........................................................14-1 14.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis....................................................14-3 14.1.1 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Function..............................................................14-3 14.1.2 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms..........................................................14-4 14.2 Process of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis....................................................................14-5 14.3 Managing UMTS Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks..................................................................................14-6 14.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task...............................................................................................................14-7 14.3.2 Creating a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task...................................................14-8 14.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task.............................................14-10 14.3.4 Checking a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task...............................................14-11 14.4 Querying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report.....................................................14-13 14.5 Exporting a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report....................................................14-14 14.6 Reference for the UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI...............................................14-16 14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis.......................................14-16 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


xiii


Contents

14.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task..............................................................14-18 14.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks .....................................................................................................................................................................14-18 14.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports.....................14-20

15 UMTS Coverage Analysis....................................................................................................15-1 15.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Coverage Analysis.........................................................................................15-3 15.2 Process of UMTS Coverage Analysis.........................................................................................................15-3 15.3 Managing a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task..............................................................................................15-5 15.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task...............................................................................................................15-5 15.3.2 Creating a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task.......................................................................................15-7 15.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task....................................................................................15-9 15.3.4 Checking a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task....................................................................................15-10 15.4 Querying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report..........................................................................................15-11 15.5 Exporting a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report.........................................................................................15-13 15.6 Reference for the UMTS Coverage Analysis GUI....................................................................................15-14 15.6.1 Interface for UMTS Coverage Analysis...........................................................................................15-14 15.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task..............................................................15-17 15.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Coverage Analysis Tasks.....................................15-18 15.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Coverage Analysis Reports..........................................................15-19

16 CDMA Centralized Task Management.............................................................................16-1 16.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management..................................................................................16-3 16.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks.......................................................................................................................16-3 16.1.2 System Timing Tasks.........................................................................................................................16-3 16.1.3 User Timing Task...............................................................................................................................16-4 16.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters.............................................................................................................. 16-4 16.1.5 States of a Timing Task......................................................................................................................16-5 16.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks.................................................................... 16-5 16.2 Creating a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task...........................................................................................16-6 16.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data..........................................................16-7 16.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data.......................16-10 16.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data...............16-12 16.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data..........................................16-15 16.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data..............................................................16-17 16.3 Modifying a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task......................................................................................16-19 16.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data....................................................16-20 16.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data....................16-21 16.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data..................16-21 16.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data......................................16-22 16.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data...........................................................16-23 16.4 Modifying a CDMA Data Deletion Task..................................................................................................16-23 16.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data........................................................................16-24 16.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data.......................................................16-25 xiv


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contents

16.4.3 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data......................16-25 16.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data....................16-26 16.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data.........................................16-27 16.4.6 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Configuration Data.............................................................16-27 16.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data..................................................................................................16-28 16.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task...........................................................................16-29 16.7 Viewing Timing Tasks..............................................................................................................................16-30 16.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks.....................................................................................16-30 16.7.2 Checking the Task Progress.............................................................................................................16-30 16.7.3 Checking the Task Execution...........................................................................................................16-31 16.8 Reference to the CDMA Centralized Task Management Interface..........................................................16-31 16.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management.....................................................................16-32 16.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions...................................................................................16-33 16.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks........................................................16-34 16.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task..........................................................16-35 16.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task.......................................................16-36 16.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data.........................................................16-37 16.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data.................................................................16-38 16.8.8 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task..........................................................................16-38

17 CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis................................................................................17-1 17.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Uplink-Interference Analysis........................................................................17-3 17.2 Process of CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis........................................................................................17-3 17.3 Managing CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks..............................................................................17-6 17.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E Task..............................................................................................................17-6 17.3.2 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task.......................................................17-8 17.3.3 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task...................................................17-10 17.3.4 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task..................................................17-12 17.3.5 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task................................................17-13 17.3.6 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task...................................................17-13 17.3.7 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task..................................................17-15 17.4 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Report......................................................17-16 17.5 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Report.....................................................17-18 17.6 Reference for the CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis GUI...................................................................17-19 17.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis...........................................17-20 17.6.2 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis..........................................17-21 17.6.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks.....................................................................................................17-22 17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks.....17-23 17.6.5 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Tasks...17-24 17.6.6 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells......17-25 17.6.7 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells....17-26

18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis..........................................................18-1 18.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis...........................................................................18-3 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


xv


Contents

18.1.1 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Functions........................................................... 18-3 18.1.2 CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms.................................................................................18-4 18.2 Process of CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis...................................................................18-5 18.3 Managing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks................................................................................. 18-6 18.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E Task..............................................................................................................18-7 18.3.2 Creating a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task..................................................18-8 18.3.3 Modifying a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task............................................18-10 18.3.4 Checking a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task..............................................18-11 18.4 Query a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report.........................................................18-13 18.5 Exporting a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report...................................................18-14 18.6 Reference for the CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI......................................................................18-18 18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis......................................18-18 18.6.2 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks.....................................................................................................18-20 18.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks .....................................................................................................................................................................18-20 18.6.4 Parameters for Querying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports....................18-22

19 CDMA VIP KPI Analysis.....................................................................................................19-1 19.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis......................................................................................... 19-2 19.2 Process of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis......................................................................................................... 19-2 19.3 Managing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks............................................................................................... 19-3 19.3.1 Managing CDMA VIP Groups.......................................................................................................... 19-4 19.3.2 Creating a CDMA E2E Task..............................................................................................................19-6 19.3.3 Creating CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks.........................................................................................19-8 19.3.4 Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks....................................................................................19-10 19.3.5 Checking CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks.....................................................................................19-11 19.4 Querying the Analysis Reports About the QoS of CDMA VIP Subscribers............................................19-12 19.5 Reference for the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis GUI....................................................................................19-13 19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI Analysis...................................................................................................19-14 19.5.2 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP Subscribers and VIP Groups........................19-19 19.5.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks.....................................................................................................19-20 19.5.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks......................................19-20 19.5.5 Parameters for Querying a CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Report.........................................................19-22

20 CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis...............................................................................20-1 20.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis.......................................................................20-2 20.2 Process of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis.......................................................................................20-2 20.3 Managing CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks.............................................................................20-3 20.3.1 Creating User-Defined Counter Sets..................................................................................................20-3 20.3.2 Creating CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks......................................................................20-5 20.3.3 Modifying CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks...................................................................20-7 20.3.4 Checking CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks.....................................................................20-7 20.4 Querying a Complaint Assistant Analysis Report.......................................................................................20-9 20.5 Reference for the CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis GUI.................................................................20-10 xvi


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contents

20.5.1 Interface for CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis........................................................................20-10 20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count Sets.........................................................................................20-11 20.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Complaint Analysis Tasks...................................20-12 20.5.4 Parameters for Querying a CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Report......................................20-13

21 FAQ...........................................................................................................................................21-1 21.1 How to Solve the Problem That a Neighboring Cell Analysis Task or a Frequency Analysis Task Fails to Be Executed?............................................................................................................................................................21-1 21.2 How to Solve the Problem That the NE Information on the Nastar Is Inconsistent with That on the M2000? .............................................................................................................................................................................21-2 21.3 How to Solve the Problem That the OSS Navigation Tree Cannot Be Displayed Normally in the OSS Management Window?......................................................................................................................................21-3 21.4 How to Modify the Default Font Type and Font Size on the Nastar Client?..............................................21-4 21.5 How to Query the Detailed Software Version of the Nastar Client?..........................................................21-5

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


xvii


Figures

Figures Figure 1-1 Software modules of the Nastar..........................................................................................................1-4 Figure 1-2 Modules of the server software of the Nastar.....................................................................................1-5 Figure 1-3 Position of the Nastar on the network................................................................................................1-6 Figure 1-4 Process of Nastar performance analysis.............................................................................................1-8 Figure 2-1 Data Query window..........................................................................................................................2-21 Figure 2-2 GUI of the Nastar client....................................................................................................................2-23 Figure 6-1 Interface of OSS management............................................................................................................6-6 Figure 7-1 State transition of a timing task..........................................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-2 Integrated Task Management interface............................................................................................ 7-38 Figure 8-1 Process of GSM MR analysis.............................................................................................................8-9 Figure 8-2 MR Overview Report....................................................................................................................... 8-31 Figure 8-3 MR Query Result..............................................................................................................................8-33 Figure 8-4 MR Comparison Report....................................................................................................................8-34 Figure 9-1 Algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis............................................................................9-5 Figure 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis.........................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-3 Interface for the neighboring cell analysis........................................................................................9-20 Figure 10-1 Flow chart for frequency analysis...................................................................................................10-5 Figure 10-2 Flow chart for frequency optimization...........................................................................................10-6 Figure 10-3 Process of GSM frequency analysis...............................................................................................10-7 Figure 10-4 Frequency analysis interface (1)...................................................................................................10-26 Figure 10-5 Frequency analysis interface (2)...................................................................................................10-27 Figure 10-6 Frequency optimization interface.................................................................................................10-28 Figure 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis.................................................................................11-3 Figure 11-2 Interface for the overview of the uplink interference of cells......................................................11-13 Figure 11-3 Interface for the uplink interference analysis of a cell.................................................................11-13 Figure 12-1 State transition of a timing task......................................................................................................12-5 Figure 12-2 Integrated Task Management interface........................................................................................12-32 Figure 13-1 Workflow of uplink-interference analysis......................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-2 Interface for the uplink-interference analysis of a cell.................................................................13-12 Figure 14-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.................................................................... 14-5 Figure 14-2 UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis interface.............................................................14-17 Figure 15-1 Workflow of coverage analysis......................................................................................................15-4 Figure 15-2 Interface for the coverage analysis (1)..........................................................................................15-15 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


xix


Figures

Figure 15-3 Interface for the coverage analysis (2)..........................................................................................15-16 Figure 15-4 Interface for the coverage analysis (3)..........................................................................................15-17 Figure 16-1 State transition of a timing task......................................................................................................16-5 Figure 16-2 Integrated Task Management interface........................................................................................16-32 Figure 17-1 Workflow of uplink interference analysis......................................................................................17-4 Figure 17-2 Interface for the uplink-interference-ranking analysis.................................................................17-21 Figure 17-3 Interface for the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis...............................................................17-22 Figure 18-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis....................................................................18-5 Figure 18-2 Interface for the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.............................................................18-19 Figure 19-1 Workflow of VIP KPI analysis.......................................................................................................19-2 Figure 19-2 Interface for the KPI analysis (1)..................................................................................................19-14 Figure 19-3 Interface for the KPI analysis (2)..................................................................................................19-15 Figure 20-1 Workflow of complaint assistant analysis......................................................................................20-2 Figure 20-2 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (1).........................................................................20-10 Figure 20-3 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (2).........................................................................20-11 Figure 21-1 Configuration file...........................................................................................................................21-4

xx


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Tables

Tables Table 1-1 Functions supported by the GSM, CDMA, and UMTS networks.......................................................1-2 Table 1-2 The description of the Nastar analysis functions.................................................................................1-3 Table 1-3 Modules of the server software............................................................................................................1-5 Table 1-4 Functional units on the network...........................................................................................................1-6 Table 1-5 Process of Nastar performance analysis...............................................................................................1-8 Table 2-1 GUI description of the Nastar client.................................................................................................. 2-23 Table 2-2 System menus.....................................................................................................................................2-24 Table 2-3 Maintenance menus............................................................................................................................2-25 Table 2-4 Security menus...................................................................................................................................2-26 Table 2-5 Tab page menus..................................................................................................................................2-26 Table 2-6 Help menus.........................................................................................................................................2-27 Table 2-7 Controls and corresponding keyboard shortcuts................................................................................2-27 Table 2-8 Shortcut keys......................................................................................................................................2-28 Table 4-1 Impact of ESN and license on Maximum Sessions............................................................................4-9 Table 4-2 Creating users in initial configuration................................................................................................4-12 Table 4-3 Creating Users in Routine Maintenance............................................................................................ 4-13 Table 6-1 Interface description: OSS management..............................................................................................6-6 Table 7-1 Tasks divided according to execution period.......................................................................................7-3 Table 7-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features.........................................................................................7-4 Table 7-3 Description of the task description parameters....................................................................................7-4 Table 7-4 Mapping between the Nastar topic functions and the types of data to be collected............................7-8 Table 7-5 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface................................................................7-38 Table 7-6 Time parameters of a timing task.......................................................................................................7-48 Table 8-1 Relation between the quality levels of the received signals and bit error rate.....................................8-5 Table 8-2 Relation between the received levels and levels..................................................................................8-5 Table 8-3 Description of link balance levels........................................................................................................8-6 Table 8-4 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions...........................................................................8-7 Table 8-5 Process of GSM MR analysis..............................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-6 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (1).................................................................8-41 Table 8-7 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (2).................................................................8-43 Table 8-8 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (1)..................................................................................8-44 Table 8-9 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (2)..................................................................................8-45 Table 8-10 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-46 Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


xxi


Tables

Table 8-11 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-46 Table 8-12 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-47 Table 8-13 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (1)...............................................................8-49 Table 8-14 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (2)...............................................................8-51 Table 8-15 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (1)..........................................................................8-52 Table 8-16 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (2)..........................................................................8-53 Table 8-17 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-54 Table 8-18 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-55 Table 8-19 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-56 Table 8-20 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (1)........................................................................................8-58 Table 8-21 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (2)........................................................................................8-59 Table 8-22 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-60 Table 8-23 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-60 Table 8-24 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-61 Table 8-25 Parameters related to the problematic TRXs involved in topic analysis (1)....................................8-63 Table 8-26 Parameters related to the TRXs involved in topic analysis (2)........................................................8-65 Table 8-27 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-66 Table 8-28 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-66 Table 8-29 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-67 Table 8-30 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells.............................8-69 Table 8-31 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells (2)........................8-71 Table 8-32 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-72 Table 8-33 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-72 Table 8-34 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-73 Table 9-1 Network changes and their impacts.....................................................................................................9-4 Table 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis...........................................................................................9-6 Table 10-1 Network changes and their impacts.................................................................................................10-4 Table 10-2 Process of GSM frequency analysis.................................................................................................10-8 Table 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis..................................................................................11-3 Table 12-1 Tasks divided according to execution period...................................................................................12-3 Table 12-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features.....................................................................................12-3 Table 12-3 Description of the task description parameters................................................................................12-4 Table 12-4 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface............................................................12-32 Table 12-5 Time parameters of a timing task...................................................................................................12-40 Table 13-1 Description of the workflow of uplink-interference analysis...........................................................13-3 Table 13-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................13-5 Table 14-1 Network changes and their impacts.................................................................................................14-4 Table 14-2 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.........................................14-6 Table 14-3 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................14-7 Table 15-1 Description of the workflow of coverage analysis...........................................................................15-4 Table 15-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................15-6 Table 16-1 Tasks divided according to execution period...................................................................................16-3 xxii


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Tables

Table 16-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features.....................................................................................16-3 Table 16-3 Description of the task description parameters................................................................................16-4 Table 16-4 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface............................................................16-33 Table 16-5 Time parameters of a timing task...................................................................................................16-39 Table 17-1 Description of the workflow of uplink interference analysis...........................................................17-5 Table 17-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................17-7 Table 18-1 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis.........................................18-6 Table 18-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................18-7 Table 19-1 Description of the workflow of VIP KPI analysis...........................................................................19-3 Table 19-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................19-7 Table 20-1 Description of the workflow of complaint assistant analysis...........................................................20-3

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


xxiii


1 Overview of the Nastar Performance Analysis System

1

Overview of the Nastar Performance Analysis System

About This Chapter The iManager Nastar performance analysis system is located on the same network as the EMS of an operator. The iManager Nastar performance analysis system collects topic data of NEs through the EMS data center and provides topic analysis for network optimization. The optimization results of the topic analysis can be saved as files and sent to the CME of Huawei or a third-party data configuration tool through the EMS. Based on the optimization results, you can modify the relevant parameters by using the data configuration tool and send the modified parameters to NEs. 1.1 Introduction to the Nastar Performance Analysis System The Nastar performance analysis system is a system that performs localization and analysis of quality-related problems on the radio network. This system supports multiple performance analysis such as coverage analysis, neighboring cell analysis, uplink-interference analysis, frequency analysis, complaint assistant analysis, and VIP KPI analysis. 1.2 Position of the Nastar on the network The Nastar is located in a distributed client/server network and is connected to the M2000. 1.3 Performance Analysis Process This describes the performance analysis process.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


1-1



1.1 Introduction to the Nastar Performance Analysis System The Nastar performance analysis system is a system that performs localization and analysis of quality-related problems on the radio network. This system supports multiple performance analysis such as coverage analysis, neighboring cell analysis, uplink-interference analysis, frequency analysis, complaint assistant analysis, and VIP KPI analysis.

Overview The traditional network analysis system monitors the running status of networks by monitoring alarm information and analyzing performance reports. It analyzes networks on the basis of the alarm information and performance measurement statistics on network elements (NEs). The alarm information and measurement statistics, however, both reflect the running status of networks from the perspective of NEs. Therefore, they cannot provide evidences for expert and thorough radio network analysis and optimization. The Nastar obtains the data containing the characteristics of the radio network and analyzes the data. The data includes the MRs of radio links, pilot frequency measurement strength indicator, neighboring cell measurement data, uplink interference data, and user call events records (UCERs). By analyzing the data, the Nastar helps in locating and analyzing network problems and provides auxiliary solutions to the problems.

Product Function The Nastar performance analysis system can be used together with the parameter management system and performance report system. The Nastar performance analysis system can be used for the routine maintenance, planning, and optimization of the radio network. Table 1-1 lists the functions supported by the GSM, CDMA, and UMTS networks. Table 1-1 Functions supported by the GSM, CDMA, and UMTS networks Technology

GSM

CDMA

UMTS

TD-SCDMA

Coverage analysis

√

-

√

√

Neighboring cell analysis

√

√

√

√

Uplink interference analysis

√

√

√

-

Frequency analysis

√

-

-

-

Complaint assistant analysis

-

√

-

√

VIP KPI analysis

-

√

-

√

Table 1-2 describes the functions of the Nastar. 1-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Table 1-2 The description of the Nastar analysis functions

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Analysis function

Description

Coverage analysis

The information about the radio links involved in a customer's call in the test cell is included in the MR. The information pertains to the coverage, quality, and subscriber distribution of the carrier and cell. Coverage analysis can help network maintenance engineers analyze and locate a large number of network problems, such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, poor QoS, imbalance between uplink and downlink.

Neighboring analysis

This function is performed to analyze neighboring cells based on the MRs of the actual calls of all the subscribers in the test cell. It supports the analysis of defined and undefined neighboring cells. It helps to identify and handle the problems, including redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a cell and improper priorities of neighboring cells. In addition, it can be performed to solve network QoS problems caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration.

Uplink interference analysis

This function is performed to analyze whether the values of the main and diversity Received Signal Strength Indicators (RSSIs) of the transmit and receive channels of a BTS are normal. Based on the display and analysis in the time domain, it helps Nastar operators analyze and identify reverse interference signal sources, and thus initially locate the BTS that is being interfered with and the cause of the interference. This function can be performed to analyze and identify interference in the frequency domain and help Nastar operators select the frequencies experiencing light interference.

Frequency analysis

This function is performed to evaluate the impact of GSM frequency planning and analyze the cells and Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Numbers (ARFCNs) experiencing severe interference on the current network. If cells and ARFCNs experiencing server interference are detected during drive test (DT) analysis and traffic analysis, this function can be performed to find the frequencies that can be replaced. Therefore, network interference is decreased and network QoS is improved. Based on the interference traffic sequence of the available ARFCNs in an expansion cell, this function can also be used to find out the optimal frequencies to be added to the expansion cell. This is a basis for preparing a frequency plan for the network.


1-3



Analysis function

Description

Complaint assistant analysis

Whenever terminal subscribers encounter network-related problems, they lodge a complaint with the operators. After receiving a complaint, the operator can perform this function to obtain the UCERs pertaining to the mobile user concerned. Then, the operator can analyze the cause of the problem and then locate and solve the problem. This helps to improve the efficiency of handling complaints, thus improving user satisfaction.

VIP KPI analysis

This function is performed to filter the call records of VIP subscribers from the UCERs of the entire network and obtain the KPIs of the voice and data services of VIP subscribers. The KPIs include call drop rate, call setup delay, and forward and reverse data rate. By monitoring the QoS of VIP subscribers each day, the Nastar operators can find out the potential complaints of VIP subscribers and solve them in advance to ensure that network problems do not arise. This helps to provide better services for the VIP subscribers and improve their satisfaction.

Software Architecture As shown in Figure 1-1, the software architecture of the Nastar performance analysis system is divided into two parts: l

Server software

l

Client software

Figure 1-1 Software modules of the Nastar

Figure 1-2 shows the modules of the server software of the Nastar.

1-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 1-2 Modules of the server software of the Nastar

As shown in Figure 1-2, the server software of the Nastar consists of many functional modules. Through the Data bus, these modules communicate with each other and also communicate with the corresponding modules of the client software. In addition, these modules access the server database of the Nastar through the database interface to perform operations on the database. Table 1-3 describes the modules. Table 1-3 Modules of the server software Module Name

Function

Task management subsystem

The task management subsystem supports the functions of viewing and operating thematic analysis tasks. The task management subsystem is used to manage and maintain all the tasks of the entire system.

Data processing subsystem

l

Supports the functions of collecting, parsing, importing, and preprocessing the original data and generating data that is suitable for service analysis.

l

Supports the functions of managing, deleting, and backing up the original data.

l

Supports the functions of managing, importing, and exporting the results of performance analysis.

Service analysis subsystem

Supports the functions of topic analysis tasks and displaying the performance analysis results on the client.

The client of the Nastar provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for you to perform topic analysis. The modules corresponding to the task management subsystem and service analysis subsystem are provided on the client to enable you to gain access to these two subsystems. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


1-5



1.2 Position of the Nastar on the network The Nastar is located in a distributed client/server network and is connected to the M2000. Figure 1-3 shows the position of the Nastar on the network. Figure 1-3 Position of the Nastar on the network

The communication between the functional units on the network is based on the TCP/IP protocol. The Nastar server and the M2000 must be in the same local area network (LAN), and their IP addresses must be on the same network segment. Table 1-4 describes the functional unities in the network. Table 1-4 Functional units on the network

1-6

Function

Application Scenarios

Nastar

One of the multi-user telecommunication platforms developed by Huawei. It implements performance analyses such as coverage analysis, frequency analysis, neighboring cell analysis, uplink interference analysis, complaint assistant analysis, and VIP KPI analysis for the radio network. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Function

Application Scenarios

SAU

Service Aware Unit. It implements the communication between operation and maintenance (OM) terminals and other boards of the CBSC/RNC. For the CBSC/RNC, an extra SAU is required for preprocessing the data required by the Nastar. The main functions of the SAU are as follows:

Huawei M2000

l

Receiving the MML commands from the Nastar to manage the tasks of data pre-processing

l

Filtering and summarizing the raw data of NEs according to the principles of thematic Nastar tasks

l

Uploading the pre-processed data to the Nastar for thematic service analysis through the M2000

A uniform management platform of Huawei mobile network. It manages the mobile NEs manufactured by Huawei. The M2000 provides the following functions: l

Centralized fault management

l

Centralized performance management

l

Centralized configuration management

l

Centralized topology management

l

Centralized security management

l

System management

Connecting to the Nastar, it provides performance data, configuration data, pre-processed UCER(User Call Events Record) data, and pre-processed MR data for the Nastar through FTP. GBSC/CBSC/RNC

Base station controller. It controls BTSs and manages BTSs and radio resources.

1.3 Performance Analysis Process This describes the performance analysis process. Figure 1-4 shows the process of Nastar performance analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


1-7



Figure 1-4 Process of Nastar performance analysis

Start Create a performance data collection task

Create an E2E task

Create a performance analysis task View the results of a performance analysis task (Optional) Send the optimization results to the data configuration tool End

Table 1-5 describes the process of Nastar performance analysis. Table 1-5 Process of Nastar performance analysis

1-8

Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

1

Create an OSS

The Nastar collects the required data from the OSS (FTP server) to the Nastar server.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

2

Create a configuration data collection task

After the system installation is complete, the administrator can choose Maintenance > Task Management on the Nastar client to open the Task Management window, and then create a configuration data collection task. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required configuration data from the NMS and saves the data as files on the Nastar server for future analysis. The administrator needs to create a periodic configuration data collection task when the Nastar is used for the first time.

3

Create an end-toend task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to the NMS, and then NMS issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

4

Import engineer parameters

You can create an engineer parameters import task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar imports the engineering parameters to the database.

5

Create a performance analysis task

You can create a performance analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required performance data, uplink frequency scanning data, measurement data, and user call events records from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

6

View the results of a performance analysis task

You can view the results of the performance analysis tasks that are successfully performed after querying the analysis report.

7

Send the optimization results to the data configuration tool (optional)

The Nastar provides the function of exporting certain performance analysis optimization results as files. You can manually send the files to the Huawei data configuration tool. After checking the optimization results, the data configuration tool applies the optimization results to NEs.


1-9


2 Getting Started

2

Getting Started

About This Chapter This describes the GUIs of the client of the Nastar performance analysis system and the common operations on the GUIs. 2.1 Logging In to the Nastar This section describes how to log in to the Nastar, and how to log out the current user or exit the Nastar client. 2.2 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User This section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If you forget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password. 2.3 Customizing Client GUI Effect You can customize the GUI effect of the Nastar client. 2.4 Setting the Toolbar You can perform this task to set the shortcut buttons shown on the toolbar. 2.5 Customizing Client Time Display Mode You can customize the time display mode as desired. 2.6 Setting the Display Mode of Numbers Through this operation, customize the number display mode of the client, such as, the display mode of the system monitoring data. 2.7 Locking Client If no operation is performed within a preset period, the Nastar client is locked manually or automatically to prevent other users from illegally operating the client. 2.8 Unlocking the Client This describes how to unlock the locked Nastar client. 2.9 Broadcast Messages The broadcast message function includes "setting the broadcast parameter" and "sending the broadcast message". By the broadcast function of the Nastar, it can send messages to other users expediently. 2.10 Setting the Alarm Sound When the Network Is Disconnected Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-1


2 Getting Started

On the Nastar client, you can set the alarm sound that is played by the sound box when the Nastar client is disconnected from the network. 2.11 Managing the Nastar License Nastar licenses can restrict the number of manageable devices, and the availability duration of the Nastar. You need to manage the licenses periodically. 2.12 Collecting Nastar Log File When the Nastar client or server cannot run properly, you can collect all the running information from the Nastar client and server to locate faults. 2.13 Engineering Parameter Management This describes the project parameter management. The Nastar performance analysis system provides the function of managing project parameters for users. You can import project parameters according to the template as required, which facilitates the project implementation, network analysis, and network optimization, and guides the future construction based on the learned experience. 2.14 Creating Custom NE Groups This section describes how to create custom NE groups. The Nastar client provides the functions of creating, modifying, deleting, importing, and exporting custom NE groups. You can add certain NEs to an NE group so that the performance analysis can be performed for all the NEs in an NE group. 2.15 Querying NE Data The Nastar provides the function of querying NE data. Before creating an analysis task, you can check whether the data related to this analysis task has been imported into the Nastar database by querying the data, and check the time of the imported data. The information is the basis for the analysis task. 2.16 Reference for the Performance Analysis System GUI This describes the parameters of the client of the Nastar performance analysis system, such as the parameters related to the client login. You can refer to the description for better operations on the Nastar client.

2-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

2.1 Logging In to the Nastar This section describes how to log in to the Nastar, and how to log out the current user or exit the Nastar client. 2.1.1 Logging In to the Nastar Server The Nastar uses the client/server model. To perform an operation, you need to log in to the server through the Nastar client. 2.1.2 Logging Out the User Account To ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, you can log out the user account. This operation does not end the client program. 2.1.3 Exiting the Nastar Client When you do not need to perform any operations on the client, exit the Nastar client.

2.1.1 Logging In to the Nastar Server The Nastar uses the client/server model. To perform an operation, you need to log in to the server through the Nastar client.

Prerequisite Before login, ensure that the Nastar client and server are connected normally, and the server works correctly.

Context l

The default port number of the server is 31037. Do not change it in normal conditions. Otherwise, you cannot log in to the Nastar server.

l

By default, the password of the Administrator is empty. After you successfully log in to the Nastar server for the first time, change the password in time. For details on how to change a password, see 4.2 Changing the Password of the Current User.

l

You can only log in to the server in common mode. In common mode, the data is not encrypted during transmission.

l

If you do not log in to the Nastar server in more than 60 (default value) days, the Nastar automatically disables your account except that you are an Administrator user.

l

If you never use your new account to log in to the Nastar server, the Nastar neither disables nor deletes the new account.

l

The users in SMManagers group can click the disabled or hibernated user account on the Security Management navigation tree, and then set Enable/Disable user account to Enable on the Details tab to set the account to an enabled user account.

Procedure Step 1 From the Start menu, start the Nastar client. Step 2 In the Login dialog box, select an IP address or a host name from the Server drop-down list.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-3


2 Getting Started NOTE

l

Before logging in to the Nastar server with the host name, you should be sure that the C:\WINDOWS \system32\drivers\etc\hosts file of the Nastar client contains the mapping of the IP address to the host name.

l

If there is no server to select, do as the followings: 1. Click

on the right of Server drop box.

2. In the Server List dialog box, click Add. 3. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the server name, port, and mode. Click OK. 4. In the Server List dialog box, click OK.

Step 3 In the Login dialog box, enter the user name and password. Step 4 Click Login. l

If the user name and the password are correct, the Loading dialog box is displayed, indicating the loading progress.

l

If the user name or password is wrong, the Information dialog box prompts a login failure.

l

If the password is to expire, the system prompts you to change the password before the expiration date.

l

If the license is to expire, the system notifies you of the expiration date.

----End

2.1.2 Logging Out the User Account To ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, you can log out the user account. This operation does not end the client program.

Context l

To ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, you can log out the user account or exit the Nastar client.

l

This operation does not end the client program. After logout, the Login dialog box is displayed. You can enter the proper information in the dialog box to log in to the Nastar again.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Logout. Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. ----End

2.1.3 Exiting the Nastar Client When you do not need to perform any operations on the client, exit the Nastar client.

Context l

2-4

To ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, exit the Nastar client or log out the user account. If you do not need to perform any operations for Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

a while, you can 2.7.2 Locking the Client Manually or 2.7.1 Locking the Client Automatically. l

This operation will end the client program. If you want to perform some operations on the client, restart the Nastar client.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Exit. Step 2 In the confirm dialog box, click OK. ----End

2.2 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User This section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If you forget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password.

Context l

The password setting must comply with the password policy. For details on how to set a password policy, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy.

l

The password of the administrator contains eight or more digits. In addition, it must also comply with the password policy.

l

The user in SMManagers can reset the password of any other user except the administrator. The password of the administrator can be changed by only the administrator through the Nastar client.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 Under the Security Management navigation tree in the Security Management window, expand the User node. Right-click the user whose password you want to reset, and then choose Reset Password. NOTE

You can also choose System > Change Password to change the password.

Step 3 In the Reset Password dialog box, set New Password and Confirm Password, and then click OK. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, click OK. ----End

2.3 Customizing Client GUI Effect You can customize the GUI effect of the Nastar client. 2.3.1 Setting Font Size This section describes how to set the font size on the Nastar client. 2.3.2 Setting Output Information Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-5


2 Getting Started

The output window is at the bottom of the Nastar client GUI. It displays the prompt messages and feedback information of the errors that affect the running of the Nastar. You can manage the display of output messages and export the messages by setting the output window.

2.3.1 Setting Font Size This section describes how to set the font size on the Nastar client.

Context After you set the font size, you need to log in to the Nastar again for the settings to take effect.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Font. Step 3 In Font Size drop-down list, select a proper value. NOTE

Font Size can be as follows: l

Small: The font size is 11 pounds.

l

Middle(Default): The font size is 12 pounds.

l

Large: The font size is 13 pounds.

Step 4 Click OK. ----End

2.3.2 Setting Output Information The output window is at the bottom of the Nastar client GUI. It displays the prompt messages and feedback information of the errors that affect the running of the Nastar. You can manage the display of output messages and export the messages by setting the output window.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Output Window, and then set relevant parameters. NOTE

2-6

l

Right-click in the output pane and choose Select All, and then right-click again and choose Copy to copy all the displayed output information to the clipboard.

l

Right-click in the output pane and choose Clear to clear all the displayed output information.

l

Right-click in the output window and choose Find. Enter the keywords in the Find what text box.

l

Right-click in the output pane and choose Save As to save the output information as an *.txt file.

l

Right-click in the output window and choose Auto Scroll. The output information is set to scroll automatically. Right-click in the output window again and choose Auto Scroll, the auto scroll is cancelled.

l

Right-click in the output window and choose Parameter Setting. The Output Window pane is displayed in the Preferences window.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started


2.4 Setting the Toolbar You can perform this task to set the shortcut buttons shown on the toolbar.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Customize Toolbar. Step 2 In the Customize Toolbar dialog box, select System in the Toolbar Groups group box. Step 3 Click Advanced to display a new dialog box. NOTE

l

The new dialog box consists of two sections: Usable Tools and Customized Tools. All the buttons in Customized Tools are displayed on the toolbar, and the buttons in Usable Tools are not displayed on the toolbar.

l

Click Advanced again. The new dialog box is hidden.

l

Click Reset to restore the toolbar so that you can reset it.

Step 4 In the Toolbar Buttons dialog box, set the buttons you want to display on the toolbar. l

In the Usable Tools group box, select the buttons you want to display. Click move the buttons to Customized Tools.

l

In the Customized Tools group box, select the buttons you do not want to display. Click

to

to move the buttons to Usable Tools. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

2.5 Customizing Client Time Display Mode You can customize the time display mode as desired. 2.5.1 Setting the Time Format of the Client This section describes how to set the time format of the client. 2.5.2 Setting the Time Mode of the Client This section describes how to set the time mode of the client to determine whether the time is displayed according to the Nastar server time or the NE time. 2.5.3 Setting the Date Format of the Client This section describes how to set the date format of the client.

2.5.1 Setting the Time Format of the Client This section describes how to set the time format of the client. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-7


2 Getting Started

Context l

After you set the time format, you need to log in to the server again for the settings to take effect.

l

Next time when you log in to the client, the Nastar client automatically uses the settings that you used last time.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, expand the Region Setting node and select Time. Step 3 In the Time Settings group box, set the time format. NOTE

The time format is displayed in Appearance Example.


2.5.2 Setting the Time Mode of the Client This section describes how to set the time mode of the client to determine whether the time is displayed according to the Nastar server time or the NE time.

Context The settings take effect after you log in to the client again. l

After you set the time mode, you need to restart the Nastar client for the settings to take effect.

l


Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Time Mode. Step 3 In the Time Mode pane, select Time Mode. NOTE

The time can be displayed in two modes: l

Server time mode: If you select this mode, the information are queried according to the server time.

l

NE time mode: If you select this mode, the information are queried according to the NE time.

You are advised to retain the default value NE time mode.

Step 4 Click OK. ----End 2-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

2.5.3 Setting the Date Format of the Client This section describes how to set the date format of the client.

Context l

After you set the date format, you need to restart the Nastar client again for the settings to take effect.

l


Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, expand the Region Setting node and select Date. Step 3 In the Date group box, set the date format. NOTE

l

Date Separator: symbol to separate the date. There are three symbols for you to select: "/", "-", and ".". The default is "/".

l

Date Format: display format of the date. It can be set to "yyyy/MM/dd", "dd/MM/yyyy", or "MM/dd/yyyy".

l

The date display effect that you set is displayed in Appearance Example.


2.6 Setting the Display Mode of Numbers Through this operation, customize the number display mode of the client, such as, the display mode of the system monitoring data.

Context l

The settings take effect after you log in to the client again.

l

Next time when you log in to the client, the Nastar client automatically uses the setting that you used last time.

l

After you modify the region number settings, the display and sequence of the number may be changed. You can view the display effect in the Positive number text box and Negative number text box.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, select Number from the navigation tree on the left, and then set the number display format in the Number area on the right. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-9



l

Digits of decimal fraction: digits of decimal fraction. The default is two digits, and the value ranges from 0 to 3, 2 by default.

l

Number separator: whether to use the comma (,) to group the integer part of numbers. The default is blank space. You can choose the blank space or comma ",".

l

Start with 0: whether to add 0 before the decimal point. The default is to add a 0.


2.7 Locking Client If no operation is performed within a preset period, the Nastar client is locked manually or automatically to prevent other users from illegally operating the client. 2.7.1 Locking the Client Automatically You can set the Nastar client to lock automatically. If there is no operation performed on the client during the preset time period, the Nastar locks the client automatically. 2.7.2 Locking the Client Manually When you do not need to perform any operations on the Nastar client, you can lock the client manually to prevent illegal operations.

2.7.1 Locking the Client Automatically You can set the Nastar client to lock automatically. If there is no operation performed on the client during the preset time period, the Nastar locks the client automatically.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Lock Settings. Step 3 Select the Automatically locked check box. In the minutes, the terminal is automatically locked. text box, enter a proper value. NOTE

l

Clear the Automatically locked check box. The function of auto lock is disabled.

l

The lock interval ranges from 1 minute to 35000 minutes.

l

If you select Visible on Terminal lock, the main window of the client is visible after the client is locked. If you deselect Visible on Terminal lock, the main window of the client is invisible after the client is locked.


2.7.2 Locking the Client Manually When you do not need to perform any operations on the Nastar client, you can lock the client manually to prevent illegal operations. 2-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Lock Terminal or click

on the toolbar.

The client is locked. The Nastar does not respond to user operations until the client is unlocked. ----End

2.8 Unlocking the Client This describes how to unlock the locked Nastar client.

Context l

If you unlock your own account, the Nastar becomes operable after it is unlocked.

l

If your user account is in the Administrators user group and you unlock a user account of someone else, the unlocked account is logged out.

Procedure Step 1 When the client is locked, press Ctrl+Alt+U. Step 2 In the Unlock dialog box, enter the user name and the password, and then click OK. ----End

2.9 Broadcast Messages The broadcast message function includes "setting the broadcast parameter" and "sending the broadcast message". By the broadcast function of the Nastar, it can send messages to other users expediently. 2.9.1 Setting Broadcast Parameters Setting the broadcast parameters on the Nastar client refers to setting the number of latest messages and the total number of stored messages, that is, setting the display number of broadcast messages on the client and the total number of broadcast messages that can be cached in the server. 2.9.2 Sending Broadcast Messages This section describes how to send broadcast messages from the client.

2.9.1 Setting Broadcast Parameters Setting the broadcast parameters on the Nastar client refers to setting the number of latest messages and the total number of stored messages, that is, setting the display number of broadcast messages on the client and the total number of broadcast messages that can be cached in the server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Broadcast Message. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-11


2 Getting Started

Step 2 In the Broadcast Message dialog box, click Options. Step 3 In the Broadcast Messages Options dialog box, enter the values in Updated message count and Saved message count, click Save. NOTE

l

The value of Updated message count ranges from 1 to 1000.

l

The value of Saved message count ranges from 0 to 1000.

l

The broadcast messages are refreshed in real time.


2.9.2 Sending Broadcast Messages This section describes how to send broadcast messages from the client.

Context l

Broadcast messages are sent to only the clients that connects to the server normally after user login.

l

A client can receive the broadcast messages sent by itself. A message is displayed in the output window.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Broadcast Message. Step 2 In the Broadcast Message dialog box, enter the message content in the Sending message field. NOTE

l

A broadcast message cannot be null, and cannot exceed 128 characters.

l

The system automatically adds line feeds according to the length of broadcast messages.

Step 3 Click Send. When the sending is complete, the Message dialog box is displayed on other clients. Users can click Detail to view the message. Step 4 In the Information dialog box, click OK. ----End

2.10 Setting the Alarm Sound When the Network Is Disconnected On the Nastar client, you can set the alarm sound that is played by the sound box when the Nastar client is disconnected from the network.

Context l

2-12

You can use the sound file of the Nastar or others. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started l

Only the sound files of the Wav type in PCM format are supported. The Microsoft ADPCM type is not supported.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, select Disconnection Sound from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 In the Disconnection Sound group box, select Enable, and then click box, select a sound file, and then click Open.

. In the Open dialog

NOTE

You can click

to play the sound.


2.11 Managing the Nastar License Nastar licenses can restrict the number of manageable devices, and the availability duration of the Nastar. You need to manage the licenses periodically. 2.11.1 Querying the Nastar License This topic describes how to query the license file on the Nastar server through the Nastar client. 2.11.2 Updating the Nastar License This topic describes how to replace the Nastar license file on the Nastar server through the client.

2.11.1 Querying the Nastar License This topic describes how to query the license file on the Nastar server through the Nastar client.

Procedure Step 1 ChooseHelp > License Information. Step 2 In the License Information dialog box, query the license information about resources and functions on the Resource control item and Function control item tabs. ----End

2.11.2 Updating the Nastar License This topic describes how to replace the Nastar license file on the Nastar server through the client.

Context l

The type of the license applied for must be consistent with the version type.

l

The valid time for the license that is uniformly used in Nastar contains two fields: Expiry (Days) and End Time. If both the fields exist, the value of Expiry(Days) is valid.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-13


2 Getting Started

Procedure Step 1 Choose Help > License Information. Step 2 In the License Information dialog box, click Update. Step 3 In the Open dialog box, select the new license file, and then click Open. Step 4 In the License Information dialog box, view the changes of the licenses, and then click Close. ----End

2.12 Collecting Nastar Log File When the Nastar client or server cannot run properly, you can collect all the running information from the Nastar client and server to locate faults.

Prerequisite You have logged in to the Nastar client.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Help > Logs Collection. The Logs Collection window is displayed. Step 2 Set the relevant parameters. For details about these parameters, see 2.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log Files. Step 3 Click Collect. ----End

2.13 Engineering Parameter Management This describes the project parameter management. The Nastar performance analysis system provides the function of managing project parameters for users. You can import project parameters according to the template as required, which facilitates the project implementation, network analysis, and network optimization, and guides the future construction based on the learned experience. 2.13.1 Importing/Exporting Engineering Parameters This section describes how to import and export engineering parameters. You can export the engineering parameters in .csv, .xls, or .xlsx files to the Nastar database, which provides reference for certain algorithms of the performance analysis and for assistant analysis. You can also export all the engineering parameters in the Nastar database as .csv or .xls files to facilitate the query and management of engineering parameters. 2.13.2 Querying Engineering Parameters This describes how to query engineering parameters. You can query the information about the imported engineering parameters of NEs . 2-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

2.13.1 Importing/Exporting Engineering Parameters This section describes how to import and export engineering parameters. You can export the engineering parameters in .csv, .xls, or .xlsx files to the Nastar database, which provides reference for certain algorithms of the performance analysis and for assistant analysis. You can also export all the engineering parameters in the Nastar database as .csv or .xls files to facilitate the query and management of engineering parameters.

Prerequisite l

You have logged in to the Nastar client.

l

You are authorized to manage the engineering parameters.

Context The engineering parameters include mainly the cell engineering information, geographical information, and key configuration information. The engineering parameters can be imported to the database to provide reference for certain algorithms of the performance analysis and for assistant analysis. The engineering parameter template files in .csv, .xls, and .xlsx formats can be imported. To open .xlsx files, you must install Microsoft Office 2007.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > Engineering parameter management from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. Step 2 Import or export engineering parameters as required. If You Want to ...

Then ...

Import engineering parameters

Perform Step 3.

Export engineering parameters

Perform Step 4.

Step 3 Perform the following operations to import engineering parameters: 1.

In the Engineering parameter management window, click the *** engineering parameters tab and then click Import. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2.

In the displayed Open dialog box, select an engineering parameter file, and then click Open. If an engineering parameter file in .xls or .xlsx format is selected and the file contains multiple worksheets, a prompt is displayed for you to select the worksheet to be imported.

3.

Configure the column headers. l

At the header of each column, you can right-click and choose the title of the current column. When you move the pointer to the column header of a column, a pop-up message is displayed, showing the information about this column, for example, column number/ configured columns headings/column headings in the engineering parameter file.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-15


2 Getting Started l

The column headers marked with the * character must be configured. Otherwise, the import operation is not allowed.

l

If you need to modify an incorrectly configured column header, right-click the column header, clear the check box next to the original header, and then reconfigure the header.

l

GSM system

l

–

The number of digits in the BCC and NCC values cannot exceed two. The values of the BCC, NCC, MNC, and MCC must not be null and must be unique. The values of LACs and CIs of two different cells cannot be both the same. Otherwise, the engineering parameter file cannot be imported to the database.

–

It is recommended that the BCCH, BCC, NCC, and CGI information regarding each cell in the engineering parameters be the same as that in the configuration parameter files. Otherwise, cells cannot be accurately located during neighboring cell analysis or frequency analysis.

CDMA system The values of MSC ID, cell ID, and sector ID of a carrier must not be null. The values of MSC ID, cell ID, and sector ID of two different carriers cannot be all the same. Otherwise, the engineering parameter file cannot be imported to the database.

l

UMTS system The values of RNC ID and cell ID of a cell must not be null. The values of RNC ID and cell ID of two different cells cannot be both the same. Otherwise, the engineering parameter file cannot be imported to the database.

l

TD-SCDMA system The values of RNC ID and Cell ID of a cell must not be null. The values RNC ID and Cell ID of two different cells cannot be both the same. In addition, the RNC ID and Cell ID in the engineering parameters must be the same as those in the configuration parameter file. Otherwise, the engineering parameter file cannot be imported to the database.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Perform the operations as prompted.

6.

l

If the imported information is correct and no duplicates of the records exist, go to Step 3.6.

l

If the imported information is correct but certain duplicates of the records exist, the system will overwrite the existing records and import the additional records. After the import is complete, go to Step 3.6.

l

If certain abnormal records exist in the information to be imported, the import of the current file is not allowed. In this case, the system displays the number of abnormal records. –

For CDMA, UMTS and TD-SCDMA system, Click Export Check Result to export the check result so that you can make modifications based on the error information to complete the current import task.

–

You can click Cancel to terminate the current import task.

In the displayed dialog box, click OK.

Step 4 Perform the following operations to export engineering parameters: 1.

In the Engineering parameter management window, click the *** engineering parameters tab and then click Export. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

2.

Set a file name and specify the save path and file type in the displayed Save dialog box, and then click Save.

----End

2.13.2 Querying Engineering Parameters This describes how to query engineering parameters. You can query the information about the imported engineering parameters of NEs .

Prerequisite l


l

You have imported engineering parameters.

Procedure Step 1 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the Analysis Task Management window, choose Function List > System Function > Engineering Parameter Management. Step 2 In the Engineering Parameter Management window, click the *** Engineering Parameters tab, and query the engineering parameter information about each NE. l

*** represents a network technology. It can be GSM, CDMA, or UMTS.

l

By default, the engineering result list displays all the engineering parameter information that has been imported to the database. To view the required engineering parameter information, you can deselect all the objects in the left NE object navigation tree and then select the objects that you want to view.

l

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects that meet the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

----End

Postrequisite l

Delete engineering parameter. In the NE object navigation tree on the left, select the NE node whose engineering parameters you plan to delete, and then click

l

.

Synchronize the engineering parameters with the configuration data as required. This function is applicable to the GSM and the UMTS system. NOTE

When the engineering parameters are imported to the Nastar database, the system updates the engineering parameters such as BSC name, BCCH information, BSIC, cell name, and BTS name according to the latest configuration data. If the configuration data is changed later, you must synchronize the engineering parameters with the configuration data manually or import the modified engineering parameter file to maintain the consistency between the configuration data and the engineering parameters.

To synchronize the engineering parameters with the configuration data, do as follows: Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-17


2 Getting Started

1.

In the Engineering Parameter Management window, click the GSM Engineering Parameters tab.

2.

Click

in the upper right corner of the window.

2.14 Creating Custom NE Groups This section describes how to create custom NE groups. The Nastar client provides the functions of creating, modifying, deleting, importing, and exporting custom NE groups. You can add certain NEs to an NE group so that the performance analysis can be performed for all the NEs in an NE group.

Prerequisite l


l

You are authorized to manage NE groups.

Context The export of custom NE group files in .csv and .xls formats are supported.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > NE Group Management from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. The NE Group Management window is displayed. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: If You Want to ...

Then ...

Create a custom NE group directly

Perform Step 3.

Create a custom NE group by importing one

Perform Step 4.

Step 3 Create a custom NE group directly. 1.

Click the *** NE Group Management tab. Click New to open the NE Group Edit dialog box. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2.

Set the relevant parameters. l

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can rightclick any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to open the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to determine the direction of the search.

l

2-18

For description of the parameters, see 2.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE Groups. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

3.

Click OK.

Step 4 Create a custom NE group by importing one. 1.

Click the *** NE Group Management tab, and then click Import. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2.

In the displayed Open dialog box, select an edited NE group file, and then click Open. If an NE group file in .xls format is selected and the file contains multiple worksheets, a prompt is displayed. In this case, select the worksheet to be imported. NOTE

3.

l

If multiple lines of remarks regarding an NE group are inconsistent in the edited NE group file, the system displays the last line of remarks on the Note title bar of the NE Group Management window.

l

It is recommended that the remarks in different lines regarding an NE group be consistent when you define NE group information.

Perform the operations as prompted. l

If the imported information is correct and no duplicates of the records exist, go to Step 4.4.

l

If the imported information is correct but certain duplicates of the records exist, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. In this case, click Yes to overwrite the existing records and import the additional records. After the import is complete, go to Step 4.4. You can also click No in the displayed Confirm dialog box to ignore the duplicate records and import the additional records.

l

4.

If certain abnormal records exist in the information to be imported, the import of the current file is not allowed. In this case, the system displays the number of abnormal records. –

Click Export Check Result to export the check result so that you can make modifications based on the error information to complete the current import task.

–

You can click Cancel to terminate the current import task.


----End

Postrequisite l

Modifying the attributes of a custom NE group 1.

In the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab. Select an NE group, and then click Modify. The NE Group Edit dialog box is displayed. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2.

Modify the relevant parameters. The objects and remarks of an NE groups can be modified but the name of an NE groups cannot be modified. For description of the parameters, see 2.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE Groups.

3. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-19



If the NE group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoing tasks. If the NE group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updated in the next period after the modification. TIP

When you need to modify NE group information in batches, you can export the NE group information, make modifications, and then import the NE group information again. l

Viewing the information about members of the custom NE group In the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab. Then, double-click a custom NE group to view the detailed information about the members of the custom NE group. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

l

Deleting custom NE groups 1.

In the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab. Then, select one or multiple NE groups and click Delete. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2.

In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK. NOTE

If the NE group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoing tasks. If the NE group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updated in the next period after the modification. l

Exporting the custom NE group information to .csv or .xls files 1.

In the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab. Then, select one or multiple NE groups and click Export. *** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2.

Set a file name and specify the save path and file type in the displayed Save dialog box, and then click Save. NOTE

You can also choose Save As on the *** NE Group Management tab page to export all the NE group information.

2.15 Querying NE Data The Nastar provides the function of querying NE data. Before creating an analysis task, you can check whether the data related to this analysis task has been imported into the Nastar database by querying the data, and check the time of the imported data. The information is the basis for the analysis task.

Prerequisite

2-20

l


l

You have imported the data corresponding to an analysis task.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Procedure Step 1 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the Analysis Task Management window, choose Function List > System Function > Data Query. Step 2 In the left pane of the Data Query window, set Data Type and Condition Selection, and then select an NE object from the NE object navigation tree. Condition Selection is optional. You need to select Required Time Limited before setting the time range. If the time is not limited, you need not set this option. Step 3 Click Query in the lower-left corner. Then, you can determine whether the data related to the analysis task is imported into the Nastar database by viewing the information in the right pane. You can also view the time of the imported data. The data of different network systems is displayed in a two-dimensional table in the right pane, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Data Query window

NOTE

The right pane is described as follows: l

Overview tab page displays the analysis start time of all BSCs. Other tab pages display the information about each BSC.

l

Each line represents one day, and the columns from 0 to 23 represent hours.

l

The cells in green indicate that the analysis data of a BSC at the time exists. The cells in white indicate that the analysis data of a BSC at the time does not exist.

l

The number in each cell refers to the quantity of analysis data of a BSC at the time.

----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-21


2 Getting Started

2.16 Reference for the Performance Analysis System GUI This describes the parameters of the client of the Nastar performance analysis system, such as the parameters related to the client login. You can refer to the description for better operations on the Nastar client. 2.16.1 Interface Description: Nastar Client This section describes the contents and functions of the Nastar client. 2.16.2 Nastar Menu Function Reference This section describes the Nastar menus and their functions. You can refer to this section if you are not familiar with the access to an operation. 2.16.3 Keyboard Shortcuts The Nastar client provides keyboard shortcuts for some operations. You can perform these operations more quickly by using the keyboard shortcuts than using the mouse. 2.16.4 Parameters for Server Information This section describes the parameters in the Server List dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you log in to the Nastar. 2.16.5 Parameters for Logging In to the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters in the Login dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you log in to the Nastar. 2.16.6 Parameters for Output GUI Information This section describes the parameters in the Output Window group box. You can refer to these parameters when you set output information. 2.16.7 Parameters for Setting the Time/Date Style This section describes the parameters in the Time/Date dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you set the client time/date style. 2.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log Files This describes the parameters for collecting Nastar log files. You can refer to the description when collecting Nastar log files. 2.16.9 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Engineering Parameters This section describes the parameters for importing and exporting the engineering parameters. You can refer to these parameters when importing and exporting the engineering parameters. 2.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE Groups This section describes the parameters for creating and modifying custom NE groups. You can refer to the parameter description when creating and modifying the custom NE groups.

2.16.1 Interface Description: Nastar Client This section describes the contents and functions of the Nastar client.

GUI Introduction Figure 2-2 shows the displayed GUI after you log in to the Nastar client. Table 2-1 describes the items in Figure 2-2.

2-22


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Figure 2-2 GUI of the Nastar client

Table 2-1 GUI description of the Nastar client

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

No.

Name

Description

(1)

Area of system tool buttons

Describes the operation buttons of the Nastar client.

(2)

Function list navigation pane

Displays all the theme functions and system functions of the Nastar through a navigation tree.

(3)

Menu items

Describes the menus and related functions of the Nastar.

(4)

Area of theme analysis task list

Displays the theme analysis tasks that are created by users.

(5)

Area of theme analysis result list

Displays the corresponding theme analysis result when you select a certain theme analysis task in Area (4).


2-23


2 Getting Started

System Tool Buttons Icon

Name

Description

Exit

Exits the Nastar client.

Logout

Logs out of the current user.

Lock Terminal

When the client is locked, you cannot do any operations on the client, and you need to enter your password to unlock the client.

Full Screen

If you click this icon, the menu bar, toolbar, output window, and status bar are hidden. Thus, you can expand the main window in full screen. Press ESC or click Close Full Screen to exit the full screen.

2.16.2 Nastar Menu Function Reference This section describes the Nastar menus and their functions. You can refer to this section if you are not familiar with the access to an operation. Table 2-2 describes the submenus of the System main menu. Table 2-2 System menus Menu Item System Monitor

Log Management

2-24

Description Browser

Open the System Monitor Browser window to browse the status of the services, processes, hard disks, databases, system resources, components, and logs.

Settings

Set the parameter values for performance monitoring, hard disk monitoring, database monitoring, and service monitoring.

Query Operation Logs

Set a template or a filter condition for browsing operation logs to know the information about user operations.

Query System Logs

Set a template or a filter condition for browsing system logs to know the events that occur during the system operation.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Menu Item

Description Query Security Logs

Set a template or a filter condition for browsing security logs to know the information about the security operations such as login, logout, and unlocking a user account.

Operation Log Statistics

Use a template or set one or more statistical items and filter conditions to collect statistics on operation logs and display these operation logs.

System Log Statistics

Use a template or set one or more statistical items and filter conditions to collect statistics on system logs and display these system logs.

Security Log Statistics

Use a template or set one or more statistical items and filter conditions to collect statistics on security logs and display these security logs.

Preferences

Set the font size on the client GUI, output window action, time and date, client auto lock, disconnection sound, number display mode, time mode, upgrade and login mode.

Customize Toolbar

Customize the display of the toolbar on the client GUI, including whether to display the tool buttons and which tool buttons to display.

Broadcast Message

Open the Broadcast dialog box to send broadcast messages.

Lock Terminal

Lock the client immediately.

Change Password

Change the password of the current user logged in.

Logout

The current user logs out of the Nastar client but does not close the client.

Full Screen

Display the current window in full screen.

Exit

The current user logs out of the Nastar client and closes the client.

Table 2-3 describes the submenus of the Maintenance main menu. Table 2-3 Maintenance menus

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Menu Item

Description

Task Management

Open the Task Management window to perform operations related to centralized task management.


2-25


2 Getting Started

Menu Item

Description

OSS Management

The OSS and NE management subsystem provides the basic functions for managing objects. The objects contain OSS systems, subnets, and NEs.

E2E Task Management

Open the E2E Task Management window to perform operations related to end-to-end task management.

Table 2-4 describes the submenus of the Security main menu. Table 2-4 Security menus Menu Item

Description

Security Management

Open the Security Management window to manage the users, user groups, and operation sets.

User Monitor

Monitor the user operations, the current sessions or force the user to exit.

ACL

Add, modify, and delete the IP address or network segment in the ACL.

Security Policy

Set the security policies of the Nastar, including the password policy, user account policy, and system policy.

Table 2-5 describes the submenus of the Window main menu. Table 2-5 Tab page menus

2-26

Menu Item

Description

Close

Close the active tab page.

Close All

Close all the open tab pages.

Minimize

To minimize the active tab page. After the tab page is minimized, the icon of the tab page is displayed in the lower left corner.

Minimize All

Minimize all the open tab pages. After the tab pages are minimized, the icons of the tab pages are displayed in the lower left corner.

Toggle Window Tabbed Bar

Show or hide the tab bar in the window.

Toggle Message Output Area

Show or hide the message output area at the bottom of the window.

Cascade

Cascade all the open tab pages on the client. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Menu Item

Description

Tile

Tile all the open tab pages on the client. Each tab page occupies a part of the client GUI.

Tile Horizontally

Tile all the open tab pages on the client. Each tab page occupies a part from the top to bottom of the client GUI.

Tile Vertically

Tile all the open tab pages on the client. Each tab page occupies a part from the left to right of the client GUI.

Table 2-6 describes the submenus of the Help main menu. Table 2-6 Help menus Menu Item

Description

Help Topics

To view the Online Help.

Check For Upgrades

Check whether the Nastar client needs to be upgraded.

Environmental Information

To view the environment information.

License Information

To Update the Nastar License information.

Logs Collection

To collect all the running information from the Nastar client and server to locate faults.

About

To view the version information of the Nastar.

2.16.3 Keyboard Shortcuts The Nastar client provides keyboard shortcuts for some operations. You can perform these operations more quickly by using the keyboard shortcuts than using the mouse.

Keyboard Shortcuts of Controls on GUIs Table 2-7 describes keyboard shortcuts of controls on GUIs. You can use keyboard shortcuts instead of the mouse to perform operations on GUIs conveniently. Table 2-7 Controls and corresponding keyboard shortcuts

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Control

Description

Menu

For any menu followed by an asterisk * (* represents a letter or number), you can press Alt+* instead of choosing the menu.

Drop-down menu

For any drop-down menu followed by an asterisk *, you can press * instead of choosing the menu when the menu is expanded.


2-27


2 Getting Started

Control

Description

Button

l

For any button followed by an asterisk * (* represents a letter or number), you can press Alt+* instead of clicking the button.

l

When a dialog box is open and the focus is on a button, this button is the default button. If the focus is not on any button, OK is the default button.

l

When the focus is on a button, you can press Enter or space bar instead of clicking the button.

l

If the focus is on a control that does not respond when you press Enter, then the effect is the same when you press Enter or when you click the default button.

Drop-down list

When the focus is on a drop-down list, you can press the down arrow key to expand the drop-down list. You can press the Up, Down arrow keys to switch between options in a drop-down list, and press Enter to select the current option.

Option button

If the focus is on an option button, you can press the space bar to select the option button.

Check box

If the focus is on a check box, you can press the space bar to select or clear the check box.

Navigation tree

When the focus is on the navigation tree, you can move the Down arrow key or Up arrow key to switch between the nodes in the tree. And you can move the Left arrow key or Right arrow key to expand or collapse a node that contains subnodes.

Switching between controls

When there are multiple controls in a window, dialog box, or tab page, you can press Tab to switch from one control to another, and press Shift +Tab to switch to the previous control.

Other Combined Shortcut Keys Table 2-8 describes other combined shortcut keys provided by the Nastar client. You can use these compound shortcut keys to perform operations quickly. Table 2-8 Shortcut keys

2-28

Operation

Shortcut keys

Exit a dialog box or prompt

Esc

Unlock a terminal

Ctrl+Alt+U

Open the Help

F1

Close the current window

Ctrl+F4

Restore down (when the service window in the public window is maximized)

Ctrl+F5


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Operation

Shortcut keys

Minimize the window (applied to the service window in the public window)

Ctrl+F9

Maximize the window (when the service window in the public window is restored)

Ctrl+F10

NOTE

The public window area refers to the area below the toolbar on the Nastar client.

2.16.4 Parameters for Server Information This section describes the parameters in the Server List dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you log in to the Nastar.

Parameters Name

Description

Settings

Server Name

Description:

Value:

The host name or the IP address of the Nastar server.

Value range: 1-50 characters.

Description:

Value:

The port number of the Nastar server.

Value range: 1-65535.

Port

The server name must be unique and cannot be left blank.

Default value: 31037. Mode

Add

Modify

Delete

Description:

Value:

The mode of the connection.

Common.

Description:

Value:

To add a Nastar server.

-

Description:

Value:

To modify the specified Nastar server.

-

Description:

Value:

To delete the specified Nastar server.

-

2.16.5 Parameters for Logging In to the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters in the Login dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you log in to the Nastar.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-29


2 Getting Started

Parameters Name

Description

Settings

User Name

Description:

Value:

The valid user name registered in the Nastar server.

Cannot be null.

Description:

Value:

Used to log in to the Nastar server, displayed as *.

l

When using the default password policy, the user password cannot be less than six characters. For the description of the password policy parameters, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy.

l

The password of Administrator cannot be less than eight characters.

Password

Server

Description:

Value:

IP address or host name of the Nastar server to log in.

Cannot be null. Select the Nastar server you want to log in from the drop-down list. NOTE Click on the right, and then the Server List dialog box is displayed. You can add, modify, or delete the server information in the dialog box.

2.16.6 Parameters for Output GUI Information This section describes the parameters in the Output Window group box. You can refer to these parameters when you set output information.

Parameters

2-30

Name

Description

Settings

Maximum Output Lines

Description:

Value:

The maximum lines that can be displayed in the output window. If the lines of output information exceed the maximum lines, the earliest input lines are deleted automatically and the maximum lines are displayed.

Value range: 30-3000


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Name

Description

Settings

Automatically scroll to the new message

Description:

Setting method:

If you select this option and there is new output information, the output window scrolls to the new information automatically. If you deselect this option, you can only scroll to the new information manually.

-

Automatic dump

Description:

Setting method:

If you select this option, the output information is dumped to a file according to the preset conditions.

-

Dump Lines

Description:

Value:

Dump lines of output information. The value cannot exceed the value set in Maximum Output Lines. If the value exceeds the preset maximum value, the output information is dumped to the corresponding file automatically, and the dump lines are the same as that set in Dump Lines.

Value range: 20-300

Description:

Setting method:

The dump path and dump file name of output information. The files saved in TXT format.

Cannot be null.

Dump File Name

2.16.7 Parameters for Setting the Time/Date Style This section describes the parameters in the Time/Date dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you set the client time/date style.

Time Parameters

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Name

Description

Settings

Time Format

Description:

Setting method:

HH:mm:ss and hh:mm:ss tt:

The default is HH:mm:ss.

l

HH indicates the 24-hour format.

l

hh indicates the 12-hour format.

l

mm indicates minutes.

l

ss indicates seconds.

l

tt indicates the suffix for morning or afternoon.


The value can be HH:mm:ss or hh:mm:ss tt.

2-31


2 Getting Started

Name

Description

Settings

Time Indicator

Description:

Value:

Format of the suffix for morning or afternoon.

The value is AM/PM.

Description:

Setting method:

Indicates whether to show the time zone.

Check box.

If you select the check box, the time zone is displayed after the time.

For example, 15:10:20 +08:00.

Description:

Setting method:

Indicates whether to show the daylight saving time.

Check box.

If you select the check box, the DST is displayed after the time.

For example, 15:10:20 DST.

Name

Description

Settings

Date Separator

Description:

Setting method:

Symbol to separate the date.

There are three symbols can be set to "/", "-", and ".". The default is "/".

Description:

Value:

Display format of the date.

There are three format can be set to "yyyy/MM/dd", "dd/MM/yyyy", or "MM/dd/yyyy".

Show time zone offset

Show daylight saving time (DST)

Example:

Example:

Date Parameters

Date Format

2.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log Files This describes the parameters for collecting Nastar log files. You can refer to the description when collecting Nastar log files.

Parameter description

2-32

Parameter

Description

Server Address

Indicates the IP address of the server.

Ftp Port

Indicates the port of the server.

FTP User Name

Indicates a valid name that the user already registered to the Nastar.

Password

Indicates the password that is used to log in to the target server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Start Time

Indicates the start time for collecting log files.

End Time

Indicates the end time for collecting log files.

Path

Indicates the directory for the collected log files.

2.16.9 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Engineering Parameters This section describes the parameters for importing and exporting the engineering parameters. You can refer to these parameters when importing and exporting the engineering parameters.

GSM Parameter Description

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Value Range

Optional/ Mandatory

MSCName

Indicates the name of an MSC.

String

Optional

BSCName

Indicates the name of a BSC.

String

Mandatory

SiteName

Indicates the name of a BTS.

String

Mandatory

CellName

Indicates the name of a cell.

String

MCC

Indicates the mobile country code.

Integer

Mandatory

MNC

Indicates the mobile network code.

Integer and only a two-digit number

Mandatory

LAC

Indicates the location area code of a cell.

l

Integer

l

Value range: 1 to 65533, 65535

CI

Indicates the cell identification.

Integer

BCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel.

l

Integer

l

Value range: 1 to 1023


Mandatory

Mandatory Mandatory

2-33


2 Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Value Range

Optional/ Mandatory

TCH

Traffic channel.

String

Optional

Character strings can be separated by space, comma (,), or semicolon (;). BCC

Indicates the color code of a BTS.

l

Integer

l

Value range: 1 to 8

Indicates the network color code.

l

Integer

l

Value range: 1 to 8

Longitude

Indicates the longitude where a cell is located, for example, 116.389722.

[-180.0, 180.0]

Mandatory

Latitude

Indicates the latitude where a cell is located, for example, 39.952778.

[-90.0, 90.0]

Mandatory

Azimuth

Indicates the azimuth of an antenna.

[0, 360]

Mandatory

Is Outdoor

Indicates whether the cell is an outdoor cell.

l

0: No

l

1: Yes

Indicates whether the cell is a directional cell.

l

0: No

l

1: Yes

NCC

Is Direct

Mandatory

Mandatory

Optional

Optional

CDMA Parameter Description

2-34

Parameter

Description

Value Range

Optional/ Mandatory

MSC_ID

Indicates the number of an MSC.

String

Mandatory

BSC_ID

Indicates the number of a BSC.

Integer

Mandatory

BTS_ID

Indicates the number of a BTS.

Integer

Mandatory

Cell_ID

Indicates the number of a cell.

Integer

Mandatory

Sector_ID

Indicates the number of a sector.

Integer

Mandatory


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Value Range

Optional/ Mandatory

Longitude


[-180.0, 180.0]

Mandatory

Latitude


[-90.0, 90.0]

Mandatory

Azimuth


[0, 360]

Mandatory

AntennaGain (dBi)

Indicates the antenna gain.

Floating number

Mandatory

UMTS Parameter Description Parameter

Description

Value Range

Optional/ Mandatory

MSCName

Indicates the name of an MSC.

String

Optional

RNCId

Indicates the number of an RNC.

Integer

Mandatory

NodeBID

Indicates the number of a NodeB.

Integer

Mandatory

NodeBName

Indicates the name of a NodeB.

String

Mandatory

Cell ID


Integer

Mandatory

CellName


String

Mandatory

LAC


Integer

Mandatory

RAC

Indicates the route area code of a cell.

l

Integer

l


Indicates the service area code of a cell.

l

Integer

l


Indicates the downlink ARFCNs of a cell.

Integer

SAC

UARFCNDOWNLINK

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

2-35


2 Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Value Range

Optional/ Mandatory

UARFCNUPLINK

Indicates the uplink ARFCNs of a cell.

Integer

Optional

P-SC

Indicates the primary scramble code of a cell.

Integer

Mandatory

Longitude


[-180.0, 180.0]

Mandatory

Latitude


[-90.0, 90.0]

Mandatory

Azimuth


[0, 360]

Mandatory

Is Outdoor


l

0: No

l

1: Yes


l

0: No

l

1: Yes

Is Direct

Optional

Optional

TD-SCDMA Parameter Description Parameter

Description

Value Range

RNC ID

Indicates the number of an RNC.

l

Integer

l

Unique and existent in the existing network

Indicates the number of a NodeB.

l

Integer

l


NodeB Name

Indicates the name of a NodeB.

String

Cell ID


l

Integer

l



String

NodeB ID

Cell Name

2-36


Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory

Optional

Optional Mandatory

Optional

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2 Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Value Range

Optional/ Mandatory

UARFCN

Indicates the Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN).

Integer

Mandatory

LAC


Integer

Optional

RAC

Indicates the route area code of a cell.

Integer

Optional

PSC

Indicates the primary scramble code of a cell.

Integer

Optional

Longitude


[-180.0, 180.0]

Mandatory

Latitude


[-90.0, 90.0]

Mandatory

Azimuth


[0, 360]

Mandatory

IsOutdoor


l

yes

l

no


l

yes

l

no

IsDirect

Optional

Optional

2.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE Groups This section describes the parameters for creating and modifying custom NE groups. You can refer to the parameter description when creating and modifying the custom NE groups.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


2-37


2 Getting Started

Parameter Description Parameter

Description

NE Group Name

Indicates the name of the NE group, for example, Cell_1. Value range:

Remarks

l

A maximum of 20 characters

l

Characters not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \ / , ' `

l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Provides the description of an NE group. Value range:

2-38

l


l

Characters not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \ / , ' `


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3 Monitoring the Status of the Nastar

3

Monitoring the Status of the Nastar

About This Chapter When monitoring the running status and resource status of the Nastar, you can obtain the health status of the Nastar in time, and handle the exceptions of the Nastar hardware and software in time. 3.1 Basic Knowledge of System Monitoring This section describes the basic functions of the system monitor client. You can use these system monitoring functions to know the running status of the Nastar server in time. 3.2 Setting Nastar Server Thresholds You can set thresholds for the performance monitoring, hard disk monitoring, database monitoring, and service monitoring. When the threshold is reached, the Nastar raises an alarm. 3.3 Monitoring the Nastar You can monitor the running status (including the status of the CPU, hard disk, database, processes, and services) and the component information of the Nastar server as well as logs of the operations performed on the system monitor client. 3.4 Reference of System Monitoring GUIs This section describes the parameters displayed on system monitoring GUIs.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-1



3.1 Basic Knowledge of System Monitoring This section describes the basic functions of the system monitor client. You can use these system monitoring functions to know the running status of the Nastar server in time. 3.1.1 System Monitoring Functions In system monitoring, the status information of the monitored objects is collected, and the thresholds of the monitored objects are configured. Thus, the running status of the Nastar can be displayed in real time, and prompts are provided when exceptions occur. 3.1.2 Relation Between Threshold and Alarm You can set alarm thresholds for the Nastar. When the CPU usage, memory usage, hard disk usage, or database usage of the Nastar exceeds the preset alarm threshold, a relevant alarm is raised, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed in red. After the alarm is sent, if the CPU usage, memory usage, hard disk usage, or database usage is less than the preset threshold, a corresponding cleared alarm is sent, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed in green.

3.1.1 System Monitoring Functions In system monitoring, the status information of the monitored objects is collected, and the thresholds of the monitored objects are configured. Thus, the running status of the Nastar can be displayed in real time, and prompts are provided when exceptions occur.

Settings You can set the thresholds for monitoring system resources, hard disks, databases, and services. When the threshold of a monitored object is reached, an alarm is raised on the Nastar to prompt the user to handle the exception in time.

Monitored Objects In system monitoring, you can conveniently view the status of the following monitored objects: l

Service Monitor: monitors the service information and the service running status of the Nastar server.

l

Process Monitor: monitors the process information and the OS resource usage of the Nastar server.

l

Hard Disk Monitor: monitors the hard disk partitions, usage, and status of the Nastar server.

l

Database Monitor: monitors the database information of the Nastar server.

l

System Resources Monitor: monitors the system resource usage of the Nastar server, and displays the CPU usage and the memory usage in real time.

l

Component Information: displays the information of the components installed on the Nastar server.

l

Operation Logs: displays the operations on the system monitor client.

3.1.2 Relation Between Threshold and Alarm You can set alarm thresholds for the Nastar. When the CPU usage, memory usage, hard disk usage, or database usage of the Nastar exceeds the preset alarm threshold, a relevant alarm is 3-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



raised, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed in red. After the alarm is sent, if the CPU usage, memory usage, hard disk usage, or database usage is less than the preset threshold, a corresponding cleared alarm is sent, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed in green.

3.2 Setting Nastar Server Thresholds You can set thresholds for the performance monitoring, hard disk monitoring, database monitoring, and service monitoring. When the threshold is reached, the Nastar raises an alarm. 3.2.1 Setting the Parameters for the System Resources Monitoring You can set the parameters for the system resources monitoring to specify the threshold of the CPU usage, memory usage, and refresh period of the system resources monitoring. When the CPU usage and memory usage reach the thresholds, the Nastar raises corresponding alarms, and the corresponding icon on the System Resources Monitor browsing tab pages is displayed in red. 3.2.2 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Hard Disk Monitoring You can set the parameters for the Nastar server hard disk monitoring to specify the threshold of the hard disk usage and the refresh period of the hard disk monitoring. When the Nastar server hard disk usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon on the Hard Disk Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red. 3.2.3 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Database Monitoring You can set the parameters for the Nastar server database monitoring to specify the threshold of the database usage and the refresh period of the database monitoring. When the Nastarserver database usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon on the Database Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red. 3.2.4 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Service Monitoring You can set the parameters for service monitoring to specify popup prompts and refresh interval for service monitoring. Thus, when the service is changed, the corresponding prompts are displayed. At the same time, the service is refreshed according to the specified interval.

3.2.1 Setting the Parameters for the System Resources Monitoring You can set the parameters for the system resources monitoring to specify the threshold of the CPU usage, memory usage, and refresh period of the system resources monitoring. When the CPU usage and memory usage reach the thresholds, the Nastar raises corresponding alarms, and the corresponding icon on the System Resources Monitor browsing tab pages is displayed in red.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Settings. Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the System Resources Monitor tab to set the property values. Step 3 Click OK. ----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-3



3.2.2 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Hard Disk Monitoring You can set the parameters for the Nastar server hard disk monitoring to specify the threshold of the hard disk usage and the refresh period of the hard disk monitoring. When the Nastar server hard disk usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon on the Hard Disk Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Settings. Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the Hard Disk Monitor tab to set the property values. Step 3 Click OK. ----End

3.2.3 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Database Monitoring You can set the parameters for the Nastar server database monitoring to specify the threshold of the database usage and the refresh period of the database monitoring. When the Nastarserver database usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon on the Database Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Settings. Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the Database Monitor tab to set the property values. Step 3 Click OK. ----End

3.2.4 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Service Monitoring You can set the parameters for service monitoring to specify popup prompts and refresh interval for service monitoring. Thus, when the service is changed, the corresponding prompts are displayed. At the same time, the service is refreshed according to the specified interval.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Settings. Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the Service Monitor tab to set the property values. Step 3 Click OK. ----End 3-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



3.3 Monitoring the Nastar You can monitor the running status (including the status of the CPU, hard disk, database, processes, and services) and the component information of the Nastar server as well as logs of the operations performed on the system monitor client. 3.3.1 Monitoring the Nastar Service Status You can monitor the status of the services of the Nastar server to view the information such as the service name and service status and understand the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server. 3.3.2 Monitoring the Nastar Process Status You can monitor the status of the Nastar server processes to view the information, such as the process name, process ID, and number of threads, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can identify and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server. 3.3.3 Monitoring the Nastar Hard Disk Status You can monitor the status of the Nastar server hard disk to view the information, such as the total space and usage of the hard disk, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server. 3.3.4 Monitoring the Nastar Database Status You can monitor the status of the Nastar server database to view the information, such as the database name, server name, and database status, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server. 3.3.5 Monitoring the System Resource Status of the Nastar Server This function enables you to view the system resource information of the Nastar server that you log in to. 3.3.6 Viewing the Information of Nastar Components This function enables you to view the information of the components installed on the Nastar server that you log in to. 3.3.7 Viewing Operation Logs on the System Monitor Client This function enables you to view operation logs on the system monitor client. 3.3.8 Refreshing the Monitoring Information To know the latest running status of the NMS server, you need to refresh the monitoring information. 3.3.9 Saving the Monitoring Information For the convenience of future analysis, you can save the required monitoring information to the server.

3.3.1 Monitoring the Nastar Service Status You can monitor the status of the services of the Nastar server to view the information such as the service name and service status and understand the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

Context If a service is abnormal, its icon is displayed in red. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-5



Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Service Monitor tab to view the services on the server. Step 3 Right-click an service to choose Details. In the displayed Service Details dialog box, view the details of the service. NOTE

You can also double-click an service to view its details in the displayed Service Details dialog box.

----End

3.3.2 Monitoring the Nastar Process Status You can monitor the status of the Nastar server processes to view the information, such as the process name, process ID, and number of threads, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can identify and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

Context Only the running processes are displayed in the monitored content.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Process Monitor tab to view the server processes. ----End

3.3.3 Monitoring the Nastar Hard Disk Status You can monitor the status of the Nastar server hard disk to view the information, such as the total space and usage of the hard disk, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

Context If you set a threshold of the hard disk and an item reaches the threshold, the icon of the item is displayed in red.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Hard Disk Monitor tab to view the status of the server hard disk. ----End 3-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



3.3.4 Monitoring the Nastar Database Status You can monitor the status of the Nastar server database to view the information, such as the database name, server name, and database status, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

Context If you set a threshold of the database and then an item reaches the threshold, the icon of the item is displayed in red.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Database Monitor tab to view the status of the Nastar server database. NOTE

The Nastar server runs in Solaris and SuSE Linux. Solaris uses Sybase and SuSE Linux uses Oracle. The status of the databases that you monitor varies according to the database type.

----End

3.3.5 Monitoring the System Resource Status of the Nastar Server This function enables you to view the system resource information of the Nastar server that you log in to.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 Click the System Resources Monitor tab. The system information of the computer where the Nastar server is installed is listed. ----End

3.3.6 Viewing the Information of Nastar Components This function enables you to view the information of the components installed on the Nastar server that you log in to.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 Click the Component Information tab. The information of all the installed components are listed. ----End

3.3.7 Viewing Operation Logs on the System Monitor Client This function enables you to view operation logs on the system monitor client. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-7



Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 Click the Operation Logs tab. The information of operation logs is listed. Step 3 Select a time range for the logs to be viewed from the Time range drop-down box. Step 4 Right-click an operation log to choose Details. In the displayed Log Detail dialog box, view the details of the operation log. NOTE

You can also double-click an operation log to view its details in the displayed Log Detail dialog box.

----End

3.3.8 Refreshing the Monitoring Information To know the latest running status of the NMS server, you need to refresh the monitoring information.

Context l

When you refresh the current tab page, only the information on this tab page is refreshed. The information on other tab pages is not refreshed.

l

When you switch tab pages, the information on these tab pages are refreshed immediately. Therefore, you can refresh information by switching tab pages.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the tab of the monitoring information to be refreshed, and then click Refresh. ----End

3.3.9 Saving the Monitoring Information For the convenience of future analysis, you can save the required monitoring information to the server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser. Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the tab of the monitoring information, and then click Save As. NOTE

l

The monitoring information can be saved in the format of TXT, HTML, CSV, or XML.

l

The default format is XML.

----End 3-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



3.4 Reference of System Monitoring GUIs This section describes the parameters displayed on system monitoring GUIs. 3.4.1 Parameters for Setting Thresholds of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of system monitor settings. You can refer to these parameters when you set the server thresholds. 3.4.2 Parameters for Monitoring Services of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Service Monitor tab. 3.4.3 Parameters for Monitoring Process of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Process Monitor tab. 3.4.4 Parameters for Monitoring Hard Disk of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Hard Disk Monitor tab. 3.4.5 Parameters for Monitoring Database of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Database Monitor tab. 3.4.6 Parameters for Monitoring System Resources of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the System Resources Monitor tab. 3.4.7 Parameters for Viewing the Component Information of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters on the Component Information tab page. The parameter settings determine the component information displayed in the query result. 3.4.8 Parameters for Viewing System Monitoring Operation Logs This section describes the parameters on the Log tab page. The parameter settings determine the information displayed in the query result.

3.4.1 Parameters for Setting Thresholds of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of system monitor settings. You can refer to these parameters when you set the server thresholds.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-9



System Resources Name System Resources Monitor Parameter Settings

CPU sustained overload times (times)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

l

l

System Resources Monitor Threshold Settings

If the CPU usage is larger than the sum of CPU used rate value and its offset for consecutive x times, the Nastar raises a high CPU usage alarm.

Value range: 40-400 Default value: 40

If the CPU usage is smaller than the difference between CPU used rate value and its offset for consecutive x times, the Nastar raises the corresponding clearance alarm.

System Resource status refresh interval (seconds)

Description:

Value:

Refresh interval for system resource monitoring, that is, the CPU usage is sampled every x seconds.

Value range: 2-60

CPU used rate (%)

Description:

Value:

Threshold of the CPU usage.

Value range: 1-99. Default value: 80.

Default value: 3

Offset value range: 0-10. Default value: 5.

3-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name Memory used rate (%)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Threshold of the memory usage.

Value range: 1-99. Default value: 90.

l

When the memory usage exceeds the sum of the preset value and offset value, the Nastar raises a memory busy alarm.

Offset value range: 0-10. Default value: 3.

If the memory usage is smaller than the difference between the threshold and the offset, the Nastar raises the corresponding clearance alarm.

Hard Disk Name Disk Monitor Parameter Settings

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Hard disk status refresh interval (seconds)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Refresh interval for hard disk monitoring.



Default value: 60

3-11



Name Disk Monitor Threshold Settings

Default value setting (%)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

All default thresholds of hard disk usage on the Nastar server. When the hard disk usage exceeds the sum of a value corresponding to an alarm severity and the offset, the Nastar raises the high disk usage alarm of this severity.

l

Value range: 1-100 Default value:

l

–

Warning: 60

–

Minor: 70

–

Major: 80

–

Critical: 90

Offset value range: 0-10 Offset default value: –

Warning: 0

–

Minor: 0

–

Major: 0

–

Critical: 0

NOTE The sum of the preset value and offset value of a low-severity alarm must be less than or equal to the difference of the preset value and offset value of a highseverity alarm.

3-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name Advanced Setting (%)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Thresholds of all the hard disk usage on the Nastar server. When the hard disk usage exceeds the sum of a value corresponding to an alarm severity and the offset, the Nastar raises the high disk usage alarm of this severity.

Value range: 1-99 Offset value range: 0-10 NOTE The sum of the preset value and offset value of a low-severity alarm must be less than or equal to the difference of the preset value and offset value of a highseverity alarm.

NOTE l If you select

Default Value, the Nastar uses the threshold specified in Default Value Setting. l If you select

Customize Value, the Nastar uses customized thresholds of alarms.

Database Name Database Monitor Parameter Settings

Database status refresh interval (seconds)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Interval of database refreshing.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-13



Name Database Monitor Threshold Settings

Default Value Setting (%)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

All default thresholds of database usage on the Nastar server. When the database usage exceeds the threshold corresponding to an alarm severity and the offset, the Nastar raises the high database usage alarm of this severity.

Value range: l

Warning: 1-90

l

Minor: 85-95

l

Major: 90-98

l

Critical: 95-100

default value: l

Warning: 85

l

Minor: 90

l

Major: 95

l

Critical: 98


3-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name Advanced Setting (%)

Description

Settings

Description:

Setting method:

Thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. You need to set these thresholds separately for each database on the Nastar server. When the database usage exceeds the threshold corresponding to an alarm severity and the offset, the Nastar raises the high database usage alarm of this severity.

Set the following parameters for each database: l

Default Value: use default thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities.

l

Customize Value: customize thresholds for the database usage alarms of different severities. Value range: –

Warning: 1-90

–

Minor: 85-95

–

Major: 90-98

–

Critical: 95-100

default value:

l

–

Warning: 85

–

Minor: 90

–

Major: 95

–

Critical: 98

Disabled Monitoring: Disable the database monitoring.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-15



Services Name Services Monitor Parameter Settings

Service status refresh interval (seconds)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Interval of service refreshing.


Service Monitor Screen Tip Settings

Default Group

Description:

Setting method:

Set whether to display the service status at the lower right corner of the Nastar system

Select a service from the Service Name drop-down list. Select enable or disable in the corresponding Show Screen Tips dropdown list.

monitor client by or

.

NOTE l If all the monitored

services are is

running, displayed.

l if a monitored

service is stopped, is displayed. l The Service

Monitor tab page is displayed when or clicked.

is

3.4.2 Parameters for Monitoring Services of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Service Monitor tab.

Parameters Name

Description

Service Name

Description: The name of a service.

Agent Name

Description: The name of a process.

Service Description

Description: The description information of functions and interfaces provided by a service.

3-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name

Description

Status

Description: The status of a service.

Start Mode

Description: The service start mode, including Automatic, Manual, and Disable. The Disable mode is available only for stopped services.

Service Start Time

Description: The time that the service is started.

Server Name

Description: The name of the server.

3.4.3 Parameters for Monitoring Process of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Process Monitor tab.

Parameters Name

Description

Agent Name

Description: Name of a process.

Process ID

Description: ID of a process.

Handle Number

Description: Amount of handles used by a process.

CPU Usage Rate(%)

Description: CPU usage by a process.

Memory Usage(MB)

Description: Memory usage by a process.

Thread Number

Description: Amount of connected threads in a process.

3.4.4 Parameters for Monitoring Hard Disk of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Hard Disk Monitor tab.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-17



Parameters Name

Description

File System

Description: Hard disk partitions and their paths.

Total Size(MB)

Description: Total space of a specific partition, equals to the sum of Used Size and Free Size.

Used Size(MB)

Description: Used space of a specific partition.

Free Size(MB)

Description: Available space of a specific partition.

Used Rate(%)

Description: Current usage of a specific partition.

Status

Description: Current status of a specific partition, including normal and abnormal. If the usage is more than or equal to the maximum, the system displays Abnormal.

3.4.5 Parameters for Monitoring Database of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Database Monitor tab.

Parameters Name

Description

Database Name

Description: Name of the database on the Nastar server.

Total Data Space(MB)

Description: Total data space.

Free Data Space(MB)

Description: Remaining data space.

Data Space Used Rate(%)

Description: Usage rate of the used data space and total data space.

Status

Description: Database status, including normal and abnormal. If the database usage is more than or equal to the threshold, the system displays Abnormal.

3-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name

Description

Description

Description: Description of the database.

3.4.6 Parameters for Monitoring System Resources of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the System Resources Monitor tab.

Parameters Name

Description

Server Name

Description: Name of the Nastar server.

Server Status

Description: Status of the Nastar server, including Active and Standby.

OS

Description: Operating system of the server.

Total Physical Memory(MB)

Description: Total physical memory space.

Free Physical Memory(MB)

Description: Remaining physical memory space.

Total Swap Memory(MB)

Description: Total virtual memory space.

Free Swap Memory(MB)

Description: Remaining virtual memory space.

CPU Usage Rate(%)

Description: CPU usage.

Memory Usage(%)

Description: The usage of the total memory space (including physical memory and virtual memory).

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3-19



3.4.7 Parameters for Viewing the Component Information of the Nastar Server This section describes the parameters on the Component Information tab page. The parameter settings determine the component information displayed in the query result.

Parameters of component information Name

Description

Component

Description: Component name of the Nastar server.

Version

Description: Component version of the Nastar server.

Description

Description: Component description of the Nastar server.

3.4.8 Parameters for Viewing System Monitoring Operation Logs This section describes the parameters on the Log tab page. The parameter settings determine the information displayed in the query result.

Parameters of operation logs Name

Description

User Name

Description: Nastar user who perform the operation.

Operation Name

Description: Name of the operation.

Operation Time

Description: Time when the user performs the operation.

Client

Description: IP address of the system monitor client that performs the operation.

Result

Description: Information indicating whether the operation succeeds.

Details

Description: Operation description.

3-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4 Security Management

4

Security Management

About This Chapter Security management provides the functions of managing user rights and system security policies. These functions can prevent illegal intrusion on the Nastar server and ensure data security of the Nastar server. 4.1 Basic Knowledge of Security Management This topic describes the security management of the Nastar, such as the security management functions, security policies, and basic concepts. 4.2 Changing the Password of the Current User It is suggested that you should change the user password periodically, to ensure the security of the password. 4.3 Setting the Security Policy of the Nastar You can set the password policy, account policy and system policy of the Nastar, to enhance the security. 4.4 Setting Nastar System Login Mode The Nastar provides two login modes: multiuser mode and single-user mode. In normal state, the Nastar runs in multiuser mode. When you need to maintain the Nastar server, you can set the Nastar to run in single-user mode, to avoid the interference from other users. 4.5 Setting the System ACL You can set the Access Control List(ACL) to allow the users to log in to the Nastar through the clients of only the specific IP addresses or network segment. 4.6 Creating a Nastar User This section describes how to create a Nastar user and assign corresponding rights to it. 4.7 Modifying a Nastar User This section describes how to modify passwords, normal properties and user rights of Nastar users. 4.8 Comparing the Nastar User Rights By comparing the rights of two Nastar users, you can understand the differences between their rights. 4.9 Monitoring a Nastar User Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-1



This section describes how to view states of Nastar users, monitor sessions and operations of Nastar users, and force Nastar users to exit. 4.10 Reference of the Security Management GUI This section provides the reference information of the security management GUI.

4-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



4.1 Basic Knowledge of Security Management This topic describes the security management of the Nastar, such as the security management functions, security policies, and basic concepts. 4.1.1 Security Management Proper use and configuration of the security management ensures the secure running of the Nastar. 4.1.2 Concepts of Nastar Security The security management involves the concepts regarding the security of the Nastar. The concepts help you understand the description about security management and facilitate your operations. 4.1.3 Nastar User Rights Management Policies You can manage user rights based on the rights management policies. By this means, the allocation of user rights is clearer, and the rights management is more simple. 4.1.4 Operation Right List The operation right list describes operation rights of Nastar applications. You can refer to these parameters when you assign the operation rights for the Nastar users.

4.1.1 Security Management Proper use and configuration of the security management ensures the secure running of the Nastar. The security management of the Nastar is a set of functions used for users and user rights management. To log in to the Nastar and perform operations, you need to have the user account and rights of the Nastar. Through users and rights management, the operator can log in to the Nastar to perform operations such as monitoring and maintenance to prevent illegal access and operations on the Nastar. In the security management, users and user rights are managed. The security management involves the following functions: l

Creating, monitoring, and deleting users

l

Creating, monitoring, and deleting user groups

l

Creating, monitoring, and deleting operation sets

l

Managing user rights, including the user managed domain, operation right, and ACL settings.

l

Monitoring users

l

Setting the system ACL

l

Setting the security policies of the Nastar, including the password policy, security policy, and system policy

4.1.2 Concepts of Nastar Security The security management involves the concepts regarding the security of the Nastar. The concepts help you understand the description about security management and facilitate your operations. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-3



l

User A user represents a user account. To create a user is to create a user account. Administrator is the default superuser of the Nastar, who has the right to view all devices and has all operation rights.

l

User group A user group is a collection of user accounts. You can create a user group to assign rights to its members. A network needs more than one person to maintain. Thus you need to create multiple user accounts for the Nastar. To manage users better, you can group them. The Nastar provide five default user groups:

l

–

The SMManagers user group has all the security rights, such as user management and resetting user password. The SMManagers user group also has the right of querying the security log, and the right of viewing the managed objects. You cannot modify the rights of the SMManagers.

–

The Administrators user group has the right of viewing the managed objects, and the rights that does not belong to the SMManagers. You cannot modify the rights assigned to the Administrators user group.

–

By default, the Operators, Monitors, and Normal groups do not have any rights. You can modify the rights of the Operators, Monitors, and Normal.

Managed domain The managed domain means which devices and boards that the user and user group have the right to view. You can set the managed domain of the user and user group to determine which devices that the user has the right to view. After the user logs in to the Nastar, only the information of the device that this user has the right to view is displayed on the Nastar client. For example, only the alarm information of the device that the user has the right to view is displayed.

l

Operation rights Operation rights determine the operations that a user can perform. Operation rights are associated with the managed domain. To perform operations on the NEs, you must have the viewing right and operation right.

l

Type set The type set refers to the right to perform operations on a certain type of devices. It is a special right. The type set means to assign rights based on the type of the NE device. After the rights of the type set are assigned to the user, the user has the rights to view and operate the device of this type set.

l

Operation set An operation set is a group of operation rights. It is used when the user or user group rights are set. Operation sets fall into two types, Network Management Application and Network Device. The operation sets of the network management application type only includes the network management application rights; the operation sets of the network device type only includes the device operation rights. Nastar provides two default operation sets, AllApplicationOperations and AllDeviceOperations. Operation set AllApplicationOperations is of the network management application type, including all the network management application rights except the security application rights; operation set AllDeviceOperations is of the network device type, including all the device operation rights.

4-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4 Security Management l

Access control list Access control list is a mechanism of security control. Users are restricted to log in to the Nastar server through the specified IP addresses or network segment. In this case, illegal users cannot use your user name and password to log in to the Nastar server through IP addresses not in the access control list, even if they steal your account information. This helps to enhance the security of the Nastar.

4.1.3 Nastar User Rights Management Policies You can manage user rights based on the rights management policies. By this means, the allocation of user rights is clearer, and the rights management is more simple. l

Login right policy The user login right is the right to control Nastar user login Nastar, such as the login time, IP address, and account. You need to set the security attributes for Nastar users.

l

Managed domain and operation right policies There are two kinds of rights to manage the NEs. One is the right to view the NEs; that is, it determines whether the Nastar user can view the NEs. This right is controlled through the managed domain. The other is the operation right. This right controls which operation that the Nastar user can perform on the NEs. To perform operations on the NEs, you must have the viewing right and operation right.

l

User group management policy A user group is a set of users. The managed domain and operation rights can be granted to a user group. When a user is added to a user group, the user has the management domain and operation rights of the user group. In this method, the managed domain and operation rights of the users can be controlled in a centralized manner. Multiple users may use the Nastar for maintenance. These users can be divided into several groups based on the operations. Members of each group can only perform specified operations in the specified domain. Based on operations, users can play different roles, including administrators, operators, monitors, and custom operators. User groups are set up based on roles. Users are then assigned to the corresponding user groups. This realizes unified management of user rights.

4.1.4 Operation Right List The operation right list describes operation rights of Nastar applications. You can refer to these parameters when you assign the operation rights for the Nastar users.

Maintenance Right List

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Operation Right

Description

TaskManager Management

Used to create, modify and delete a scheduled task.

Operations of System Monitor

Used to monitor the status of processes and databases of the Nastar server and set system monitoring parameters.

Download System Files

Used to obtain the Nastar server files through the client.

Expand Database Space

Used to expand the space of the Nastar server database.


4-5



Operation Right

Description

Broadcast Messages

Used to send broadcast messages.

Browse System Monitor Details

Used to browse the information about system monitoring, including the status information on services, processes and databases.

Data Management

Used to back up, restore, and delete data.

Set Broadcast Messages Parameters

Used to set the count of the broadcast messages that are displayed and the count of the broadcast messages that are saved on the server.

Manager SystemMonitor

Used to manage the system monitoring.

Operation Right

Description

Log rights management

Used to set the rights of log management.


Used to query operation logs by condition or collect statistics on operation logs.

Query System Logs

Used to query system logs by condition or collect statistics on system logs.

Set Operation Logs Template

Used to manage the template for querying operation logs.

Set System Logs Template

Used to manage the template for querying system logs.

Log Right List

Default Operation Set Operation Set

Description

AllApplicationOperations

The default operation set of the network management application type provided during initialization includes all the application rights except the security management rights.

4.2 Changing the Password of the Current User It is suggested that you should change the user password periodically, to ensure the security of the password.

4-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Context l

The new password must comply with the password policy. For details on how to set the password policy, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy.

l

The password of the Administrator must comply with the password policy, and its length must be greater than or equal to 8 digits.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Change Password. Step 2 In the Change Password dialog box, set the new password for the current user, and then click OK. Step 3 In the Information dialog box, click OK. ----End

4.3 Setting the Security Policy of the Nastar You can set the password policy, account policy and system policy of the Nastar, to enhance the security. 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy To avoid users to set a very simple password or use the same password for a long time, you can set the password policy to ensure that the password is enough complex and safe. 4.3.2 Setting the Account Policy In the account policy setting, you can set the parameters such as maximum login attempts and auto unlock time. 4.3.3 Setting the System Policy The number of sessions is the number of the connections between the Nastar client and the Nastar server. You can set the system policy to set the maximum number of the sessions that are supported by the Nastar.

4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy To avoid users to set a very simple password or use the same password for a long time, you can set the password policy to ensure that the password is enough complex and safe.

Context l

The password dictionary is a password set containing characters or strings. You can set the user password to not contain the characters or strings of the password dictionary.

l

In the password dictionary file, each row holds one character or string. The suffix of each password dictionary file is dic. The file is in $Nastar_ROOT/etc/conf/pwddic/ on the Nastar server.

l

The number of the password dictionary files are not limited in the Nastar, but the total number of words in all the password dictionary files cannot exceed 5000.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-7



Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Policy. Step 2 In the Security settings navigation tree, select Password Policy. Step 3 In the right pane, set the password policy. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

4.3.2 Setting the Account Policy In the account policy setting, you can set the parameters such as maximum login attempts and auto unlock time.

Context l

When you log in to the Nastar, if the failed login times exceed the value set in Max. Login Attempts, the account is locked to prevent attacks from illegal users to the Nastar.

l

When your account is locked, the users of the SMManagers user group have the unlock right to unlock your account. You can also wait for the Nastar to unlock your account automatically. The unlock time is defined in the account policy.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Policy. Step 2 In the Security settings navigation tree, select Account Policy. Step 3 In the right pane, set the policies such as the maximum login attempts and auto unlock time. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

4.3.3 Setting the System Policy The number of sessions is the number of the connections between the Nastar client and the Nastar server. You can set the system policy to set the maximum number of the sessions that are supported by the Nastar.

Context The maximum number of sessions in the Nastar depends on the following three elements: l

Login mode. In single-user login mode, only the Administrator user is allowed to log in to the Nastar through a client regardless of the value of Maximum Sessions. For details about login modes, see 4.4 Setting Nastar System Login Mode.

l

Hardware condition. In some hardware conditions such as memory overflow, the user is not allowed to log in to the Nastar.

4-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



ESN or license. Table 4-1 shows impact of ESN and license on Maximum Sessions. Table 4-1 Impact of ESN and license on Maximum Sessions Condition

Maximum Session

Description

ESN is not matched or the license is invalid

3

If three users already log in through clients, no more user can log in. If the number of users who already log in is less than three, any other user can log in.

ESN is matched and the license is valid

The number of sessions is not restricted in license.

32767

-

The number of sessions is restricted in license.

The smaller number in the license and the specified value of Maximum Sessions.

If the number of current sessions exceeds the value set in Maximum Sessions but does not exceed the number in the license, the Administrator user can still log in to the Nastar.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Policy. Step 2 In the Security settings navigation tree, select System Policy. Step 3 In the right pane, set the maximum number of the sessions that are supported by the Nastar. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

4.4 Setting Nastar System Login Mode The Nastar provides two login modes: multiuser mode and single-user mode. In normal state, the Nastar runs in multiuser mode. When you need to maintain the Nastar server, you can set the Nastar to run in single-user mode, to avoid the interference from other users.

Context Only the Administrator user can set the system login mode.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-9



CAUTION Only the Administrator can log in to the Nastar through a client and all the other users are forced to log out after the Nastar is switched from the multiuser mode to the single-user mode. Please switch to the multiuser mode after you complete the operations in the single-user mode.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Preferences. Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left, select System Login Mode. Step 3 In the System Login Mode interface, set the system login mode. Setting Login Mode

Operations

Switch to a single-user mode

Choose Single-user mode and click Apply. In the Set Switch Delay dialog box, set the delay of login mode switch, and then click OK. A warning dialog box is displayed to show the remained time of login mode switch. After the switch delay, the Nastar is switched to the single-user mode, and Single-user mode is displayed on the status bar of the Nastar client.

Switch to a multiuser mode

Choose Multiuser mode, and then click Apply. The Nastar is switched to the multiuser mode immediately, and Multiuser mode is displayed on the status bar of the Nastar client.

----End

4.5 Setting the System ACL You can set the Access Control List(ACL) to allow the users to log in to the Nastar through the clients of only the specific IP addresses or network segment.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > ACL. Step 2 In the ACL window, specify the IP addresses of the clients that can log in to the Nastar server.

4-10

Setting the System ACL

Operations

Add an access control item

Click Add. In the New System Access Control Item dialog box, enter the IP address or network segment and description. Click OK.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Setting the System ACL

Operations

Modify the existing access control item

Select the IP addresses or network segment that need to be modified, and then click Modify. In Modify System Access Control Item, modify relevant information, and then click OK.

Delete the existing access control item

Select the IP addresses or network segment that need to be deleted, and then click Delete. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Step 3 In the ACL window, click Close. ----End

4.6 Creating a Nastar User This section describes how to create a Nastar user and assign corresponding rights to it. This section contains the following topics: 4.6.1 Procedure for Creating Nastar Users This topic describes how to create Nastar users in different scenarios. 4.6.2 Creating an Operation Set You can plan and create an operation set, and grant operation rights to users or user groups as a set. You can grant operation rights in batch to users, to improve management for operation rights. 4.6.3 Creating a Nastar User Group You can create a Nastar user group. The users with the same permissions assigned belong to the same user group. Because you can assign permissions to users in batch by setting the management domain of user group and operation permissions, the permission assignment efficiency is improved. 4.6.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User Group This function enables you to assign the managed domains for a user group. Then users in the user group can manage all devices in the managed domain. 4.6.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User Group This function enables you to assign operation rights to a user group. Then users in the user group own the corresponding operation rights. 4.6.6 Creating an Nastar User Account You can create a user account of the Nastar and assign rights to NMS users based on their responsibilities. 4.6.7 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group You can add the Nastar users to user groups. These users can be managed in a centralized manner. Thus, you can assign rights to the users. 4.6.8 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User You can assign the managed domain for a Nastar user to allocate the managed objects to the user. 4.6.9 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User This function enables you to assign operation rights to a Nastar user. Then the Nastar user can own other operation rights except for the operation rights of the user group to which the user Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-11



belongs. This function is applied in the case where certain operation rights can be assigned to the specified Nastar user only. 4.6.10 Assigning the User ACL You can Assign the ACL to allow the users to log in to the Nastar only through the clients of the specific IP addresses or network segment.

4.6.1 Procedure for Creating Nastar Users This topic describes how to create Nastar users in different scenarios. l

Initial configuration of the Nastar Create and configure the operation sets, and user groups before you create users. For details on how to create users, see Table 4-2.

l

Routine maintenance In this case, the operation sets, and user groups are created and configured. You only need to create users and add the users to the user groups. For details on how to create users, see Table 4-3.

Table 4-2 Creating users in initial configuration

4-12

Step

Action

Description

1

4.6.2 Creating an Operation Set

Assigning the operation rights in the form of grouping can reduce the complexity of rights management.

2

4.6.3 Creating a Nastar User Group

Grouping can reduce the complexity of user management.

3

4.6.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User Group

By setting the managed domain for a user group, you can set the objects that can be managed by a user group.

4

4.6.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User Group

You can assign operation rights to a user group.

5

4.6.6 Creating an Nastar User Account

Create a Nastar user account, and then users can use the account to log in to the Nastar.

6

4.6.7 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group

When added to a user group, a user inherits the rights of the user group.

7

4.6.8 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User

By setting the managed domain for a user, you can set the objects that can be managed by the user.

8

4.6.9 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User

You can assign operation rights to a user.

9

4.6.10 Assigning the User ACL

To ensure security, a user can log in to the Nastar only through the specified IP addresses or network segment of clients.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Table 4-3 Creating Users in Routine Maintenance Step

Action

Description

1

4.6.6 Creating an Nastar User Account

Create a Nastar user account, and then users can use the account to log in to the Nastar.

2

4.6.7 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group

When added to a user group, a user inherits the rights of the user group.

4.6.2 Creating an Operation Set You can plan and create an operation set, and grant operation rights to users or user groups as a set. You can grant operation rights in batch to users, to improve management for operation rights.

Context l

The Nastar provides two default operation sets: AllDeviceOperations and AllApplicationOperations. The operation set AllDeviceOperations is of the network device type, including all the device rights; the operation set AllApplicationOperations is of the network management application type, including all the application rights.

l

The maximum count of all the operation sets (including the default operation sets) is 100.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management navigation tree, right-click the Operation Set node and select New Operation Set. Otherwise, click Operation Set.

in the toolbar of the navigation tree, choose New

Step 3 In the New Operation Set dialog box, set the properties of the new operation set. In the properties of a new operation set, the operation set name and the operation set type must be set when you create the operation set; other properties can be set after the operation set is created. Setting Properties of an Operation Set

Operations

Set normal properties of an operation set

On the Details tab page, set the new operation set names, operation set type and description content.

Set members of an operation On the Members tab page, click Select. In the Select set Operation Set Member dialog box, select the operation rights that need to be added to the operation set, and then click OK to add members of the operation set. Step 4 In the New Operation Set dialog box, click OK. ----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-13



4.6.3 Creating a Nastar User Group You can create a Nastar user group. The users with the same permissions assigned belong to the same user group. Because you can assign permissions to users in batch by setting the management domain of user group and operation permissions, the permission assignment efficiency is improved.

Context The Nastar provide five default user groups: l


l


l


Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management navigation tree, right-click the User Group node and select New User Group. Step 3 In the New User Group dialog box, set the properties of the new user group. You must manually set the name of the user group. For the other properties of user group, you can set them after you create the user group successfully. User Group Properties

Operations

User group name and description

On the Details tab page, set the user group name and description.

Members of user group

Management domain of user group

l

To add members, on the Details tab page, click Add. In the Add User dialog box, set the members to be added to the user group.

l

To delete members, on the Details tab page, select the members to be deleted from Members, and then click Delete.

On the Domain tab page, click Select. In the Select Domain dialog box, set the management domain of the user group, and then click OK.

Operation rights of user group On the Operation Rights tab page, click Select, in the Select Rights dialog box, set the operation rights for the user group, and then click OK.

4-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4 Security Management NOTE

For management domain of user group and operation permissions of user group operations, on the Domain and Operation Rights tab page, click Copy Rights from User Group. In the Copy Rights from User Group dialog box, select user groups and copy the management domain rights and operation permissions of these user groups.

Step 4 In the New User Group dialog box, click OK. ----End

4.6.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User Group This function enables you to assign the managed domains for a user group. Then users in the user group can manage all devices in the managed domain.

Context The nodes in the navigation tree are divided by NE type. If you select a node of an NE type, all the NEs of this type are selected. If you select the root node, all the NEs are selected.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User Group node, select the user group you want to set. Step 3 On the Domain tab, click Select. NOTE

Select Group by device type in the Domain tab, the NEs in the navigation tree are grouped by device type.

Step 4 In the Select Domain dialog box, set the devices and device sets that the user group needs to manage, and then click OK. ----End

4.6.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User Group This function enables you to assign operation rights to a user group. Then users in the user group own the corresponding operation rights.

Context The Nastar provide five default user groups: l


l


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-15



Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User Group node, select the user group you want to set. Step 3 On the Operation Rights tab, click Select. Step 4 In the Select Rights dialog box, select the authorization and corresponding rights. Click OK. ----End

4.6.6 Creating an Nastar User Account You can create a user account of the Nastar and assign rights to NMS users based on their responsibilities.

Context When you create an Nastar user, the property settings must comply with the password policy and the account policy. For details about how to set a password policy and an account policy, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy and 4.3.2 Setting the Account Policy.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, right-click the User node and choose New User. Step 3 In the New User dialog box, set the properties of the new user. You must manually set the user name and password. For the other properties, you can use default values or set them after you create the user account successfully. User Properties

Operations

Normal properties

On the Details tab, set user properties, such as user name, description content, and password.

Owner group

l

To add a new owner group, on the User Groups tab, click Add, select the user group to which you want to add the user.

l

To delete an owner group, on the User Groups tab, select the user group to be deleted from the user group list, and then click Delete.

Management domain of user On the Domain tab, click Select. In the Select Domain dialog box, set the management domain of the user. Operation permissions of user

4-16

On the Operation Rights tab, click Select. In the Select Rights dialog box, set operation permissions for the user.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



User Properties

Operations

Access control list (ACL)

On the ACL tab, set the ACL for the user.

Step 4 In the New User dialog box, click OK. ----End

4.6.7 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group You can add the Nastar users to user groups. These users can be managed in a centralized manner. Thus, you can assign rights to the users.

Context l

You cannot add the user Administrator to a user group.

l

The user Administrator belongs to both the Administrators group and SMManagers group.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 On the User Groups tab, set a user group for Nastar users. Add Users to User Groups

Operations

Add users to a new user group

Click Add, in the Add User Group dialog box, select the user group to which you want to add the user. Click OK.

Delete the existing user group Select the user group to be deleted and click Delete. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. ----End

4.6.8 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User You can assign the managed domain for a Nastar user to allocate the managed objects to the user.

Context l

By default, all devices are visible for the Administrator. You cannot set the managed domain for the Administrator user.

l

When the user managed domain is set, Nastar does not display the managed domain of its user group. The final managed domain for the user is the union of the allocated user managed domain and its user group managed domain.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-17



Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 On the Domain tab, click Select. NOTE


Step 4 In the Select Domain dialog box, select the managed objects, and then click OK. ----End

4.6.9 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User This function enables you to assign operation rights to a Nastar user. Then the Nastar user can own other operation rights except for the operation rights of the user group to which the user belongs. This function is applied in the case where certain operation rights can be assigned to the specified Nastar user only.

Context You cannot set the operation rights of the user Administrator.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 On the Operation Rights tab, click Select. NOTE

On the Operation Rights tab, if you select Show access from user group, the operation rights of the user group are displayed in the operation rights list.

Step 4 In the Select Rights dialog box, select the type of operation rights and the corresponding rights. Click OK. ----End

4.6.10 Assigning the User ACL You can Assign the ACL to allow the users to log in to the Nastar only through the clients of the specific IP addresses or network segment.

Context

4-18

l

Only the users of the SMManagers user group can set the user ACL.

l

The system ACL allows all the Nastar users to log in to the Nastar only through the clients of the specific IP addresses or network segment. The user ACL is a subset of the system ACL. The user ACL is effective only for the current user. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 On the Access Control List tab, set the ACL of the Nastar user. ACL Properties

Operations

Use the System ACL

Select Use the System ACL, click Apply. NOTE For details about how to set the system ACL, see 4.5 Setting the System ACL.

Use the current user ACL

Select Use the current user ACL. Then select the IP addresses or network segment through which the users can log in to the server, click Apply.

----End

4.7 Modifying a Nastar User This section describes how to modify passwords, normal properties and user rights of Nastar users. This section contains the following topics: 4.7.1 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User This section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If you forget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password. 4.7.2 Modifying the Information About a Nastar User This section describes how to modify normal properties of the Nastar user, such as login period and Enable/Disable user account. 4.7.3 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group You can add the Nastar users to user groups. These users can be managed in a centralized manner. Thus, you can assign rights to the users. 4.7.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User You can assign the managed domain for a Nastar user to allocate the managed objects to the user. 4.7.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User This function enables you to assign operation rights to a Nastar user. Then the Nastar user can own other operation rights except for the operation rights of the user group to which the user belongs. This function is applied in the case where certain operation rights can be assigned to the specified Nastar user only. 4.7.6 Modifying the Nastar Access Control List You can modify the Nastar access control list to modify the IP addresses of the clients through which the users can log in to the Nastar server. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-19



4.7.1 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User This section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If you forget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password.

Context l

The password setting must comply with the password policy. For details on how to set a password policy, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy.

l

The password of the administrator contains eight or more digits. In addition, it must also comply with the password policy.

l

The user in SMManagers can reset the password of any other user except the administrator. The password of the administrator can be changed by only the administrator through the Nastar client.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 Under the Security Management navigation tree in the Security Management window, expand the User node. Right-click the user whose password you want to reset, and then choose Reset Password. NOTE

You can also choose System > Change Password to change the password.

Step 3 In the Reset Password dialog box, set New Password and Confirm Password, and then click OK. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, click OK. ----End

4.7.2 Modifying the Information About a Nastar User This section describes how to modify normal properties of the Nastar user, such as login period and Enable/Disable user account.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window, in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user whose information you want to modify. Click the Details tab from the pane on the right. Step 3 On the Details tab, modify the parameters in Description, Enable/Disable user account, and login period. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

4-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



4.7.3 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group You can add the Nastar users to user groups. These users can be managed in a centralized manner. Thus, you can assign rights to the users.

Context l

You cannot add the user Administrator to a user group.

l

The user Administrator belongs to both the Administrators group and SMManagers group.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 On the User Groups tab, set a user group for Nastar users. Add Users to User Groups

Operations

Add users to a new user group

Click Add, in the Add User Group dialog box, select the user group to which you want to add the user. Click OK.

Delete the existing user group Select the user group to be deleted and click Delete. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. ----End

4.7.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User You can assign the managed domain for a Nastar user to allocate the managed objects to the user.

Context l

By default, all devices are visible for the Administrator. You cannot set the managed domain for the Administrator user.

l

When the user managed domain is set, Nastar does not display the managed domain of its user group. The final managed domain for the user is the union of the allocated user managed domain and its user group managed domain.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 On the Domain tab, click Select. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-21


4 Security Management NOTE


Step 4 In the Select Domain dialog box, select the managed objects, and then click OK. ----End

4.7.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User This function enables you to assign operation rights to a Nastar user. Then the Nastar user can own other operation rights except for the operation rights of the user group to which the user belongs. This function is applied in the case where certain operation rights can be assigned to the specified Nastar user only.

Context You cannot set the operation rights of the user Administrator.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 On the Operation Rights tab, click Select. NOTE

On the Operation Rights tab, if you select Show access from user group, the operation rights of the user group are displayed in the operation rights list.

Step 4 In the Select Rights dialog box, select the type of operation rights and the corresponding rights. Click OK. ----End

4.7.6 Modifying the Nastar Access Control List You can modify the Nastar access control list to modify the IP addresses of the clients through which the users can log in to the Nastar server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window, in the Security Management navigation tree, expand the User node. Select the user you want to set. Step 3 In the pane on the right, click the Access Control List tab. Step 4 On the Access Control List tab, do as follows:

4-22

l

Select Use the system Access Control List.

l

Select Use the current user Access Control List. Then select the IP addresses or network segment through which the users can log in to the server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 5 Click Apply. ----End

4.8 Comparing the Nastar User Rights By comparing the rights of two Nastar users, you can understand the differences between their rights.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management window, click navigation tree.

on the top of the Security Management

Step 3 In the Select User for Compare dialog box, select two users. Step 4 Click OK. The comparison result is displayed in the Compare User Rights Result dialog box. ----End

4.9 Monitoring a Nastar User This section describes how to view states of Nastar users, monitor sessions and operations of Nastar users, and force Nastar users to exit. This section contains the following topics: 4.9.1 Unlocking a Nastar User If the number of times that a user enters an incorrect password reaches the number of the preset login attempts, the user account is locked and can not login the Nastar. This section describes how to unlock a Nastar user. 4.9.2 Monitoring the Nastar User Operations You can monitor the Nastar user sessions and operations to prevent illegal user operations. 4.9.3 Forcing a Nastar User to Quit You can force a Nastar user to quit if the user performs dangerous operations or initiates illegal sessions.

4.9.1 Unlocking a Nastar User If the number of times that a user enters an incorrect password reaches the number of the preset login attempts, the user account is locked and can not login the Nastar. This section describes how to unlock a Nastar user.

Context l

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Only the Administrator and the members of SMManagers group can perform this operation. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23



If you do not manually unlock a user, after the auto unlock time period, the user is unlocked automatically.

l

For details about how to set the maximum number of login attempts and the auto unlock time, see 4.3.2 Setting the Account Policy.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management. Step 2 In the Security Management dialog box, expand the User node. Right-click the user you want to unlock, and then select Unlock User. Account Status of the unlocked user changes to Normal. ----End

4.9.2 Monitoring the Nastar User Operations You can monitor the Nastar user sessions and operations to prevent illegal user operations.

Context The session is the connection between the Nastar client and the Nastar server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > User Monitor. Step 2 In the User Monitor window, you can monitor an activated session or the operations performed for a specific session. Monitoring Users

Operations

Monitoring a session

In the Session Monitor group box, you can view the session information in active state. If a session is not in normal state, you can select this session and click Force User to Exit to force the user to exit the login interface. NOTE l The information about the current client is also displayed in the

Session Monitor group box. When the client is selected, the Force User to Exit becomes unavailable. l When the computer where the client is present installs multiple

network cards, the Terminal value can be randomly taken from available IPs. l After the Nastar server is restarted or the network is recovered

after interruption, you need to click Refresh to refresh the session monitoring list.

4-24


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Monitoring Users

Operations

Monitoring user operations

In the Session Monitor group box, select a session. In the Operation Monitor group box, view the operations about the session. NOTE l In the Filter dialog box, you can click Filter and set the

conditions for monitoring user operations. In the Operation Monitor group box, only the operations meeting the filtering conditions can be displayed. l In the operation monitoring list, only the user's operations after

the User Monitor window is activated are displayed. If the monitored user performs the related operations, the information displayed in the operation monitoring list is updated in real time.

----End

4.9.3 Forcing a Nastar User to Quit You can force a Nastar user to quit if the user performs dangerous operations or initiates illegal sessions.

Context l

If you force a user to quit, only the user of the related session is logged out forcibly. If the user logs in to the Nastar server through multiple clients, multiple sessions of this user are established. To forcibly log out the user from all clients, you need to log out the user for each related session established.

l

Current users logged in cannot force themselves to quit from their corresponding sessions.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Security > User Monitor. Step 2 From the session monitoring table, select the records of the sessions to quit forcibly, and then click Force User to Exit. Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. ----End

4.10 Reference of the Security Management GUI This section provides the reference information of the security management GUI. 4.10.1 Operation Right List The operation right list describes operation rights of Nastar applications. You can refer to these parameters when you assign the operation rights for the Nastar users. 4.10.2 Parameters for the System Security Policy This section describes the parameters in the Security Settings window. You can refer to these parameters when you set the Nastar security policy. 4.10.3 Parameters for Creating a Nastar User Account Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-25



This section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameters when you add a Nastar user. 4.10.4 Parameters for the Nastar User Information This section describes the parameters of the Nastar user on the Details tab. You can refer to these parameters when you view the user information and modify the user attributes. 4.10.5 Parameters for Adding a Nastar User Group This section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameters when you add a Nastar user group. 4.10.6 Parameters for Assigning Operation Rights to Nastar User/User Groups This section describes the parameters in the Select Rights dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you bind operation rights to a Nastar user/user group.

4.10.1 Operation Right List The operation right list describes operation rights of Nastar applications. You can refer to these parameters when you assign the operation rights for the Nastar users.

Maintenance Right List Operation Right

Description

TaskManager Management

Used to create, modify and delete a scheduled task.

Operations of System Monitor

Used to monitor the status of processes and databases of the Nastar server and set system monitoring parameters.

Download System Files

Used to obtain the Nastar server files through the client.

Expand Database Space

Used to expand the space of the Nastar server database.

Broadcast Messages

Used to send broadcast messages.

Browse System Monitor Details

Used to browse the information about system monitoring, including the status information on services, processes and databases.

Data Management

Used to back up, restore, and delete data.

Set Broadcast Messages Parameters

Used to set the count of the broadcast messages that are displayed and the count of the broadcast messages that are saved on the server.

Manager SystemMonitor

Used to manage the system monitoring.

Operation Right

Description

Log rights management

Used to set the rights of log management.


Used to query operation logs by condition or collect statistics on operation logs.

Log Right List

4-26


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Operation Right

Description

Query System Logs

Used to query system logs by condition or collect statistics on system logs.

Set Operation Logs Template

Used to manage the template for querying operation logs.

Set System Logs Template

Used to manage the template for querying system logs.

Default Operation Set Operation Set

Description

AllApplicationOperations

The default operation set of the network management application type provided during initialization includes all the application rights except the security management rights.

4.10.2 Parameters for the System Security Policy This section describes the parameters in the Security Settings window. You can refer to these parameters when you set the Nastar security policy.

Parameters Name Password policy

Max. Password Valid Days

Min. Password Valid Days

Min. Length

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Validity period of the new password. If the password is not modified, the validity period starts from when the user is created.

Value range: 0-999.

Description:

Value:

Minimum days that a new password can be used after it is set.

Value range: 0-999.

Description:

Value:

Minimum length of the password.

Value range: 6-16.

Default value: 180. The value 0 means "always valid".

Default value: 10. The value 0 means "always valid".

Default value: 6.

The password for Administrator cannot be less than eight characters.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-27



Name Min. Uppercase

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Minimum uppercase letters in a password.

Value range: 0-16. Default value: 0. The value 0 means "unrestricted".

Min. Lowercase

Description:

Value:

Minimum lowercase letters in a password.


Min. Numbers

Description:

Value:

Minimum numbers in a password.


Min. Characters

4-28

Description:

Value:

Minimum special characters in a password.

Value range: 0-16.

Special characters contain ~! @#$%^&*()_+-={}|\\:\";'?,./` and blank space.

The value 0 means "unrestricted".


Default value: 0.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name History Record (s)

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Number of history passwords kept in the Nastar. The history passwords are kept from the latest.

Value range: 0-24.

The new password cannot be the same as the history password.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Default value: 24. The value 0 means "unrestricted". Example: For example, suppose the passwords you use from the latest are 111, 222, and 333. l

When this parameter is set to 0, it means not to keep history passwords, and you can set the new password to be the same as the history password.

l

When this parameter is set to 1, the system keeps the password 111, and you cannot set the new password to 111.

l

When this parameter is set to 2, the system keeps the password 111 and 222, and you cannot set the new password to 111 or 222.

Advance reminder of password expiry (days)

Description:

Value:

Lead time for prompting password expiry.

Value range: 1-30.

Cannot contain the same and consecutive character sequences

Description:

Value:

A password cannot contain two same and consecutive character sequences.

Value range: Enabled or Disabled.

Cannot contain ascending or descending character sequences

Description:

Value:

A password cannot contain at least two ascending or descending characters sequence.



Default value: 10.

Default value: Disabled.


4-29



Name Cannot contain part of the user name or the whole user name

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

The password cannot contain part of or all of the user name characters.

Value range: All, Disabled, or 1-32. Default value: Disabled. The number indicates the minimum number of characters of a user name that cannot be contained in the related password.

Cannot contain a word in the password dictionary

Description:

Value:

The password cannot be a word from the dictionary.


NOTE


l The suffix of each password

dictionary file is dic. The file is in $Nastar_ROOT/etc/ conf/pwddic/ on the Nastar server. l The number of the password

dictionary files are not limited in the Nastar, but the total words in all the password dictionary files cannot exceed 5000.

Account policy

4-30

Max. Login Attempts

Description:

Value:

If the attempts to log in to the Nastar by a wrong password exceed this value, the account is locked. If you enter the correct password before the incorrect login attempts exceed the maximum, the Nastar clears the incorrect login records.

Value range: 1-99.

Auto Unlock Time (minutes)

Description:

Value:

Min. Length of User Name

Description:

Value:

Minimum length of a Nastar user.

Value range: 1-32.

Default value: 3.

When a user account is locked Value range: 1-999. due to the login attempts Default value: 30. exceeding the Max.Login Attempts, it is unlocked after this time.


Default value: 6.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name Inactive User Policy

System policy

Maximum Sessions

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

If you do not log in during the preset period after the previous login, the Nastar disables or delete the user account.

Value range: Hibernate or Delete

Description:

Value:

The total clients that can log in to the Nastar. The maximum sessions are controlled by the Nastar licenses. If this parameter is set to more than the value controlled by the license, the total clients allowed to log in is the value controlled by the license.


Default value: Hibernate

Default value: 30 The value 0 indicates that the clients that can log in to the Nastar are not limited.

4.10.3 Parameters for Creating a Nastar User Account This section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameters when you add a Nastar user.

Parameters Name

Description

Settings

User Name

Description:

Value:

Name of the new user.

l

The length of the user name can be neither less than Min. Length preset in the account policy nor greater than 32 characters.

l

The user name can contain capital letters, small letters, numbers and underscores.

l

The name must be unique and cannot be left blank. The initial character cannot be a number or an underline.

Description

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Description:

Value:

A brief description of the user. It is used to distinguish users.

The description can contain 0-100 characters.


4-31



Name

Description

Settings

User type

Description:

Value:

Whether the user belongs to a local user or a remote user.

l

Local User

l

Remote User

Description:

Value:

Password of the new user.

The password is a character string and is case sensitive.

Password

The password must follow the system password policy. To view the policy, choose Security > Security Policy.

NOTE The length of the password of the Administrator user cannot be less than 8 characters. The length of the password of the non-Administrator user cannot be less than Min. Length preset in the password policy.

Description:

Value:

Enter the password again to ensure that the one you enter in is correct.

The value range is the same as the Password field.

User must change password for next login

Description:

Value:

If this option is selected, you need to change the user password when you log in to the Nastar next time.

-

User can not change password

Description:

Value:

If this option is selected, you cannot change your password through the Nastar client.

-

User account is disabled

Description:

Value:

If this option is selected, the user account is disabled. You cannot log in to the Nastar using this account.

-

Use system maximum password valid days

Description:

Value:

If this option is selected, the maximum password valid days you set must be the same as that defined in the password policy.

-

Maximum password valid days

Description:

Value:

The expiration date of a new password.

Value range: 0-999, 0 for valid permanently.

Confirm Password

If you have never changed the password, the count date starts from the creation date. If you select Use system maximum password valid days, this parameter is disabled. 4-32


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name Login Duratio n

Description

Settings

Description:

Setting method:

If the option is selected, the following options are all enabled. you can set the login duration.

In the New User dialog box, click Login Duration.

Start date/End date

Description:

Value:

Start date/End date when you can use this account to log in.

The value range is 1st January, 2001 - 31st December, 2037.

Daily start time/ Daily end time

Description:

Value:

The daily start time or daily end time when you can use this account to log in.

The value range is 00:00:00 23:59:59 (hour:minute:second).

Sun/ Mon/ Tue/ Wed/ Thu/Fri/ Sat

Description:

Value:

If the option is selected, you can log in from Start date to End date every week.

-

Enable Period limit

In the Login Duration dialog box, select Enable period limit check box.

4.10.4 Parameters for the Nastar User Information This section describes the parameters of the Nastar user on the Details tab. You can refer to these parameters when you view the user information and modify the user attributes.


Description

Settings

User Name

Description:

Setting method:

User name that is set when you create the user.

-

Description:

Value:

User belong to local user or remote user.

Local user or remote user.

Description:

Setting method:

User description used to distinguish different users.

Value range: 0-100 characters

Description:

Value:

Whether the account is enabled or disabled.

-

User Type

Description

Enable/Disable user account

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-33



Parameter

Description

Settings

Valid From

Description:

Value:

Start date that you can log in to the Nastar.

-

Description:

Value:

End date that you can log in to the Nastar.

-

Description:

Setting method:

Valid To

Valid Time

Period during which you can log in to the Nastar.

4-34

Click . In the Login Duration dialog box, select the Enable period limit check box. Set Daily Start Time and Daily End Time in the spin boxes and select the days in a week that you can log in to the Nastar.

Time Authorized to Change Password

Description:

Value:

Earliest time that you can change you password.

-

Password Expiry Time

Description:

Value:

Time that your password expires. Your password is invalid if you do not change it before Password Expiry Time.

-

Locked Status

Description:

Value:

Locked status of the user.

Locked or Unlocked.

User must change password next login

Description:

Value:

Yes indicates that you need to change your password when you log in to the Nastar next time. No indicates that you do not need to change your password when you log in to the Nastar next time.

-

You can not change password

Description:

Value:

Yes indicates that you cannot change your password on the Nastar client. No indicates that you can change your password on the Nastar client.

-


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Settings

Maximum password valid days

Description:

Setting method:

Maximum valid days of your password after you set a new password. If you do not change your password after you create it, the start valid date of your password is the date that you create the user.

. In the Maximum Valid Click Days dialog box, set the maximum valid days of your password. If you select the Use system maximum password valid days check box, Maximum password valid days is the maximum valid days of the system password. Value: Value range: 0-999 0 indicates that the password is permanently valid.

Recent Successful Login Time

Description:

Setting method:

Latest time that you successfully log in to the Nastar.

-

Recent Successful Login Time

Description:

Setting method:

Latest time that you successfully log in to the Nastar.

-

Recent Successful Logout Time

Description:

Setting method:

Latest time that you successfully log out the Nastar.

-

Recent Date for Changing Password

Description:

Setting method:

Latest date that you change your password.

-

Login Status

Description:

Setting method:

Your current login status.

-

4.10.5 Parameters for Adding a Nastar User Group This section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameters when you add a Nastar user group.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-35



Parameters Name

Description

Settings

Name

Description:

Value:

Name of the new user group.

Value range: 1-20 characters. NOTE l In special characters, only

underline can be contained in the name. l The start and end characters of the

user group name cannot be a space. l The name cannot start with

_private. l The name must be unique and

cannot be null.

Description

Members

Copy Rights from User Group

Description:

Value:

A brief description of the user. It is used to distinguish deferent user groups.

Value range: 0-100 characters.

Description:

Setting method:

Users that are added to the user group.

-

Description:

Setting method:

Copy rights from other user group.

1. Click Copy Rights from User Group. 2. Select the user group from Copy Rights from User Group dialog box. 3. Click OK.

4.10.6 Parameters for Assigning Operation Rights to Nastar User/ User Groups This section describes the parameters in the Select Rights dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you bind operation rights to a Nastar user/user group.

Parameters Name

Description

Authorization Objects

Description: Object of the operation rights. The object selected in Authorization Objects determines the operation rights displayed in Operations.

4-36


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Name

Description

Operations

Description: Operation right list. The operation rights displayed in Operations are determined by the object selected in Selected Rights.

Selected Rights

Description: Operation rights to be assigned to the Nastar user/user group.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


4-37


5 Log Management

5

Log Management

About This Chapter The log records the operations on the Nastar and important system events. You can use log management to query and collect statistics on logs. 5.1 Basic Knowledge of Log Management Understanding the general knowledge of log management such as its functions and log types helps you manage logs. 5.2 Managing Operation Logs You can query and collect statistics on operation logs of the Nastar to understand the operation status of the Nastar. 5.3 Managing System Logs You can query and collect statistics on system logs of the Nastar to understand the running status of the Nastar. 5.4 Managing Security Logs You can query and collect statistics on security logs of the Nastar to understand the security operation status of the Nastar. 5.5 Managing Log Templates You can use log templates to query and collect statistics on logs conveniently. This section describes how to manage log templates, including how to create, modify, and delete a log template. 5.6 Reference of the Log Management GUI This section provides the reference information of the log management GUI.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5-1


5 Log Management

5.1 Basic Knowledge of Log Management Understanding the general knowledge of log management such as its functions and log types helps you manage logs. 5.1.1 Log Management Function This section describes the log management function of the Nastar. The Nastar records Nastar running logs and user operation logs, so you can understand the Nastar running status by querying and collecting statistics on logs. In addition, you can save the query or statistics result in a file. 5.1.2 Log Types The Nastar has three types of logs: operation logs, system logs, and security logs. The three types of logs record different log information.

5.1.1 Log Management Function This section describes the log management function of the Nastar. The Nastar records Nastar running logs and user operation logs, so you can understand the Nastar running status by querying and collecting statistics on logs. In addition, you can save the query or statistics result in a file. The log management function of the Nastar enables you to perform the following operations: l

Querying logs;

l

Collecting statistics on logs;

l

Creating, modifying, or deleting a log query or statistics template;

l

Saving and printing the log query or statistics result.

5.1.2 Log Types The Nastar has three types of logs: operation logs, system logs, and security logs. The three types of logs record different log information. The following describes the three types of logs: l

Operation logs Operation logs record the information about the non-security operations on the Nastar, such as querying logs.

l

System logs System logs record important events that occur in the Nastar. For example, the Nastar does not work properly, a network fault occurs, or the Nastar is under attack. The logs help you to analyze the system status. You can then remove the faults in time.

l

Security logs Security logs record the security operations on the Nastar, such as logging in to the server, modifying the password, and exiting the Nastar server.

5.2 Managing Operation Logs You can query and collect statistics on operation logs of the Nastar to understand the operation status of the Nastar.

5-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

5.2.1 Querying Operation Logs You can query operation logs to know the operation records of the Nastar. 5.2.2 Collecting Statistics on Operation Logs You can know the operation status by collecting statistics and analyzing the operation log. For example, you can know the period during which maximum number of operations are performed, and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.

5.2.1 Querying Operation Logs You can query operation logs to know the operation records of the Nastar.

Context The statistics result is generated based on the existing data in the database. If the database is empty, the statistics result contains no match.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Operation Logs. Step 2 In the Filter window, set the filter conditions, and then click OK. NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then query logs in the Query Operation Logs window in the following ways: l

Click Template Filter, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then click Open to use an existing template to query logs. For details about how to create a log query template, see 5.5.1 Creating a Log Query Template.

l

Click Filter. Set the query conditions in the Filter, and then click OK to query logs.

----End

5.2.2 Collecting Statistics on Operation Logs You can know the operation status by collecting statistics and analyzing the operation log. For example, you can know the period during which maximum number of operations are performed, and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.


Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Operation Log Statistics. Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistical items and statistic condition, and then click OK.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5-3


5 Log Management NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then collect statistics in the Operation Log Statistics window in the following ways: l

Click Template Statistic, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then click Open to use an existing template to collect statistics on operation logs.

l

Click Statistic Filter. Set Statistical Items and Filter Condition in the Statistic Filter window, and then click OK to collect statistics on operation logs.

In the Operation Log Statistics window, the statistical result is displayed. Perform the following operations as required: l

Click Print to print the statistical result.

l

Click Save As to save the statistical result.

----End

5.3 Managing System Logs You can query and collect statistics on system logs of the Nastar to understand the running status of the Nastar. 5.3.1 Querying System Logs You can query system logs to know the important events that occur when the Nastar is running. 5.3.2 Collecting Statistics on System Logs You can know the system status by collecting statistics and analyzing the system log. For example, you can know which type of services raises the most alarms.

5.3.1 Querying System Logs You can query system logs to know the important events that occur when the Nastar is running.


Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query System Logs. Step 2 In the Filter window, set the filter conditions, and then click OK. NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then query logs in the Query System Logs window in the following ways: l


l

Click Filter. Set the query conditions in the Filter window, and then click OK to query logs.

----End 5-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

5.3.2 Collecting Statistics on System Logs You can know the system status by collecting statistics and analyzing the system log. For example, you can know which type of services raises the most alarms.


Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > System Log Statistics. Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistic condition, and then click OK. NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then collect statistics in the System Log Statistics window in the following ways: l

Click Template Statistic, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then click Open to use an existing template to collect statistics on system logs.

l

Click Statistic Filter. Set statistic condition in the Statistic Filter window, and then click OK to collect statistics on system logs.

In the System Log Statistics window, the statistical result is displayed. Perform the following operations as required. l


l


----End

5.4 Managing Security Logs You can query and collect statistics on security logs of the Nastar to understand the security operation status of the Nastar. 5.4.1 Querying Security Logs You can query security logs to know the security operations of the Nastar. 5.4.2 Collecting Statistics on Security Logs You can know the security operations by collecting statistics and analyzing the security log. For example, you can know the period during which maximum number of security operations are performed, and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.

5.4.1 Querying Security Logs You can query security logs to know the security operations of the Nastar.

Context The statistics result is generated based on the existing data in the database. If the database is empty, the statistics result contains no match. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5-5


5 Log Management

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Security Logs. Step 2 In the Filter window, set the filter conditions, and then click OK. NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then query logs in the Query Security Logs window in the following ways: l


l

Click Filter. Set the query conditions in the Filter window, and then click OK to query logs.

----End

5.4.2 Collecting Statistics on Security Logs You can know the security operations by collecting statistics and analyzing the security log. For example, you can know the period during which maximum number of security operations are performed, and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.


Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Security Logs Statistics. Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistical items and filter condition, and then click OK. NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then collect statistics in the Security Log Statistics window in the following ways: l

Click Template Statistic, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then click Open to use an existing template to collect statistics on security logs.

l

Click Statistic Filter. Set Statistical Items and Filter Condition in the Statistic Filter window, and then click OK to collect statistics on security logs.

In the Security Log Statistics window, the statistical result is displayed. Perform the following operations as required. l


l


----End

5.5 Managing Log Templates You can use log templates to query and collect statistics on logs conveniently. This section describes how to manage log templates, including how to create, modify, and delete a log template. 5.5.1 Creating a Log Query Template 5-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

You can save the specific query conditions in a log query template. This helps you query logs conveniently. The procedures for creating the query templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operation log query template as an example to describe how to create a log query template. 5.5.2 Creating a Log Statistical Template You can save the specific statistics conditions in a log statistics template. This helps you collect statistics on logs conveniently. The procedures for creating the statistics templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operation log statistics template as an example to describe how to create a log statistics template. 5.5.3 Modifying a Log Template You can modify the query or statistics conditions in the created log query or statistics template. The procedures for modifying the templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the modification of an operation log query template as an example to describe how to modify a log template. 5.5.4 Deleting a Log Template You can delete the log template that is not required any more. The procedures for deleting the templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. Taking the deletion of an operation log query template as an example, this section describes how to delete a log template.

5.5.1 Creating a Log Query Template You can save the specific query conditions in a log query template. This helps you query logs conveniently. The procedures for creating the query templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operation log query template as an example to describe how to create a log query template.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Operation Logs. Step 2 In the Filter window, click Cancel. Step 3 In the Query Operation Logs window, click Template Filter , then select New. Step 4 In the Enter The Template Name dialog box, enter the name of the template, and then click OK. Step 5 In the Filter window, set query conditions, and then click OK. ----End

5.5.2 Creating a Log Statistical Template You can save the specific statistics conditions in a log statistics template. This helps you collect statistics on logs conveniently. The procedures for creating the statistics templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operation log statistics template as an example to describe how to create a log statistics template.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Operation Log Statistics. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5-7


5 Log Management

Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, click Cancel. Step 3 In the Operation Log Statistics window, click Template Statistic and select New. Step 4 In the Enter The Template Name dialog box, enter the name of the template, and then click OK. Step 5 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistic condition, and then click OK. ----End

5.5.3 Modifying a Log Template You can modify the query or statistics conditions in the created log query or statistics template. The procedures for modifying the templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the modification of an operation log query template as an example to describe how to modify a log template.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Operation Logs. Step 2 In the Filter Condition dialog box, click Cancel. Step 3 In the Query Operation Logs window, click Template Filter and then choose Open. Step 4 In the Open dialog box, select the log template to be modified, and then click Open. Step 5 In the Query Operation Logs window, click Filter. Step 6 In the Filter Condition dialog box, modify the filtering conditions in the log template, and then click OK. Step 7 Click Template Filter and then choose Save. ----End

5.5.4 Deleting a Log Template You can delete the log template that is not required any more. The procedures for deleting the templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. Taking the deletion of an operation log query template as an example, this section describes how to delete a log template.

Procedure Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Operation Logs. Step 2 In the Filter Condition dialog box, click Cancel. Step 3 Click Template Filter and then choose Delete. Step 4 In the Delete dialog box, select the log template to be deleted, and then click Delete. NOTE

5-8

l

In the Delete dialog box, you can press the Ctrl key to select multiple log templates.

l

The log templates in use cannot be deleted.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. Step 6 In the Delete dialog box, click Close. ----End

5.6 Reference of the Log Management GUI This section provides the reference information of the log management GUI. 5.6.1 Parameters for Querying Operation Logs This section describes the parameters in the Filter Condition dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you query operation logs. 5.6.2 Parameters for Operation Log Statistics This section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you collect statistics on operation logs. 5.6.3 Parameters for Operation Log Details This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Query Operation Log window. 5.6.4 Parameters for Querying System Logs This section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you query system logs. 5.6.5 Parameters for System Log Statistics This section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you collect statistics on system logs. 5.6.6 Parameters for System Log Details This section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query System Logs window. 5.6.7 Parameters for Querying Security Logs This section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you query security logs. 5.6.8 Parameters for Security Log Statistics This section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to this section when you collect statistics on security logs. 5.6.9 Parameters for Security Log Details This section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query Security Logs window.

5.6.1 Parameters for Querying Operation Logs This section describes the parameters in the Filter Condition dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you query operation logs.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5-9


5 Log Management

Parameters Name

Description

Settings

User

Description:

Setting method:

To query data by user.

Terminal

Description: To query by terminal.

Operation Level

Result

Setting method: Click . From the Select Terminal dialog box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To query by operation level.

From the Operation Level group box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To query by operation result.

From the Result group box, select one or more items.

The operation result involves:

Time Range

Click . From the Select User dialog box, select one or more items.

l

Succeeded means the operation is complete, and all the operation results are returned.

l

Failed means the operation is failed.

l

Partly succeeded means the operation is complete, and some operation results are returned.

l

Ongoing means the operation is being carried out, the result is not returned.

l

Canceled means the operation is canceled.

Description:

Setting method:

To query by time range.

Select From and To, and then enter the date and time in the text

From means the start time, and To means the end time.

box, or click and set the time in the Date/Time Selection dialog box. Example: Example: Set the time range to "2002-02-09 00:00:00 2003-02-09 00:00:00".

5-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

Name

Description

Settings

Operations

Description:

Setting method:

To query by operation.

Operation Object

Description: To query by operation objects.

Click corresponding to Operation. From the Select Operations dialog box, select one or more items. Setting method: Click corresponding to Operation Object. From the Select Operation Object dialog box, select one or more items.

5.6.2 Parameters for Operation Log Statistics This section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you collect statistics on operation logs.

Statistical items Name

Description

Settings

Statistic Row

Description:

Setting method:

Set the row heading of the statistical result table.

Set one or two statistics items (you must select at least one statistics item, but you cannot select more than two statistics items). The statistical results are sorted according to the statistical items.

Description:

Setting method:

Set the column heading of the statistical result table.

Statistic item of Statistic column must be set.

Description: Set the row heading and column heading of the statistical result table.

Value:

Statistic Column

Statistic Item

Example

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

The parameters include None, User, User Type, Operation, Category, Terminal, Result, and Operation Object.

Description:

Value:

Preview the style of the statistical result table.

-


5-11


5 Log Management

Filter condition Name

Description

Settings

User

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics data by user.

Terminal

Description: To collect statistics by terminal.

Operation Level

Result

Click . From the Select User dialog box, select one or more items. Setting method: Click . From the Select Terminal dialog box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by operation level.

From the Operation Level group box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by operation result.

From the Result group box, select one or more items.


Time Range

l


l


l


l


l


Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by time range.

Select From and To, and then enter the date and time in the text


box, or click and set the time in the Date/Time Selection dialog box. Example: Example: Set the time range to "2002-02-09 00:00:00 2003-02-09 00:00:00".

5-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

Name

Description

Settings

Operations

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by operation.

Operation Object

Description: To collect statistics by operation objects.

Click corresponding to Operation. From the Select Operations dialog box, select one or more items. Setting method: Click corresponding to Operation Object. From the Select Operation Object dialog box, select one or more items.

5.6.3 Parameters for Operation Log Details This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Query Operation Log window.

Parameters Name

Description

Operations

Description: Name of user operations, such as add, delete, and browse.

Operation Level

Description: Level of a user's operation, such as prompt, minor, and major.

User

Description: Name of the user who performs the operation.

User Type

Description: Type of the user who performs the operation.

Start Time

Description: Start time of the operation. The format is consistent with that in region settings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

End Time

Description: End time of the operation. The format is consistent with that in region settings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

Category

Description: To identify different types of operations, such as log and remote notification.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5-13


5 Log Management

Name

Description

Terminal

Description: To identify clients in IP addresses.

Operation Object

Description: Operation objects, such as the Nastar.

Result

Description: To indicate whether the operation is successful, including Succeeded, Failed, Canceled, Partly succeeded, and Uncompleted. Partly succeeded means the operation is complete, and some operation results are returned. Uncompleted means the operation is being carried out, the result is not returned.

Details

Description: Details of operation logs.

5.6.4 Parameters for Querying System Logs This section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you query system logs.

Parameters Name

Description

Settings

Source

Description:

Setting method:

To query logs by log source.

Level

Time Range

Description:

Setting method:

To query logs by log level.

From the Level group box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To query logs by time range. If the time range is not set, all logs generated at any time are queried.

Select From and To to enter the date and time directly, or click


5-14

Click . From the Source Select dialog box, select one or more items.


and set the time in the Date/ Time Selection dialog box. Example: Example: Set the time range to "2002-02-09 00:00:00 2003-02-09 00:00:00".

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

5.6.5 Parameters for System Log Statistics This section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you collect statistics on system logs.


Description

Settings

Statistic Row

Description:

Setting method:


The Statistic Item parameter under Statistic Row is mandatory.

Description:

Setting method:


The Statistic Item parameter under Statistic Column is mandatory.


Value: The parameters include None, Level, and Source.

Description:

Value:


-

Statistic Column

Statistic Item

Example


Description

Settings

Source

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics logs by log source.

Level

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Click . From the Source Select dialog box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by log level.

From the Level group box, select one or more items.


5-15


5 Log Management

Name

Description

Settings

Time Range

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by time range. If the time range is not set, all logs generated at any time are queried.




5.6.6 Parameters for System Log Details This section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query System Logs window.

Parameters Name

Description

Level

Description: There are three levels for system logs: Error, Warning, and Info.

Source

Description: The log IDs of the subsystems of the Nastar are system management and security management.

Time

Description: The date and time when the system log is recorded. The format is consistent with that in region settings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

Basic Information

Description:

Details

Description:

The basic information of system logs. For example: start service.

Details of system logs.

5.6.7 Parameters for Querying Security Logs This section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you query security logs.

5-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

Parameters Name

Description

Settings

User

Description:

Setting method:

To query data by user.

Terminal

Description: To query by terminals.

Result

Time Range

Click . From the Select Terminal dialog box, select one or more items. Setting method:

To query by operation result.

From Result, select one or more items.

l


l


l


l


l


Description:

Setting method:

To query by event levels.

From the Event Level group box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To query by time range. If the time range is not specified, all logs generated at any time are queried.



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Setting method:

Description: The operation result involves:

Event Level

Click . From the Select User dialog box, select one or more items.



5-17


5 Log Management

Name

Description

Settings

Security Event

Description:

Setting method:

To query by security events.

Operation Object

Description: To query by operation objects.

Click corresponding to Security Event. From the Select Security Event dialog box, select one or more items. Setting method: Click corresponding to Operation Object. From the Select Operation Object dialog box, select one or more items.

5.6.8 Parameters for Security Log Statistics This section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to this section when you collect statistics on security logs.


Description

Settings

Statistic Row

Description:

Setting method:


Set one statistics item at least and select two statistics items at most. The statistical results are sorted according to the statistical items.

Description:

Setting method:


The Statistic Item parameter under Statistic Column is mandatory.


Value:

Statistic Column

Statistic Item

Example

5-18

The parameters include None, User, User Type, Security Event, Event Type, Terminal, Result, Operation Object, and Event Level.

Description:

Value:


-


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management


Description

Settings

User

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics data by user.

Terminal

Description: To collect statistics by terminals.

Result

Click . From the Select User dialog box, select one or more items. Setting method: Click . From the Select Terminal dialog box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by operation result.

From Result, select one or more items.


Event Level

Time Range

l


l


l


l


l


Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by event levels.

From the Event Level group box, select one or more items.

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by time range. If the time range is not specified, all logs generated at any time are queried.



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



5-19


5 Log Management

Name

Description

Settings

Security Event

Description:

Setting method:

To collect statistics by security events.

Operation Object

Description: To collect statistics by operation objects.

Click corresponding to Security Event. From the Select Security Event dialog box, select one or more items. Setting method: Click corresponding to Operation Object. From the Select Operation Object dialog box, select one or more items.

5.6.9 Parameters for Security Log Details This section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query Security Logs window.

Parameters Name

Description

Security Event

Description: Operation information of the security event.

Event Level

Description: Severity of a security event, such as minor, major, and critical.

User

Description: Name of the user who performs the operation.

User Type

Description: Type of the user who performs the operation.

Start Time

Description: Start time of the operation. The format is consistent with that in region settings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

End Time

Description: End time of the operation. The format is consistent with that in region settings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

Event Type

Description: Type of the event.

5-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5 Log Management

Name

Description

Terminal

Description: To identify clients in IP addresses. NOTE During the initialization of the Nastar server installation, the terminal IP address corresponding to the operations performed by using scripts or commands is 1.1.1.1 displayed in security logs.

Operation Object

Description: Operation objects, such as the Nastar

Result

Description: To indicate whether the operation is successful, including Succeeded, Failed, Canceled, Partly succeeded, and Ongoing. Partly succeeded means the operation is complete, and some operation results are returned. Uncompleted means the operation is being carried out, the result is not returned.

Details

Description: Details of security logs.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


5-21


6 OSS Management

6

OSS Management

About This Chapter This describes the OSS management. The OSS management enables you to create objects to be managed, modify objects, and delete objects. The centralized task management subsystem updates the object data at the preset time according to the object changes in the navigation tree on the interface of OSS NE management. 6.1 Basic Knowledge of OSS Management This describes the basic knowledge about the OSS management functions. You should grasp the basic knowledge before you perform management operations, which facilitates the management over network objects. 6.2 Creating an OSS This describes how to create an OSS. Creating an OSS is actually to define a physical FTP server. The Nastar collects the required data from the OSS (FTP server) to the Nastar server. 6.3 Viewing the Attributes of an OSS This describes how to view the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management. 6.4 Modifying the Attributes of an OSS This describes how to modify the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management according to the new requirement. 6.5 Reference for the OSS Management GUI This describes the parameters about the interface of OSS management and the parameters for setting the object attributes of OSS management. You can refer to the description when performing the relevant operations on the interface.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


6-1


6 OSS Management

6.1 Basic Knowledge of OSS Management This describes the basic knowledge about the OSS management functions. You should grasp the basic knowledge before you perform management operations, which facilitates the management over network objects. In the OSS management, objects present the physical or logical entities on the network. A physical or logical entity, namely, an object, can be an OSS or an NE. l

OSS Operation Support System. It defines the interface protocol principle in the Nastar. The Nastar collects the required data from a specified FTP server according to the OSS attributes and saves the data as files in a specified path in the Nastar.

l

NE NEs are used to identify network devices, such as switches and routers. NEs can be classified into actual NEs and virtual NEs. Actual NEs are actual telecommunications devices of Huawei on the network. Virtual NEs are the NEs that do not actually exist or are telecommunications devices of other vendors on the network.

The OSS management subsystem provides the basic functions for managing objects. The centralized task management subsystem adds the objects to the GUI through the OSS management subsystem. The OSS management of the Nastar provides the following functions: creating an OSS, viewing and modifying the attributes of OSSs, deleting the OSSs, refreshing the OSSs, importing the OSSs and export the OSSs.

6.2 Creating an OSS This describes how to create an OSS. Creating an OSS is actually to define a physical FTP server. The Nastar collects the required data from the OSS (FTP server) to the Nastar server.


Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > OSS Management. The OSS Management window is displayed. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required:

6-2

If you need to ...

Then ...

Create an OSS through addition

Go to Step 3.

Create an OSS through import

Go to Step 4.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


6 OSS Management

Step 3 To create an OSS through addition, perform the following steps: 1.

Click New OSS.

2.

Set the attribute parameters of the OSS.

CAUTION The values of OSS data interface type, OSS User Name, OSS Password, and OSS Server Port must be correct. Otherwise, the end-to-end task and data collection may fail. 3.

Set the information about the FTP server.

CAUTION The values of FTP server ip, FTP server port, FTP user, FTP password, FTP transfer mode, and Protocol must be correct. Otherwise, the data collection may fail. 4.

Click OK.

Step 4 To create an OSS through import, perform the following steps: 1.

Click Import.

2.

In the displayed Open dialog box, select an .xls file that meets the formatting requirements of the OSS and NE template, and then click Open. If the name of the OSS or NE to be imported is the same as the name of the existing OSS or NE, the system displays the Information dialog box, prompting you whether to overwrite the existing information.

3.

In the displayed ImportReport dialog box, check the information about the OSS or NE to be imported, and then click OK.

Step 5 Optional: If you set OSS data interface type to the M2000 V200R008 or a later version, and the M2000 adopts the SLS system, perform the following steps to set slave servers: When the M2000 V200R008 or a later version adopts the SLS system, the data required by the system is distributed on different servers because of the huge network. During the creation of an OSS, you must create a master server before setting the slave servers. 1.

In the navigation tree in the left pane, select the created OSS (master server), and then click Slave Server. The Slave Server is displayed.

2.

Click Add. The Slave server information dialog box is displayed.

3.

After setting the information about the slave server, click OK.

4.

Repeat Step 5.1 through Step 5.3 to set the information about all the slave servers. Click Close.

----End

Postrequisite l

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Set the NEs managed by the OSS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3


6 OSS Management

1.

In the navigation tree in the left pane of the OSS Management window, select an OSS, and then click NE Manager. The NE Selector dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set the NEs that are managed by the selected OSS. The left pane lists the NEs to be selected for the management of the OSS. The right pane lists the NEs that are selected for the management of the OSS. –

In the left pane, you can double-click an NE to add it to the right pane.

–

You can click pane.

–

You can click

–

You can click pane.

–

You can click

to move one or more NEs from the left pane to the right

to move all the NEs from the left pane to the right pane. to move one or more NEs from the right pane to the left

to move all the NEs from the right pane to the left pane.

CAUTION If an NE is not added to the right pane, the data of this NE cannot be collected to the Nastar server. 3.

Click OK. When creating an OSS through import, you can edit the NEs to be managed by the OSS in the file containing the information about the OSS or NE to be imported. After the import is successful, the new OSS can manage these NEs.

l

Delete an existing OSS. 1.

In the navigation tree in the left pane of the OSS Management window, select an OSS to be deleted, and then click Delete. If the selected OSS contains subobjects, the system prompts you to delete all the subobjects before deleting this OSS.

2. l


Export the information about an OSS and the managed NEs. 1.

In the lower left corner of the OSS Management window, click Export.

2.

Set a file name and specify a save path in the displayed Save dialog box, and then click Save. The file format must be .xls.

3.

In the displayed Information dialog box, click Yes to open the file that contains the information about each OSS and the managed NEs.

6.3 Viewing the Attributes of an OSS This describes how to view the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management. 6-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


6 OSS Management

Prerequisite l


l

Certain OSSs are created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > OSS Management. The OSS Management window is displayed. Step 2 Select an OSS from the navigation tree in the left pane. Then, you can view the attributes of the OSS in the right pane. ----End

6.4 Modifying the Attributes of an OSS This describes how to modify the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management according to the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

Certain OSSs are created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > OSS Management. The OSS Management window is displayed. Step 2 Select an OSS whose attributes are to be modified from the navigation tree in the left pane, and then click Edit. Step 3 Modify the relevant attributes. Step 4 Click OK. ----End

6.5 Reference for the OSS Management GUI This describes the parameters about the interface of OSS management and the parameters for setting the object attributes of OSS management. You can refer to the description when performing the relevant operations on the interface. 6.5.1 Interface Description: OSS Management This describes the interface of OSS management. Before perform the relevant operations, you need to familiarize yourself with the functions of each area on the interface. 6.5.2 Parameters for Setting the Object Attributes of OSS Management This describes the parameters for creating or modifying the objects of OSS management. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying the objects of OSS management. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


6-5


6 OSS Management

6.5.1 Interface Description: OSS Management This describes the interface of OSS management. Before perform the relevant operations, you need to familiarize yourself with the functions of each area on the interface. Figure 6-1 shows the interface of OSS management. Table 6-1 describes the items in Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1 Interface of OSS management

Table 6-1 Interface description: OSS management

6-6

No.

Name

Description

(1)

Navigation tree

Indicates that the objects in the navigation tree are sorted by OSS.

(2)

Toolbar

Provides the buttons for importing and exporting the information about OSSs and the managed NEs, creating and deleting OSSs, setting slave servers, managing NEs, and modifying the attributes of the created OSSs.

(3)

Area of OSS attributes

Displays the details of the OSS that you select in the navigation tree.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


6 OSS Management

No.

Name

Description

(4)

Area of FTP server information

Displays the details of the FTP server corresponding to the OSS that you select in the navigation tree.

6.5.2 Parameters for Setting the Object Attributes of OSS Management This describes the parameters for creating or modifying the objects of OSS management. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying the objects of OSS management.

Parameters Related to the OSS Attributes Parameter

Description

OSS name

Indicates the name of an OSS to be created or modified. Value range:

OSS data interface type

l


l

The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * + =<>?

l

Unique and cannot be null

l

Case sensitive

Indicates the type of the interface between the EMS and the Nastar. Value range: M2000V2R6, M2000V2R8, M2000V2R9, M2000V2R10, OMC920V400R001C01, and Other When the Nastar collects data from the OSS, this interface defines the relevant principles such as the path of the configuration data files and performance data files in the OSS and the naming rules of the files. Thus, the Nastar can collect the required files from the path specified by the OSS and saves the files in the specified path on the Nastar client. NOTE When creating an OSS, you need to set the value of OSS data interface type according to the data collection principles supported by the OSS. The OSSs of different version may support the same data collection principles.

If you set OSS data interface type to Other, you need to set the save paths in the EMS and Nastar when creating a data collection task. Thus, the Nastar can collect files from the specified path in the EMS and save the files in the specified path on the Nastar client. OSS User Name

Indicates the user name used to log in to the OSS server. This parameter cannot be null.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


6-7


6 OSS Management

Parameter

Description

OSS Password

Indicates the password used to log in to the OSS server. This parameter cannot be null.

OSS Server Port

Indicates the port number of the OSS server. This parameter cannot be null.

Description

It is the description of an OSS. Value range: l


l


l

Case sensitive

Parameters Related to the FTP Server Parameter

Description

FTP server ip

Indicates the IP address of the FTP server where the file to be collected is located. This parameter cannot be null.

FTP server port

Indicates the port number of the FTP server where the file to be collected is located. This parameter can be set to any integer from 1 to 65535. The default value is 21. This parameter cannot be null.

FTP user

Indicates the user name used to log in to the FTP server. Value range: l


l


l

Case sensitive

This parameter cannot be null. Indicates the password used to log in to the FTP server.

FTP password

This parameter cannot be null.

6-8

FTP transfer mode

Indicates the transfer mode set for the FTP server. The parameter value can be Passive Mode or Active Mode.

Protocol

l

SFTP: Indicates the encrypted FTP transfer, which requires the support from the FTP server.

l

FTP: Indicates the non-encrypted FTP transfer, which is a general FTP mode.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


6 OSS Management

Parameter Related to the slave server Attributes Parameter

Description

FTP server IP

Indicates the IP address of the slave server in the M2000 SLS system. The value of this parameter cannot be null.

FTP server port

Indicates the FTP service port. Value range: an integer from 0 to 65535. The default value is 21. If the parameter value is null, the system uses 0 as the port number.

FTP user

Indicates the valid user name of the FTP service in the M2000 SLS system. Value range:

FTP password

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l


l


l

Case sensitive

Indicates the password of the FTP service in the M2000 SLS system.


6-9


7 GSM Centralized Task Management

7

GSM Centralized Task Management

About This Chapter The Nastar provides centralized management for the GSM timing tasks. By setting GSM timing tasks, you can collect data from the EMS periodically, save the data as a file in certain path on the Nastar system, and import the data from the file to the database periodically for future query and analysis. In addition, you can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save resource space of the system. By using the function of GSM centralized task management, you can create, modify, delete, suspend, resume, or cancel a GSM timing task. In addition, you can view information such as status and progress of a task. 7.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management Centralized task management involves the concepts such as types of timing tasks, parameters for task scheduling, and states of timing tasks. Learning the basic knowledge of the centralized task management helps you perform the operations related to the centralized task management. 7.2 Creating a GSM User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to create GSM timing tasks. Thus, you can create GSM timing tasks by setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of network maintenance. 7.3 Modifying a GSM User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a GSM user-defined timing task. If the execution of a GSM user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 7.4 Modifying a GSM Data Deletion Task This describes how to modify a GSM data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to the Nastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the GSM data deletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save system resources. A GSM data deletion task is a system timing task. You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a GSM data deletion task, you must be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a GSM data deletion task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 7.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of backing up data. 7.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-1



You can set an automatic suspend time or an automatic resume time for a timing task. In this situation, the Nastar automatically suspends the task or resumes the task. 7.7 Viewing Timing Tasks Through the Nastar function of viewing timing tasks, you can view the status of all timing tasks in a centralized manner. This helps you adjust the concerned timing tasks according to actual conditions. 7.8 Reference for the GSM Centralized Task Management GUI This describes the interface for the GSM centralized task management and related information such as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand the functions of the GSM centralized task management.

7-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



7.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management Centralized task management involves the concepts such as types of timing tasks, parameters for task scheduling, and states of timing tasks. Learning the basic knowledge of the centralized task management helps you perform the operations related to the centralized task management. 7.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks The Nastar divides timing tasks into different types according to execution periods and task features. 7.1.2 System Timing Tasks The system timing task is created during the installation or upgrade of the Nastar system. User dbuser is the Creator of the system timing task. 7.1.3 User Timing Task A user timing task is a customized task that is created to maintain a network. 7.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters The task scheduling parameters are the parameters related to the task execution type, consisting of task start time, task execution period, and execution times. 7.1.5 States of a Timing Task A timing task has four states: idle, running, suspended, and finished. 7.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks This describes how to customize the interface for managing timing tasks. The system can display timing tasks of the specified function type in the navigation tree or display the timing tasks that meet the conditions in the task list.

7.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks The Nastar divides timing tasks into different types according to execution periods and task features.

Tasks Divided According to Execution Period According to the execution periods of tasks, the Nastar divides the managed timing tasks into two types: one-time task and periodic task. Table 7-1 describes the meanings of two task types. Table 7-1 Tasks divided according to execution period Task Type

Description

One-time task

A task is performed only once at a specific time.

Periodic task

A task is performed periodically after a specific time.

Tasks Divided According to Task Features According to different task features, the Nastar divides the managed tasks into two types: system timing tasks and user timing tasks. Table 7-2 describes the meanings of each task type. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-3



Table 7-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features Task Type

Description

System Timing Tasks

System timing tasks are necessary for the Nastar system to run properly. For details, see 7.1.2 System Timing Tasks.

User Timing Tasks

User timing tasks are the user-defined tasks that are created to meet the requirement of network maintenance. For details, see 7.1.3 User Timing Task.

7.1.2 System Timing Tasks The system timing task is created during the installation or upgrade of the Nastar system. User dbuser is the Creator of the system timing task. The Nastar uses

to indicate system timing tasks.

NOTE

l

Users in the administrator group and users in the operator group can browse system scheduled tasks. No user groups can manage system scheduled tasks.

l

The system timing tasks cannot be copied or deleted. Only some parameters of the system timing tasks can be modified.

7.1.3 User Timing Task A user timing task is a customized task that is created to maintain a network. l

You can create, modify, delete, copy, suspend, and resume user timing tasks.

l

The Nastar uses

to indicate the user timing tasks.

7.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters The task scheduling parameters are the parameters related to the task execution type, consisting of task start time, task execution period, and execution times. Table 7-3 describes the task scheduling parameters. Table 7-3 Description of the task description parameters

7-4

Parameter

Description

Task Type

According to different task execution periods, the Nastar divides the execution types of the managed timing tasks into two types: periodic execution and one-time execution. The execution type of the system timing tasks is periodic execution. The execution type of the other user timing tasks can be periodic execution or one-time execution.

Task start time

Indicates start time of periodic tasks and one-time tasks set during task creation, including date and time. The start time of tasks should be later than the current server time.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Period

l

Interval between periodic tasks. It has two enlistments: unit and duration.

l

The task execution period can be represented by month, week, day, and hour.

l

The period interval range is as follows: 1 to 12 for month, 1 to 52 for week, 1 to 366 for day, 1 to 8784 for hour.

Run Times

Indicates execution times of a periodic task. The execution times range from 0 to 65535. The value 0 indicates no limit.

For example, if the scheduling parameters of the data collection task are: l

Execution type = Periodicity

l

Start time = 2006-10-21 09:07:28

l

Execution period = 1 day

l

Period execution times = 0

Infer that the system starts to carry out the data collection task every day from 2006-10-21 09:07:28.

7.1.5 States of a Timing Task A timing task has four states: idle, running, suspended, and finished. The states of a timing task change with different operations. For details, see Figure 7-1. Figure 7-1 State transition of a timing task

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-5



State transition of a timing task is as follows: l

A timing task is in the idle state after it is initially created.

l

An idle task is changed to the running state after being scheduled.

l

An idle task is changed to the suspended state after being suspended.

l

A running task is changed to the idle state after being cancelled.

l

A suspended task is changed to the idle state after being resumed.

l

If a task need not be scheduled after being performed, it is in the finished state. If it needs to be scheduled again, it returns to the idle state.

When a timing task is in the idle, suspended, or finished state, you can delete the timing task.

7.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks This describes how to customize the interface for managing timing tasks. The system can display timing tasks of the specified function type in the navigation tree or display the timing tasks that meet the conditions in the task list.


Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management, the Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Perform different operations according to different customized requirement. Customized Requirement

Operation

Customize the navigation tree. 1. Right-click in the navigation tree and choose Filter Type from the shortcut menu. The Filter Type dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the timing task type to be displayed. By default, all the timing task types that the current user is authorized to browse are displayed. Customize the task list

1. Right-click the task list and select Filter Task. The Task Filter Setting dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the User Name, Category, Task State, and Last Run Result as the filtering conditions. For detailed parameter description, refer to 7.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions.

Step 3 Click OK. ----End 7-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



7.2 Creating a GSM User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to create GSM timing tasks. Thus, you can create GSM timing tasks by setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of network maintenance.

Context If you need to ... l

l

l

l

Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data, Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data, Creating a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning, Creating a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task Data,

Creating a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters,

the initial installation version is ...

Then ...

V600R002SPC120 or a later version

You need not create this task manually. This task is already listed in the system tasks.

A version earlier than V600R002SPC120

You need to create this task manually.

-


7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task A data collection task is performed to collect the performance data, configuration data. and interference data of the M2000 to certain path on the Nastar at the preset time. When you create an E2E task on the Nastar, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task. When you create an E2E task on the M2000, you need to manually create a data collection task on the Nastar accordingly. 7.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data A task of importing GSM performance data is performed to import data from the performance data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time. 7.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data A task of importing GSM configuration data is performed to import data from the configuration data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time. 7.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is performed to import data from the uplink ARFCN scanning data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time. 7.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task Data

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-7



A task of importing GSM measurement-task data is performed to import data from the measurement-task data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time. 7.2.6 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is performed to import data from the engineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task A data collection task is performed to collect the performance data, configuration data. and interference data of the M2000 to certain path on the Nastar at the preset time. When you create an E2E task on the Nastar, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task. When you create an E2E task on the M2000, you need to manually create a data collection task on the Nastar accordingly.

Prerequisite l


l

The required performance data, configuration data, and interference data are available on the EMS.

l

The file path for saving the collected data is provided.

l

A CDMA data collection task is a user-defined timing task.

l

A data collection task can be executed once or periodically. The options of the execution period are Minute, Hour, Day, Week, and Month.

l

Table 7-4 describes the mapping between the Nastar topic functions and the types of data to be collected.

Context

Table 7-4 Mapping between the Nastar topic functions and the types of data to be collected

7-8

Nastar Topic Function

Type of Data to Be Collected

GSM MR analysis task

Configuration data and performance data

GSM neighboring cell analysis task

Configuration data, performance data, and neighboring cell measurement task files

GSM uplink interference analysis task

Configuration data and uplink frequency scanning data

GSM frequency analysis task

Configuration data and performance data

CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task

Configuration data

CDMA uplink-interferenceranking analysis task

Configuration data

CDMA uplink-interferencespectrum analysis task

Configuration data


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Nastar Topic Function

Type of Data to Be Collected

CDMA VIP KPI analysis task

Configuration data

CDMA complaint analysis task

assistant

Configuration data

UMTS uplink interference analysis task

Configuration data

UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task

Configuration data

UMTS coverage analysis task

Configuration data

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Click New. The New Task dialog box is displayed. TIP

Choose Task Type > Data Collection from the navigation tree and double-click Data Collection. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type is set to Data Collection by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task. 1.

Type the name of the task in Task Name.

2.

Select the data collection task from Task Type.

3.

Select Once or Period in the Run Type area.

Step 4 Click Next to set the execution time. 1.

Click

. In the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box, set the start time.

You can also set the start time by editing the Start Time area. NOTE

2.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l

Start Time must be later than the current server time.

l

If Run Type is set to Once, the Start Time parameter is invalid after you select Run At Once. In addition, the task is performed immediately after the settings are complete.

Perform operations based on Run Type. l

If Run Type is set to Once, perform Step 5.

l

If Run Type is set to Period, perform Step 5 after you set Period and Run Times. –

Configuration data: It is recommended that configuration data is collected once each day.

–

GSM performance data: Collect GSM performance data is collected once each half hour or each hour based on the traffic statistics period.

–

GSM neighboring cell measurement task files: It is recommended that GSM neighboring cell measurement task files are collected once each day.

–

GSM uplink frequency scanning data: It is recommended that GSM uplink frequency scanning data is collected once each hour. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9



Step 5 Click Next. Then, set parameters such as OSS and Data Type. If ...

Then ...

It indicates that ...

Any of the following conditions is met: l M2000V2R6 is selected from the OSS drop-down list box and Config data is selected from the Data type drop-down list box l M2000V2R8, M2000V2R9 or M2000V2R10is selected from the OSS drop-down list box and Config data, Neighboring Measurement Task File, or Frqlog Data is selected from the Data type dropdown list box

Select one or multiple OSSs in the navigation tree.

The related data of all the NEs in the selected OSS are periodically collected to a specified path on the Nastar.

Select one or multiple NE object nodes under certain OSSs in the navigation tree.

The related data of the selected NEs is periodically collected to a specified path on the Nastar.

M2000V2R8,M2000V2R9 or M2000V2R10is selected from the OSS drop-down list box and Config data, Performance data, Neighboring Measurement Task File or Frqlog Data is selected from the Data type drop-down list box.

Select one or multiple OSSs in the navigation tree.

The related data of all the NEs in the selected OSS are periodically collected to a specified path on the Nastar.

Select one or multiple NE object nodes under certain OSSs in the navigation tree.

The related data of the selected NEs is periodically collected to a specified path on the Nastar.

Select Specify the time range and set Start time and End time.

The related data is periodically collected within the specified period or collected once from the M2000 to a specified path on the Nastar.

Set the path for saving files on the M2000 and the Nastar and set the file name.

The Nastar can access a specified file path on the M2000 and collect the related data to a specified path on the Nastar.

Select Get files repeatedly.

All the related data are collected from the M2000 to the Nastar each time during a periodic collection task.

M2000V2R6, M2000V2R8, M2000V2R9 or M2000V2R10 is selected from the OSS drop-down list box and Any is selected from the Data type drop-down list box.

7-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If ...

Then ...

It indicates that ...

Select Get files all over.

The Nastar traverses all the files under the subdirectories in the path where the configured source data is saved and collects the data.

Step 6 Click Finish. The new task is displayed in the task list. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task If required, you can delete created tasks to save system resources. NOTE

l

You can delete only the tasks that are created by yourself. If you are a user in the administrator group, you can delete all the user-defined tasks.

l

System tasks cannot be deleted.

l

Running tasks cannot be deleted.

1.

Choose Task Type from the navigation tree in the right pane of the Task Management window.

2.

Select one or more timing tasks from the task list in the right pane.

3.

Click Delete.

4.

In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. Then, the task is deleted from the task list.

l

Suspending a task To delay the execution of a task, you can suspend a timing task that is in the idle state. 1.


2.

You can manually or automatically suspend a task that is in the idle state: –

Suspending a task manually Select one or more timing tasks that are in the idle state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–

Suspending a task automatically Select a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK. To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task.

l

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-11


7 GSM Centralized Task Management NOTE

Only the tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.

You can manually or automatically resume a task that is in the suspended state: –

Resuming a task manually Select one or more timing tasks that are in the suspended state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–

Resuming a task automatically Select a timing task to be resumed from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Resume Time and set its value. Click OK. To set the time for automatically resuming a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task.

l

Canceling a task You can cancel a running task. After a task is canceled, its state is changed from Running to Idle. NOTE

You can cancel only the tasks that are created by yourself. If you are a user in the administrator group, you can cancel all the user-defined timing tasks.

1.


2.

Select one or more running tasks from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Cancel.

3.

In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. Then, the task state is changed from Running to Idle.

l

Viewing a log You can view the system log related to a collection task. For details, see 5.3.1 Querying System Logs.

7.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data A task of importing GSM performance data is performed to import data from the performance data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

Prerequisite l


l

The ItmService process of the Nastar runs normally.

l

The NastarDataImportService process of the Nastar runs normally.

l

The GSM performance data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing GSM performance data is a user-defined timing task.

Context

7-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7 GSM Centralized Task Management l

The task can be executed only periodically. The options of the execution period are Hour, Day, Week, and Month.

l

The system allows you to create only one user-defined timing task of this type.

l

The task of importing GSM performance data can be performed only after the related data collection task is complete. Otherwise, the integrity of the imported data may be affected.

l

The formats of files to be imported vary according to collection mode. –

If Data Type of a collection task is set to Any, the files in .zip format can be imported.

–

If Data Type of a collection task is set to a type other than Any, the files in .gz format can be imported.


You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import GSM Performance Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import GSM Performance Data by default.



2.

Select the task of importing performance data from Task Type.


Click . In the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box, set the start time. You can also set the start time by editing the Start Time area. NOTE


2.

Set Period and Run Times.

Step 5 Click Complete. The new task is displayed in the task list. ----End

Postrequisite l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l


l


l


1.

Choose Task Type from the navigation tree in the left pane of the Task Management window.

2.

Select the timing task from the task list in the right pane. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13


3.

Click Delete.

4.

In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.


Then, the task is deleted from the task list. l



2.


Suspending a task manually Select the timing task that is in the idle state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–


l

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE


1.


2.


Resuming a task manually Select the timing task that is in the suspended state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–


l



1.

7-14

Choose Task Type from the navigation tree in the right pane of the Task Management window. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



2.

Select the running task from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Cancel.

3.


l

Viewing a log You can view the system log related to an import task. For details, see 5.3.1 Querying System Logs.

7.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data A task of importing GSM configuration data is performed to import data from the configuration data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The GSM configuration data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing GSM configuration data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import GSM CFG Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import GSM CFG Data by default.



2.

From Task Type, select the task of importing configuration data.




2.


Step 5 Click Finish. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-15



The new task is displayed in the task list. ----End

Postrequisite l


l


l


l


1.


2.

Select the timing task from the task list in the right pane.

3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



1.


2.



7-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7 GSM Centralized Task Management –


l



1.


2.


3.


l


7.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is performed to import data from the uplink ARFCN scanning data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-17



Step 2 Click New. The New Task dialog box is displayed. TIP

You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Data by default.



2.

From Task Type, select the task of importing the uplink ARFCN scanning data.




2.



Postrequisite l


l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–

7-18

Suspending a task automatically Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Select a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK. To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task. l



1.


2.



–


l



1.


2.


3.


l


7.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task Data A task of importing GSM measurement-task data is performed to import data from the measurement-task data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-19



Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The GSM measurement-task data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing GSM measurement-task data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import GSM Measurement Task File for Neighbor Cell. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import GSM Measurement Task File for Neighbor Cell by default.



2.

Select the task of importing measurement-task data from Task Type.




2.



Postrequisite l


7-20

l


l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



1.


2.



–


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-21



1.


2.


3.


l


7.2.6 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is performed to import data from the engineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The GSM engineering parameters are collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


Choose Task Type > GSM Data Import > GSM Engineering Parameter Import from the navigation tree. Double-click the node, the New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to GSM Engineering Parameter Import by default.

Step 3 Set the information about the task. 1.

Enter the name of timing task in Task Name.

2.

Select the task of importing performance data from Task Type.

Step 4 Click Next to set the time. 1.

Click


You can also set the start time by editing the Start Time area. 7-22


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7 GSM Centralized Task Management NOTE


2.



Postrequisite l

Delete a task. You can delete created tasks to save the system resources. NOTE

l

Each user can delete only the tasks that are created by him. If you are a user in the administrator group, you can delete all the user-defined tasks.

l


l


1.


2.

Select a periodic task from the task list in the right part of the window.

3.

Click Delete.

4.

In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. Then the task is deleted from the task list.

l

Suspend a task. To delay the execution of a task, you can suspend a timing task that is in the idle state. 1.


2.


Suspend a task manually. Select an existing timing tasks that are in the idle state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–

Suspend a task automatically. Select a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK. To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task.

l

Resume a task. You can restore a suspended task to wait for the dispatching. Then the status of the task is changed to idle. NOTE

Only idle tasks can wait to be used.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-23



1.


2.


Resume a task manually. Select an existing timing tasks that are in the suspended state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–

Resume a task automatically. Select a timing task to be resumed from the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Resume Time and set its value. Click OK. To set the time for automatically resuming a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task.

l

Cancel a task. You can cancel a running task. The task status is changed to idle after being cancelled. NOTE


1.


2.

Select an existing running task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Cancel.

3.


l

View a log. You can view the system log related to an import task. For details, see 5.3.1 Querying System Logs.

7.3 Modifying a GSM User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a GSM user-defined timing task. If the execution of a GSM user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 7.3.1 Modifying a Data Collection Task This describes how to modify certain information about a data collection task. 7.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM performance data. 7.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM configuration data. 7.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data. 7.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task File Data 7-24


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM measurementtask file data. 7.3.6 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters This section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM engineering parameters.

7.3.1 Modifying a Data Collection Task This describes how to modify certain information about a data collection task.

Prerequisite l


l

A data collection task is created.

l

A data collection task is a user-defined timing task.

l

A data collection task can be executed once or periodically. The options of the execution period are Minute, Hour, Day, Week, and Month.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Collection > Data Collection from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. NOTE


Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE

If the task is running, the modification takes effect at the next execution.

----End

7.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM performance data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing GSM configuration data is created.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-25



Context l

A task of importing GSM performance data is a user-defined timing task.

l


Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM Performance Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. NOTE

The default names of system tasks are used. The system task name cannot be changed.



----End

7.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM configuration data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing GSM configuration data is created.

l

A task of importing GSM configuration data is a user-defined timing task.

l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM CFG Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. 7-26


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

7.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is created.

l

A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is a user-defined timing task.

l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. NOTE




----End

7.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task File Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM measurementtask file data. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-27



Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing GSM measurement-task file data is created.

l

A task of importing GSM measurement-task data is a user-defined timing task.

l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM Measurement Task File for Neighbor Cell from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. NOTE




----End

7.3.6 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters This section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM engineering parameters.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is created.

l

A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.

l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > GSM Data Import > GSM Engineering Parameter Import from the navigation tree on the left. 7-28


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 3 Double-click or click Attribute to view the Attribute dialog box. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the newest task information in the task list. NOTE

If the task is running, the modified data takes effect at the next execution.

----End

7.4 Modifying a GSM Data Deletion Task This describes how to modify a GSM data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to the Nastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the GSM data deletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save system resources. A GSM data deletion task is a system timing task. You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a GSM data deletion task, you must be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a GSM data deletion task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 7.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM history data. 7.4.2 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM performance data. 7.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM configuration data. 7.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data. 7.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Measurement-Task File Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM measurement-task file data.

7.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM history data.

Prerequisite l


l

You are a member of the Administrators user group.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-29



Context l

The task of deleting GSM history data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l

You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Execution Period, and The data files will be reserved in the server.

l

Deleting history data refers to deleting the data files that are collected to certain file path on the Nastar server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Collection > Old Data Deletion from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. NOTE




----End

7.4.2 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM performance data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting GSM performance data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l

You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Period, and Data Reserve Days.

l

Deleting performance data refers to deleting the performance data collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. 7-30


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM Performance Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

7.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM configuration data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting GSM configuration data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting configuration data refers to deleting the configuration data collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM CFG Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-31



7.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting uplink ARFCN scanning data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting scanning data of the uplink frequencies refers to deleting the scanning data of the uplink frequencies collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

7.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Measurement-Task File Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM measurement-task file data.

Prerequisite

7-32

l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Context l

The task of deleting GSM measurement-task file data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting data of neighboring measurement tasks refers to deleting the data of neighboring measurement tasks collected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM Measurement Task File for Neighbor Cell Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

7.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of backing up data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of backing up data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l

You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Execution Period, Full Backup Time, Backup Mode, and Backup Path.

l

Periodic backup refers to perform full backup on certain day within the period, and perform incremental backup at other time. The Nastar services are not disrupted when you back up data.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Backup > Data Backup from the navigation tree on the left. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-33



Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. NOTE




----End

7.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task You can set an automatic suspend time or an automatic resume time for a timing task. In this situation, the Nastar automatically suspends the task or resumes the task.

Prerequisite l


l

At least one suspended or idle timing task exists.

l

The system suspends an idle task and delay the time for using this task. If the timing task is not in the idle state at the specified time, it fails to be suspended.

l

In the specified time, the system resumes a suspended task and then the task is in the idle status and wait to be dispatched. If the timing task is not in the idle state at the specified time, it fails to be suspended.

l

You are not allowed to set auto-suspend or auto-resume a running timing task.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the task type of which you plan to suspend/restore. Step 3 Select a task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and select Suspend/Restore Step 4 In the Timing Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time or Resume Time as required. Step 5 Set the suspend time or resume time. For details of setting an automatic suspend time or an automatic restore time, refer to 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task. ----End

7-34


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



7.7 Viewing Timing Tasks Through the Nastar function of viewing timing tasks, you can view the status of all timing tasks in a centralized manner. This helps you adjust the concerned timing tasks according to actual conditions.

7.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks The Nastar offers the integrated task browsing function, which allows the authorized users to browse tasks.

Prerequisite l


l

At least one timing task exists.

l

Common users (non-administrator users) can browse all the user tasks and system tasks but cannot create and modify system tasks.

l

The administrator can browse all tasks.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Select Task Type in the navigation tree. l

In the task list, all the tasks are displayed.

l

If you want to view the common parameters and extended parameters of each task, go to Step 3

Step 3 Double click a task, or select a task and click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. In the Common Parameter tab and Extended Parameter tab, you can view the task details. NOTE

l

If State of a task is Finished, you can view the task information only.

l

If State of a task is Idle, Suspend, or Running, you can modify the task details in the Attribute dialog box.

----End

7.7.2 Checking the Task Progress You can view the progress of all the sub-tasks of a specific task.

Prerequisite l


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-35



Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the task whose progress you want to view. In the Progress column of the task list on the right, you can view the task execution information. ----End

7.7.3 Checking the Task Execution You can view the last execution results of a timing task.

Prerequisite l


l


l

During the creation of CME tasks, sub-tasks are created, which are executed in different phases.

l

You can browse the execution progress of subtasks of CME tasks.

Context


View the execution conditions in the Prev Execution Result column in the task list in the right pane.

l

You can check the result details in the Result Info area.

----End

7.8 Reference for the GSM Centralized Task Management GUI This describes the interface for the GSM centralized task management and related information such as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand the functions of the GSM centralized task management. 7.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management This part describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters, which helps you perform the related operations. 7.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions This section describes the parameters in the Task Filter Setting dialog box. When you set filter conditions for a task list, you can refer to this section. 7.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks This section describes the parameters on the Common Parameters tab on property panels of all timing tasks. When you modify a timing task, you can refer to this section. 7-36


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



7.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task This section describes the time parameters in the New Task dialog box. When you set the time of a periodic task, you can refer to this section. 7.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task This section describes the time parameter in the New Task dialog box. When you modify the time of a one-time task, you can refer to this section. 7.8.6 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a Data Collection Task This describes the parameters related to data collection tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying data collection tasks. 7.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting history data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting history data. 7.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM performance data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM performance data. 7.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM configuration data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM configuration data. 7.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting the GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data. 7.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Measurement-Task File Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM measurement-task file data. You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting the GSM measurementtask file data. 7.8.12 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes the parameters related to the task of backing up data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of backing up data. 7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task This section describes the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks.

7.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management This part describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters, which helps you perform the related operations. After you log in to the server, the Task Management interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-2. Table 7-5 describes each element displayed in Figure 7-2.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-37



Figure 7-2 Integrated Task Management interface

Table 7-5 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface

7-38

No.

Name

Description

(1)

Navigation tree

You can precisely locate a timing task through the navigation tree.

(2)

Task result information panel

After a task is carried out, the task result is displayed. On the task result information panel, you can browse the result of the task last carried out. Only the result of the currently selected task is displayed on the task result information panel. If multiple tasks are selected in the task list, only the result of the firstly selected task is displayed.

(3)

Button panel

The buttons used for carrying out integrated task management are available on the button panel.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



No.

Name

Description

(4)

Task list

You can browse the timing tasks that exist on the server side and the detailed information. In the task list, different colors are used for indicate different states of tasks (gray: complete; orange: suspended; blue: active; white: idle). The selected color of the task is darker than the previous color of the task.

7.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions This section describes the parameters in the Task Filter Setting dialog box. When you set filter conditions for a task list, you can refer to this section.

Parameters Parameter

Description

User Name

Description:

Current User

Indicates the user that operates the client. Other Users

Description: Indicates other users except the current user.

Catego ry

User Task

Description: Indicates the task created by users.

System Task

Description: Indicates the task created by OMC during the system installation or upgrade.

State

Idle

Description: Indicates that the task waits for being performed by the system.

Running

Description: Indicates that the task is being performed by the system.

Suspend

Description: The task is not ready to be scheduled.

Finished

Description: Indicates that the task is completed by the system.

Last Run Result

Success

Description: Indicates that the task is successfully carried out.

Processing

Description: Indicates that the task is being processed by the system.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-39



Parameter

Description

Partly Success

Description:

Failed

Description:

Indicates that the task is partly successfully carried out.

Indicates that the task fails to carry out. Miss Run Time

Description:

Unknown

Description:

Indicates that the task misses the previous performed time. If the server is not running properly or the task is suspended before the execution, the task may miss the previous execution.

Indicates that the previous execution result in the server is lost caused by improper service or sudden power cut. Thus, after recovery, the previous execution result cannot be determined.

7.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks This section describes the parameters on the Common Parameters tab on property panels of all timing tasks. When you modify a timing task, you can refer to this section.


Description

Value Range

Task Name

Description:

Value:

Refers to the name of a timing task

l


l

Allowed characters: English letters, numbers, -, and _

l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Run Type

Once

Description:

-

If you select this option, the system runs the created task once at the defined time point. Period

Description:

-

If you select this option, the system runs the created task periodically.

7-40


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Value Range

Start Time

Description:

Value:

This parameter sets the time for starting a task. The start time should be later than the time displayed on the server.

If you have selected Run At Once, the Start Time parameter is invalid. The task is performed immediately after the related settings are complete.

Description:

Value:


l

Tasks can be executed in hours and days.

l

The valid values for periods are as follows: Day (1 to 366), Hour (1 to 366 x 24)

Description:

Value:

This parameter indicates the times that a periodic task is executed.

0-65535

Period

Run Times

7.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task This section describes the time parameters in the New Task dialog box. When you set the time of a periodic task, you can refer to this section.

Parameters Parameter Time Setting

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Start Time

Description

Settings

Description:

Setting method:

Time range of a periodic task.

You can set this parameter with the following two methods:


l

Enter the time in Start Time.

l

Click to select the date and time in the Date/Time Selection dialog box.

7-41



Parameter Period Setting

Period

Run Times

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:

Interval of periodic tasks. The value consists of numerals and units.

l

The period can be represented in either of the following units: months, weeks, days, hours.

l

The value range for period should be as follows: Month (1 12), Week (1 - 52), Day (1 - 366), Hour (1 - 366 x 24).

Description:

Value:

Number of times for executing periodic tasks

0 - 65535 NOTE 0 indicates that the number of times for executing periodic tasks is not restricted.

7.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task This section describes the time parameter in the New Task dialog box. When you modify the time of a one-time task, you can refer to this section.

Parameters Name

Description

Settings

Time Setting

Description:

Setting method:

Time range of a one-time task.

You can set the time with the following two methods: l


l


NOTE If the Run At Once check box is selected, the task is performed immediately after you set the parameters.

7.8.6 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a Data Collection Task This describes the parameters related to data collection tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying data collection tasks. 7-42


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter Description

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Value Range

Description

OSS

Select a parameter value from the dropdown list box.

Indicates the name of an EMS.

Data Type

Select an option from the drop-down list box. The options vary with the OSS version. For details, see the following description:

Indicates the type of the data that is collected from the EMS to the Nastar.

l

The data types corresponding to the OSS of the M2000V2R6 are Config data and Any.

l

The data types corresponding to the OSS of the M2000V2R8, M2000V2R9 and M2000V2R10 are Config data, Neighboring Measurement Task File, Frqlog Data, Performance data, Any, and Adaption Layer Data.

Period

Select a parameter value from the dropdown list box. The options are 5 Minutes, 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 60 Minutes, 24 Hours.

Period for collecting data. For example, if you set the value to 5 Minutes, the Nastar collects performance data from the EMS at intervals of five minutes.

Specify the time range

You can select or not select the option.

Indicates whether to collect data during the specified time period.

Start Time

-

Indicates the start time of the data collection period.

End Time

-

Indicates the end time of the data collection period.

Source directory

-

Indicates the path for storing files in the EMS.

Source file

-

Indicates the name of the file to be collected from the EMS.


7-43



Parameter

Value Range

Description

Destination directory

-

Indicates the path for storing files on the Nastar.

The following files will be collected from ***

-

Indicates that the system collects the Source directory/Source file from the selected OSS.

And save to the server path

-

Indicates that the collected file are stored in $DATAROOT/oss_folder name containing the start time of a period/Destination directory/ Source file on the Nastar server.

Get files repeatedly


Indicates that all the data in the M2000 is collected to the Nastar each time when a periodic data collection task is performed.

Get files all over


Indicates whether to traverse the files in subdirectories of the configured source data path.

*** indicates the name of the OSS.

If this option is not selected, it indicates that the files are not traversed.

7.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting history data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting history data.


Range

Description

Config Data

An integer from 1 to 100

Indicates the storage duration of the configuration data files in the relevant path on the Nastar server.

Unit: day

The configuration data is limited to the GSM, CDMA, UMTS, and TD-SCDMA networks.


Indicates the storage duration of the performance data files in the relevant path on the Nastar server.

Unit: day

The performance data is limited to the GSM network, and the data related to all the analysis tasks of the CDMA, UMTS, and TD-SCDMA networks.


Indicates the storage duration of the neighbor measurement task files in the relevant file path on the Nastar server.

Performanc e Data

Neighbor Measureme nt Task File

Unit: day

The neighbor measurement task files are limited to the GSM network.

7-44


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Range

Description

Frqlog Data


Indicates the storage duration of the files containing the uplink ARFCN scanning data in the relevant file path on the Nastar server.

Unit: day

The uplink ARFCN scanning data is limited to the GSM network. Other Type Data


Indicates the storage duration of the other type data files in the relevant path on the Nastar server.

Unit: day

7.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM performance data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM performance data.


Value Range

Description

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. All the performance data N days ago is deleted from the database. The latest date when the data needs to be deleted is calculated according to the save time of the latest data among all the performance data in the database.

Unit: day

For example, among all the performance data in the database, if the save time of the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes all the performance data saved before 2009-03-24 from the database.

7.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM configuration data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM configuration data.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-45




Value Range

Description

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. All the configuration data N days ago is deleted from the database. The latest date when the data needs to be deleted is calculated according to the save time of the latest data among all the configuration data in the database.

Unit: day

For example, among all the configuration data in the database, if the save time of the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 100, the system deletes all the configuration data saved before 2008-12-22 from the database.

7.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting the GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data.


Value Range

Description

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. The scanning data of all the uplink frequencies N days ago is deleted from the database. The latest date when the data needs to be deleted is calculated according to the save time of the latest data among the scanning data of all the uplink frequencies in the database.

Unit: day

For example, among the scanning data of all the uplink frequencies in the database, if the save time of the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes all the scanning data of uplink frequencies saved before 2009-03-24 from the database.

7.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Measurement-Task File Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM measurement-task file data. You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting the GSM measurementtask file data.

7-46


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Value Range

Description

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. The data of all the measurement task files N days ago is deleted from the database. The latest date when the data needs to be deleted is calculated according to the save time of the latest data among the data of all the measurement task files in the database.

Unit: day

For example, among the data of all the measurement task files in the database, if the save time of the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes the data of all the measurement task files saved before 2009-03-24 from the database.

7.8.12 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes the parameters related to the task of backing up data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of backing up data.


Range

Description

Full Backup Time

SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

Indicates the date when data backup is performed.

Backup Mode

ALL, INC

Indicates the mode of the data backup.

Backup Path

-

Indicates the save path of backup files. By default, the path is /export/home/backup.

7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task This section describes the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks. Table 7-6 lists the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7-47



Table 7-6 Time parameters of a timing task Name

Description

Settings

Suspend Time

Description:

Setting method:

The system suspends an idle task and delay the time for performing this task. If the timing task is not in the idle state at the specified time, the suspension fails.

You can set the value manually.

Resume Time

7-48

Alternatively, you can click and select the time from the time select panel. The default time format is DD/ MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS. l

yyyy stands for the year.

l

MM stands for the month.

l

DD stands for the date.

l

HH stands for the hour.

l

MM stands for the minute.

l

SS stands for the second.

Description:

Setting method:

In the specified time, the system resumes a suspended task and then the task is in the idle status and wait to be dispatched. If the timing task is not in the idle state at the specified time, the suspension fails.

For details on how to set the resume time, refer to the description of the Suspend Time parameter.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

8

GSM MR Analysis

About This Chapter This describes the GSM MR analysis. The GSM analysis supports the management of MR analysis tasks, check of the MR overview report, check of the cell MR results, and comparison between MR analysis results. In addition, the GSM MR analysis supports the direct display of radio link information, provides analysis of and solutions to problems, and helps you to fast locate the relevant problems on the radio network. 8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM MR Analysis This describes the basic knowledge of the GSM measurement report (MR) analysis, such as the GSM MR analysis functions, function application scenarios, TopN counters, and types of MR topic analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSM MR analysis. 8.2 Process of GSM MR Analysis This describes the process of GSM MR analysis. 8.3 Managing GSM MR Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM MR analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM MR analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 8.4 Querying the GSM MR Overview Report This describes how to query the report of the GSM MR overview. You can query the relevant MR reports as required. An MR report includes the following information about the measurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, quality, timing advance (TA), and link balance. You can know the transceiver (TRX) or cell coverage, quality, and user distribution directly from the information in the report. The GSM MR reports are classified into GBSC reports, GSM cell group reports, TopN TRX reports, and GSM MR topic analysis reports. 8.5 Querying the MR Results of GSM Cells This describes how to query the MR results of one or more GSM cells. If the MR results indicate that certain cells have multiple TopN or problematic TRXs, you can query the details about the TopN or problematic TRXs in the MR results. 8.6 Comparing the GSM MR Analysis Results This describes how to compare the results of the GSM MR analysis. After the network optimization and device upgrade, you can compare two MR analysis results generated in two time segments to check the differences between the values of the same counters in the two time Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-1


8 GSM MR Analysis

segments. Thus, you can ascertain the detailed network performance differences in the two time segments and quickly evaluate the network optimization results. 8.7 Reference for the GSM MR Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM MR analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with GSM MR analysis functions.

8-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM MR Analysis This describes the basic knowledge of the GSM measurement report (MR) analysis, such as the GSM MR analysis functions, function application scenarios, TopN counters, and types of MR topic analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSM MR analysis. 8.1.1 GSM MR Analysis Function This describes the GSM MR analysis function. The GSM MR includes the following information about the measurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, uplink and downlink quality, timing advance (TA) distribution, and link balance information. You can know the TRX and cell coverage, quality, and user distribution directly from the information. The processing and direct displaying of the radio link information by the system can help you to solve many network problems. 8.1.2 TopN KPIs This describes TopN KPIs related to the performance analysis. The KPIs include average quality of the received signals at uplink and downlink (full rate), average quality of the received signals at uplink and downlink (half rate), average levels received at uplink and downlink (full rate), average levels received at uplink and downlink (half rate), timing advance (TA) average distribution, and uplink and downlink balance. 8.1.3 GSM MR Topics This describes GSM MR topic analysis types such as the analysis of the uplink interference, downlink interference, uplink poor coverage, downlink poor coverage, TRX poor coverage, remote coverage, uplink imbalance , downlink imbalance, and other problems. This also describes the solution to these problems.

8.1.1 GSM MR Analysis Function This describes the GSM MR analysis function. The GSM MR includes the following information about the measurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, uplink and downlink quality, timing advance (TA) distribution, and link balance information. You can know the TRX and cell coverage, quality, and user distribution directly from the information. The processing and direct displaying of the radio link information by the system can help you to solve many network problems.

MR Overview Report An MR overview report contains the following information: an overview of the radio network performance, the distribution of TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs of each BSC and cell group, the TopN TRX for which the value of each radio link counter is the lowest, and the classification of the problematic TRXs based on topic analysis. You can view the overview report routinely generated to check the information about the TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs of each BSC, each cell group, and the entire network, and check the causes of the problematic TRXs. You can also check whether other problematic TRXs exist in the cell that the selected TopN TRX or problematic TRX belongs to and analyze these TRXs. The problem analysis topics are as follows: l

Weak coverage analysis. TRXs with a low TA value, low level, and poor quality are listed.

l

Interfered cells. Cells with high level and poor quality are listed.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-3


8 GSM MR Analysis l

Over coverage analysis. You can compare the TA values and the number of MRs to analyze the traffic distribution and check whether the cell is a over-coverage cell.

l

Unbalance of the uplink and downlink. The cells whose uplink and downlink are obviously unbalanced are listed.

l

Other problems. Problems occurring on the network, such as small number of MRs and null or low traffic of a TRX, are listed.

The analysis results can be displayed in a table or a bar chart to provide the radio link quality, level, traffic distance distribution, and link balance. Analysis of the problems and recommended solutions are provided to help you to quickly analyze and locate the quality problems that occur in the radio network.

MR Query During network performance analysis and optimization, when abnormal cells (such as a cell whose call drop rate is high or the number of failed handover attempts is great) are found, you can query the MR information about these cells and the radio links of the TRXs in the cells through the Nastar performance analysis system. You can set the time and cell objects before the query. The MR information about these cells is displayed in the window of results. In addition, you can use the Nastar performance analysis system to further query the TRX information. Through the comparison and query of different TRXs in cells, you can locate more complicated network problems effectively. The query results are displayed in a table or a bar chart to provide the radio link quality and user distribution of each TRX.

MR Comparison Analysis After network upgrade and optimization such as the adjustment of antennas and modification of parameter settings, you can compare the quality and coverage of the entire network, BSC, cell group, or cell with the quality and coverage obtained before the network upgrade and optimization, or you can compare the quality and coverage of different time segments during the network upgrade and optimization. The comparison results are displayed in a table or a bar chart.

8.1.2 TopN KPIs This describes TopN KPIs related to the performance analysis. The KPIs include average quality of the received signals at uplink and downlink (full rate), average quality of the received signals at uplink and downlink (half rate), average levels received at uplink and downlink (full rate), average levels received at uplink and downlink (half rate), timing advance (TA) average distribution, and uplink and downlink balance.

Received Signal Quality The quality of received signals is divided into eight levels from level 0 to level 7 according to the bit error rate. Each level corresponds to different bit error rates. Higher level indicates the poorer quality of the received signals. Level 0 indicates the minimum bit error rate and the best quality of the received signals. Level 7 indicates the maximum bit error rate and the poorest quality of the received signal. Table 8-1 describes the relation between the quality levels of the received signals and the bit error rate. 8-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Table 8-1 Relation between the quality levels of the received signals and bit error rate. Quality Level of Received Signals

Bit Error Rate ( %)

0

<0.2 %

1

0.2 %~0.4 %

2

0.4 %~0.8 %

3

0.8 %~1.6 %

4

1.6 %~3.2 %

5 6

6.4 %~12.8 %

7

>12.8 %

Received Level The received signal level is divided into eight levels according to level values. Each level corresponds to different ranges of received levels. Higher level indicates the higher received level. Level 0 indicates the lowest received level and level 7 indicates the highest received level. Table 8-2 describes the relation between the received levels and the levels. Table 8-2 Relation between the received levels and levels

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Level of Received Level

Received Level (dBm)

0

<-100

1

(-100, -95]

2

(-95, -90]

3

(-90, -85]

4

(-85, -80]

5

(-80, -75]

6

(-75, -70]

7

>-70


8-5


8 GSM MR Analysis

TA The TA is a counter used to describe the distance with time and is used for the coverage analysis. The header of the MR sent from a mobile station (MS) to a BTS is carried with the measurement delay of the MS. The BTS must monitor the time when a call reaches and send an instruction to the MS every 480 ms on the downlink channel to specify the advanced sending time for the MS. This time is termed TA, ranging from 1 to 63.

Uplink and Downlink Balance The MR received by the BSC contains the uplink receive level and downlink receive level. The result (in dB), which is obtained by subtracting the uplink receive level and the sensitivity difference between the MS and the BTS from the downlink receive level, is classified into 11 levels from level 1 to level 11. Table 8-3 describes the relations between levels and values of the Uplink and Downlink Balance Level counter. Table 8-3 Description of link balance levels Uplink and Downlink Balance Level

Downlink Receive Level- Uplink Receive Level- 6 (dB)

1

≤-15

2

-14, -13, -12, -11, -10

3

-9, -8, -7, -6

4

-5, -4, -3

5

-2, -1

6

0

7

1, 2

8

3, 4, 5

9

6, 7, 8, 9

10

10, 11, 12, 13, 14

11

15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20

NOTE

The number 6 in the formula "Downlink receive level - Uplink receive level - 6 (dB)" refers to the sensitivity difference between the MS and the BTS.

If the statistical result indicates that the uplink and downlink are mostly in balance level 1, the downlink loss is excessively high or the downlink transmit power is excessively low. If the statistical result indicates that the uplink and downlink are mostly in balance level 11, the uplink loss is excessively high or the downlink transmit power is excessively low. According to the statistical result, you can locate the faults that occur on the transmit and receive channels, such as the TRX or antenna feeder. 8-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

8.1.3 GSM MR Topics This describes GSM MR topic analysis types such as the analysis of the uplink interference, downlink interference, uplink poor coverage, downlink poor coverage, TRX poor coverage, remote coverage, uplink imbalance , downlink imbalance, and other problems. This also describes the solution to these problems. The GSM MR topics are classified into nine categories. The system provides different operation suggestions for each category. For details, see Table 8-4. Table 8-4 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Topic

Description

Suggestion

Uplink interferen ce

The uplink-interference results in the high level and poor quality.

Change the ARFCN and check whether radio interference sources exist in the coverage area. After the ARFCN is changed, enable the function of uplink-interference analysis to analyze the interference according to the uplink frequency distribution that is measured by TRXs.

Downlink interferen ce

The downlink interference results in the high level and poor quality.

Change the ARFCN and check whether radio interference sources exist in the coverage area. After the ARFCN is changed, use an MS to search for frequencies within the cell coverage where the TRX is transmitted, and observe the downlink frequency status.

Weak uplink coverage

The loss of the uplink TRX is excessive.

Check the cable connections between the combiner and the TRX, and connections in the antenna system. Ensure that the cable connections are proper and secure, and then locate the fault by changing the cable ports, combiner, and TRX.

Weak downlink coverage

The loss of the downlink TRX is excessive.

Move an MS to a place near the TRX to measure the actual power of the TRX. Check whether the downlink level of the TRX is low. If the downlink level of the TRX is low, check the cable connections between the combiner and the TRX, and connections in the antenna system. Then, check the level at the TRX entry and output entry of the combiner by using the power meter to locate the fault.

Weak TRX coverage

l

The loss of the TRX is excessive.

l

The TRX coverage is remote, which causes the low quality of the uplink.

l

The TRX coverage is remote, which causes the low quality of the downlink.

l


l

Check whether the actual azimuth of the antenna is the same as the antenna azimuth in design. If the antenna is omni-directional, check whether the coverage is excessively large.


8-7


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description

Remote coverage

l

Remote TRX coverage

l

The TRX coverage is remote, which causes the low quality of the uplink and downlink.

upLink imbalance

downLink imbalance

Others

l

Uplink and downlink are not balanced. The downlink is stronger.

l

The excessive loss of the uplink results in the low received level and poor signal quality of the BTS.

l

Uplink and downlink are not balanced, and the uplink is stronger.

l

The excessive loss of the downlink results in the low received level and poor signal quality of the MS.

l

The performance of the TRX receive level is abnormal.

l

The number of MRs is excessively small.

Suggestion l

Check whether there are missing neighboring cells and cells whose coverage is remote.

l


l

Check whether the coverage complies with the planning and whether the output power of the TRX and CDU is normal. You can adjust the uplink received threshold and the level of the downlink static power to balance the uplink and downlink.

l


l

Check whether the coverage complies with the planning and whether the output power of the TRX and CDU is normal. You can adjust the threshold of the receive power and the level of the static power on the uplink to balance the uplink and downlink.

l

Move an MS to a place near the TRX to check the actual power of the TRX and check whether the downlink level of the TRX is low. If the downlink level of the TRX is low, check the cable connections between the combiner and the TRX and connections in the antenna system, and check the level at the TRX entry and output entry of the combiner by using the power meter to locate the fault.

Check whether the hardware or software of the TRX is faulty and whether only a small number of MRs is reported. In addition, analyze whether the generation of a small number of MRs is proper.

8.2 Process of GSM MR Analysis This describes the process of GSM MR analysis. Figure 8-1 shows the general process of GSM MR analysis.

8-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Figure 8-1 Process of GSM MR analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create an MR analysis task

Query the GSM MR overview report

Query the MR results of the GSM cells

Compare the GSM MR analysis results

End

Table 8-5 describes the process of GSM MR analysis. Table 8-5 Process of GSM MR analysis Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data

In the Analysis Task Management window on the Nastar client, you can enter the data query window to query whether the raw data required for the VIP analysis is imported to the database.

2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell analysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE to start the measurement task for all objects. NOTE Starting the measurement task for all objects needs to be performed only once. If this operation has been performed, you do not need to create an end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell task again.

When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-9


8 GSM MR Analysis

Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

3

Create an MR analysis task

You can create an MR analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required performance data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

l

Query the GSM MR overview report

You can view the analysis results of the MR analysis tasks that are successfully performed and compare the results generated in different time segments.

l

Query the MR results of the GSM cells

l

Compare the GSM MR analysis results

8.3 Managing GSM MR Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM MR analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM MR analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 8.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 8.3.2 Creating a GSM MR Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM MR analysis task. By performing MR analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solve the network faults. 8.3.3 Modifying a GSM MR Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM MR analysis task to meet the new requirement. 8.3.4 Checking a GSM MR Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM MR analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM MR analysis task.

8.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 8-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Prerequisite l


l

The OSS and NEs related to analysis tasks are created.

l

The configuration data related to the analysis tasks is imported to the Nastar database.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management. The E2E Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Click New.... The New Task dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Perform the following operations as required. If ...

Then ...

You want to create a neighboring cell measurement task

Perform Step 4.

You want to create a GSM uplink interference data task

Perform Step 5.

Step 4 Perform the following operations to create a neighboring GSM cell measurement task. 1.

Set the basic information about the task. a.

In Task Name, type the name of the neighboring cell measurement task.

b.

From the OSS Name drop-down list box, select the OSS that is related to the E2E task.

c.

In E2E Task List, select GSM Neighbouring Cell Task.

2.

Click Next. On the Measure Task tab page, set the time, objects, and frequency of the neighboring cell measurement task.

3.

Set Persist Time (Minute), Period, and Measure Step.

4.

l

Persist Time (Minute) indicates the total duration that the measurement task is performed.

l

Period indicates the interval at which each group of frequencies is measured.

l

Measure Step indicates the number of frequencies in a group.

From the object navigation tree, select the cell related to the task. The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects that meet the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

5.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Set the frequency.


8-11


8 GSM MR Analysis NOTE

Before setting the frequency, set Measure Step. The frequencies that you select are organized into groups according to Measure Step that you set. For example, if Measure Step is set to 2 and the frequencies 59, 60, and 61 are selected, the frequencies are organized into two groups. One group consists of frequencies 59 and 60, and the other group consists of frequency 61. In a measurement period, the M2000 measures these frequency groups in turn. After setting the frequency is complete, you can also modify the value of Measure Step to reorganize the frequencies.

6.

Optional: Set the soft parameters of the neighboring cell measurement task. a.

Click the Soft Parameter tab.

b.

Select Soft Parameter Setting. If you select this option, the soft parameters that you set are valid for only this measurement task.

c.

Set the thresholds of the soft parameters as required. For the description of the soft parameters, see 8.7.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks.

7.

Click Complete. The new neighboring cell measurement task is displayed in the task list.

Step 5 Perform the following operations to create a GSM uplink frequency scanning task. 1.


In Task Name, type the name of the uplink frequency scanning task.

b.


c.

In E2E Task List, select GSM Uplink Interference Data Task.

2.

Click Next to set Time (Minute), that is, the total duration that the measurement task is performed.

3.

In the Cell Parameter Setting area, select the cell and frequency band to be measured. a.

From the BSC Type drop-down list box, select the BSC type.

b.

From the Frequency Segment drop-down list box, select the frequency band that the cell uses.

c.

From the object navigation tree, select the cell related to the task. The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can rightclick in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects that meet the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

4.

5.

In the Frequency Parameter Setting area, select the frequency to be measured. a.

From the Frequency Type drop-down list, select the required frequency type.

b.

When Frequency Typeis set to User Defined in The Frequency Segment, you need to select a frequency from the frequency list. The selected frequencies are colored yellow.

Click Complete. The new uplink frequency scanning task is displayed in the task list.

----End 8-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Postrequisite To view the attributes of a created E2E task, perform the following operations: 1.

From the task list in the right pane of the E2E Task Management window, select a task record, and then click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed.

2.

View relevant parameters.

To delete an unnecessary E2E task that is not running, perform the following operations: 1.

In E2E Task Management, select a task record, and then click Delete.

2.

In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

The attributes of a created E2E task cannot be modified. If you want to change certain parameter values, you need to delete the original task and then create another one. To update the task list, click Refresh in the lower-right corner of the E2E Task Management window.

8.3.2 Creating a GSM MR Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM MR analysis task. By performing MR analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solve the network faults.

Prerequisite l


l

The import task is created and the data required for data analysis is imported in the Nastar database.

l

An MR analysis task can be performed once or periodically. You can set the execution period of a periodical task to days.

l

The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to be analyzed cannot exceed 15 days.

Context

Procedure in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Step 1 Click Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, Execution Type, and Note. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Analysis Task Management-New Task. If ...

Then ...

Once Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set only Time Setting for Once Task Data.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-13


8 GSM MR Analysis

If ...

Then ...

Cycle Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set Task Configuration and Time Setting for Cycle Task Data. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page. l

Choose BSC or Cell Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation tree as required.

l

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can click any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. –

You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.

–

You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

Step 7 Set MR-related parameters on the Parameter Setting tab page. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete an MR analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE

The tasks in the Running state cannot be deleted.

1.

Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click

3.

Click Yes in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

.

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend an MR analysis task that is in the Idle state. After this operation, the MR analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the MR analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.


2. 8-14

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Only the tasks whose Status is Idle can be suspended. Otherwise, the unavailable. l

button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended MR analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the MR analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.

The task can be performed only when its Status is Suspend. If the task is not in the suspended state, the button is unavailable.

8.3.3 Modifying a GSM MR Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM MR analysis task to meet the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

A GSM MR analysis task is created.

Context You are not allowed to modify the parameters of the task whose Status is Running or Complete. You can only view the information about the task.

Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The

Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings. l

For details about the parameters, see 8.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM MR Analysis Tasks.

l

For periodical tasks, you can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Begin Date, Cycle, Execution Times, and Time parameters in the time information, the information about the navigation tree of objects, and the Parameter Setting for Exceptional TRXs in the Case of MR Topic Analysis parameter.

l

For the tasks that can be performed only once, you can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-15


8 GSM MR Analysis

information, the information about the navigation tree of objects, and the Parameter Setting for Exceptional TRXs in the Case of MR Topic Analysis parameter. Step 4 Click Complete. ----End

8.3.4 Checking a GSM MR Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM MR analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM MR analysis task.

Prerequisite l


l

A GSM MR analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Click the GSM MR Analysis Task node from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: If you need to ...

Then ...

Check the attributes of an MR analysis task.

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click

.

You can view the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 8.3.3 Modifying a GSM MR Analysis Task. Check the execution progress of a task.

8-16

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the execution progress of the task in the Progress column.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

If you need to ...

Then ...

Check the task execution results.

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results of the previous execution of the selected task in the Last Running Result column. You can check the results of the performed tasks in the result list in the lower-right pane. You can check the GSM MR overview report and GSM cell MR results, and compare the GSM MR analysis results. NOTE In the result list, if the result information about tasks that fail to be executed at a certain period already exists in the database, you can right-click the results, and then choose Analyze Result Again from the shortcut menu to analyze the results of this period again. Only the results of tasks that fail to be executed are analyzed again.

----End

Postrequisite l

In the drop-down list boxes above the task list, you can set the filter conditions to filter the tasks by the task status, task execution type, and task type. You can also type the keyword of a task name in the text box. Then, the system searches for the tasks by the keyword. , you can restore the preset filtering conditions to the initial state, that is, By clicking all the task information is displayed.

l

The system enables you to search for task information. You can click any line in the task information list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the task information that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

8.4 Querying the GSM MR Overview Report This describes how to query the report of the GSM MR overview. You can query the relevant MR reports as required. An MR report includes the following information about the measurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, quality, timing advance (TA), and link balance. You can know the transceiver (TRX) or cell coverage, quality, and user distribution directly from the information in the report. The GSM MR reports are classified into GBSC reports, GSM cell group reports, TopN TRX reports, and GSM MR topic analysis reports. 8.4.1 Querying the GBSC Report This describes how to query a GBSC report. You can query the distribution of TopN and problematic TRXs on the entire network and the number of TRXs under each GBSC. You can also query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each GBSC according to a certain radio link counter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-17


8 GSM MR Analysis

8.4.2 Querying the GSM Cell Group Report This describes how to query the GSM cell group report. You can query the distribution of TopN and problematic TRXs on the entire network and the calculation result of all the TRXs under each cell group. You can also query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each cell group according to certain radio link counter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic. 8.4.3 Querying a GSM TopN TRX Report This describes how to query a GSM TopN TRX report. You can query the information about N TRXs (currently, N = 10) whose performance is the poorest as indicated by the selected counter. 8.4.4 Querying a GSM MR Topic Analysis Report This describes how to query a GSM MR topic analysis report. You can query the information about all the problematic TRXs that meet the requirements of certain MR topic.

8.4.1 Querying the GBSC Report This describes how to query a GBSC report. You can query the distribution of TopN and problematic TRXs on the entire network and the number of TRXs under each GBSC. You can also query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each GBSC according to a certain radio link counter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose MR Overview Report. The MR Overview Report window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required:

8-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Purpose

Operation

Querying relevant information about the Choose BSC Overview Report from the TopN and problematic TRXs on the entire navigation tree in the MR Overview Report network window. NOTE l In Area (2), the system displays the number of

TopN and problematic TRXs in each GBSC on the entire network. In Area (3), the system displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in each GBSC. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the selected item in Area (3) on a bar chart. For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis. l You can double-click the bar chart in Area (4) to

zoom in the chart, and then double-click the chart again to restore the chart to the original size.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-19


8 GSM MR Analysis

Purpose

Operation

Querying information about the TopN and problematic TRXs in a GBSC and analyzing the problematic TRXs according to a topic

Choose BSC Overview Report > *** > *** from the navigation tree in the MR Overview Report window. The first *** indicates the GBSC name. A GBSC is named in the following format: NE name:NE ID. For example, BSC1:10. The second *** indicates the counter name or topic name. A counter is named in the following format: counter name(number of problematic TRXs). A topic is named in the following format: topic name(number of problematic TRXs). For example, uplink interference(10). NOTE l If the number of TopN or problematic TRXs for a

counter or topic is greater than that in the previous period, an upward arrow next to the corresponding counter name or topic name in Area (1) is found and the number of new TopN or problematic TRXs is displayed. The information about the new TopN or problematic TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and is highlighted in yellow. l If you select a counter node, Area (2) sorts all the

TRXs in the selected GBSC according to the counter. If you select a TopN TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in the cell that the selected TopN TRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3) displays the information about each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart. l If you select a topic node, Area (2) lists all the

problematic TRXs that meets the requirements of the selected topic. If you select a problematic TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in the cell that the selected problematic TRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3) displays the information about each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart. l You can double-click the bar chart in Area (4) to

zoom in the chart, and then double-click the chart again to restore the chart to the original size. For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

8-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSC Reports. ----End

Postrequisite l

The system enables you to export the query results. Right-click the query result list and choose Save As. After setting the save path and filename, click Save. Then, the query results are saved as a CSV or XLS file.

l

To query chart properties, and save, print, and resize the chart in the chart area, perform the following operations: –

Right-click the chart, and then choose Property from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Chart Property dialog box, set the coordinate axes of and basic information about the chart.

–

Right-click the chart, and then choose Save as from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Save dialog box, set the save path and file name, and then click Save to save the queried chart as a file on the local PC.

–

Right-click the chart, and then choose Print from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Page Setup dialog box, set print properties, and then click OK.

–

If the chart is not clear due to an excessive number of dots, right-click the chart, and then choose Zoom In > ***, Zoom Out > ***, or Auto Range > *** to adjust the size of the chart. Here, *** indicates a submenu item. It can be Both Axes, Horizontal Axis, or Vertical Axis, which indicates that you can adjust both axes, the horizontal axis, or the vertical axis, respectively.

l

The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the query result list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords, that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

8.4.2 Querying the GSM Cell Group Report This describes how to query the GSM cell group report. You can query the distribution of TopN and problematic TRXs on the entire network and the calculation result of all the TRXs under each cell group. You can also query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each cell group according to certain radio link counter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-21


8 GSM MR Analysis

Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose MR Overview Report. The MR Overview Report window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Querying relevant information about the Choose Cell Group Overview Report from the TopN and problematic TRXs on the entire navigation tree in the MR Overview Report network window. NOTE l In Area (2), the system displays the number of

TopN and problematic TRXs in each cell group on the entire network. In Area (3), the system displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in each cell group. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the selected item in Area (3) on a bar chart. For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis. l You can double-click the bar chart in Area (4) to

zoom in the chart, and then double-click the chart again to restore the chart to the original size.

8-22


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Purpose

Operation

Querying information about the TopN Choose Cell Group Overview Report > *** > and problematic TRXs in a cell group and *** from the navigation tree in the MR analyzing the problematic TRXs Overview Report window. according to a topic The first *** indicates the name of a cell group. A cell group is named in the following format: group name:group number. For example, Cell1:10. The second *** indicates the name of a counter or topic. A counter is named in the following format: counter name(number of problematic TRXs). A topic is named in the following format: topic name(number of problematic TRXs). For example, uplink interference(10). NOTE l If the number of TopN or problematic TRXs for a

counter or topic is greater than that in the previous period, an upward arrow next to the corresponding counter name or topic name in Area (1) is found and the number of new TopN or problematic TRXs is displayed. The information about the new TopN or problematic TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and is highlighted in yellow. l If you select a counter node, Area (2) sorts all the

TRXs in the selected cell group according to the counter. If you select a TopN TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in the cell that the selected TopN TRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3) displays the information about each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart. l If you select a topic node, Area (2) lists all the

problematic TRXs that meet the requirements of the selected topic. If you select a problematic TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in the cell that the selected problematic TRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3) displays the information about each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart. l You can double-click the bar chart in Area (4) to

zoom in the chart, and then double-click the chart again to restore the chart to the original size. For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-23


8 GSM MR Analysis

For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM Cell Group Reports. ----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


8.4.3 Querying a GSM TopN TRX Report This describes how to query a GSM TopN TRX report. You can query the information about N TRXs (currently, N = 10) whose performance is the poorest as indicated by the selected counter.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. 8-24


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose MR Overview Report. The MR Overview Report window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Choose TopN > *** from the navigation tree in the MR Overview Report window. l

Here, *** indicates a counter name. For example, Full-Rate Uplink Receive Level Grade.

l

If the number of TopN TRXs for a TopN counter is greater than that in the previous period, an upward arrow next to the corresponding TopN counter name in Area (1) is found and the number of increased TopN TRXs is displayed. The information about the increased TopN TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and is highlighted in yellow.

l

Area (2) lists 10 TRXs whose performance is the poorest as indicated by the selected counter. If you select a TopN TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in the cell which the selected TopN TRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3) displays the information about all the TRXs in the cell. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart. For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

l

You can double-click the bar chart in Area (4) to zoom in the chart, and then double-click the chart again to restore the chart to the original size.

l

For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSM TopN TRX Reports.

----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the query result list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-25


8 GSM MR Analysis

that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

8.4.4 Querying a GSM MR Topic Analysis Report This describes how to query a GSM MR topic analysis report. You can query the information about all the problematic TRXs that meet the requirements of certain MR topic.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose MR Overview Report. The MR Overview Report window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Choose Topic > *** from the navigation tree in the MR Overview Report window. l

Here, *** indicates the name of an MR topic, for example, Uplink Weak Coverage.

l

If the number of problematic TRXs for a topic is greater than that in the previous period, an upward arrow next to the corresponding topic name in Area (1) is found and the number of increased problematic TRXs is displayed. The information about the increased problematic TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and is highlighted in yellow.

l

Area (2) lists the problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the selected topic. If you select a problematic TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in the cell which the selected problematic TRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3) displays the information about each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the system displays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart. For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

l


l

For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MR Topic Analysis Reports.

----End 8-26


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


8.5 Querying the MR Results of GSM Cells This describes how to query the MR results of one or more GSM cells. If the MR results indicate that certain cells have multiple TopN or problematic TRXs, you can query the details about the TopN or problematic TRXs in the MR results.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Right-click a result and choose MR Query. The MR Query dialog box is displayed. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-27


8 GSM MR Analysis

This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select one or more cells to be queried. The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area. Step 5 Click OK. The MR Query Results dialog box is displayed. l

In Area (8), the system displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in each cell. If you select an item in Area (8), the system displays the information about each TRX in the cell that the selected item belongs to in Area (9). In Area (10), the system displays the information about the TRX selected in Area (9) on a bar chart. For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

l


l

For details about the parameters, see 8.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR Analysis Results of GSM Cells.

----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l

8-28

The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the query result list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords, that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

8.6 Comparing the GSM MR Analysis Results This describes how to compare the results of the GSM MR analysis. After the network optimization and device upgrade, you can compare two MR analysis results generated in two time segments to check the differences between the values of the same counters in the two time segments. Thus, you can ascertain the detailed network performance differences in the two time segments and quickly evaluate the network optimization results.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a period task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of a selected task in the lower-right pane. NOTE

The function of comparing the GSM MR analysis results supports only period task but does not support once task.

Step 3 Right-click two results and choose MR Comparison Analysis. The Object Selection dialog box is displayed. This operation can be performed only when the Result Status of the task is Complete. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select one or more objects. l

If the current task is performed to analyze the cells under a BSC, you can select All, BSC, or Cell above the navigation tree to sort the objects. If the current task is performed to analyze the cells in a cell group, you can select All, Cell Group, or Cell above the navigation tree.

l

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

Step 5 Click OK. The MR Comparison Analysis dialog box is displayed. l

In Area (14), the system displays the differences between the values of the same counters of each object in two time segments. In Area (15), the system displays the information that is selected in Area (14) on a bar chart. –

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-29


8 GSM MR Analysis –

The system can display the compared counter values that indicate performance trends in the table in different colors. Red indicates that the performance deteriorates; green indicates that the performance improves; gray indicates that no query result exists or that the performance does not change.

l


l

For details about the parameters, see 8.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR Analysis Results.

----End

Postrequisite l

The system enables you to export the query results. Right-click the query result list and choose Save As.... After setting the save path and filename, click Save. Then, the query results are saved as a CSV or XLS file.

l


8.7 Reference for the GSM MR Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM MR analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with GSM MR analysis functions. 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis This describes the interfaces for GSM MR analysis. The interfaces for GSM MR analysis consist of MR Overview Report, MR Query, and MR Comparison Analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface. 8.7.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks This section describes the parameters for creating GSM E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating a GSM E2E task. 8.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM MR Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM MR analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM MR analysis task. 8.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSC Reports This describes the parameters related to querying the GBSC reports. You can refer to these parameters when querying the GBSC reports. 8.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM Cell Group Reports This describes the parameters for querying the GSM cell group reports. You can refer to the description when querying the GSM cell group reports. 8.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSM TopN TRX Reports This describes the parameters for querying the GSM TopN TRX reports. You can refer to the description when querying the GSM TopN carrier reports. 8.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MR Topic Analysis Reports 8-30


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

This describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM MR topic analysis. You can refer to the description when querying the GSM MR topic analysis reports. 8.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR Analysis Results of GSM Cells This describes the parameters for querying the MR analysis results of one or more GSM cells. You can refer to the description when querying the MR analysis results of GSM cells. 8.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR Analysis Results This describes the parameters related to comparing GSM MR analysis results. You can refer to these parameters when comparing GSM MR analysis results.

8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis This describes the interfaces for GSM MR analysis. The interfaces for GSM MR analysis consist of MR Overview Report, MR Query, and MR Comparison Analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface.

Interface for MR Report and Interface Description The MR comprehensive analysis results can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shown in Figure 8-2. Figure 8-2 MR Overview Report

No. Name

Description

(1)

You can accurately locate the objects of the MR report on the navigation tree.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Navigation tree of MR overview report


8-31


8 GSM MR Analysis

No. Name

Description

(2)

Displays the information about the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs in table.

Area for TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs

Different information is displayed in different situations. For details, see the description of relevant task pages. (3)

Area for TRXs

Displays the information about the TRXs in table. Different information is displayed in different situations. For details, see the description of relevant task pages. The system supports the function of highlighting MR summary reports in different colors. If a TRX is faulty, this TRX is highlighted in red.

(4)

Area for counter charts

Displays the counter information about the selected objects in histogram mode.

(5)

Task information list

Displays the basic information about this task in table.

(6)

Cell information list

Displays the basic information about the cells corresponding to the selected TRXs in table.

(7)

Area for problematic TRXs and operation Displays current problematic TRXs and advice operation advice.

Interface for Displaying MR Results and Interface Description The MR results of a cell can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shown in Figure 8-3.

8-32


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Figure 8-3 MR Query Result

No. Name

Description

(8)

Area for TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs

Displays the calculated values of all TRXs of each cell in table.

(9)

Area for TRXs

Displays the values of all TRXs of the selected cells in table. The system supports the function of highlighting MR results in colors. If a TRX is faulty, this TRX is highlighted in red.

(10) Area for counter charts


(11) Task information list

Displays the basic information about this task in table.

(12) Cell information list

Displays the basic information about the cells corresponding to the selected TRXs in table.

(13) Area for problematic TRXs and operation Displays current problematic TRXs and advice operation advice.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-33


8 GSM MR Analysis

Interface for MR Comparison Analysis and Interface Description The MR comparison results of a cell can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shown in Figure 8-4. Figure 8-4 MR Comparison Report

No. Name

Description

(14) Area for counter summary information Displays the differences of all summarized counters of each object within two periods in table. The Nastar can display the compared counter values that indicate performance trends in the table in colors. Red indicates that the performance deteriorates; green indicates that the performance improves; gray indicates that no comparison result exists or that the performance does not change. (15) Area for counter charts


8.7.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks This section describes the parameters for creating GSM E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating a GSM E2E task. 8-34


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Description of the parameters of GSM neighboring cell measurement tasks Parameter

Description

Basic information

Measure task information

Task Name

Indicates the name of a neighboring cell measurement task.

OSS Name

Indicates the name of the OSS related to the task.

E2E Task List

Select the GSM Neighbour Cell Data Task node.

Persist Time (Minute)

Indicates the total duration that a measurement task is performed. The value is an integer from 1 to 10110. The duration time must be later than the time calculated by (Measurement period ×15) × ([Total number of test ARFCNs ÷ measurement step + 1]) + 15.

Measurement period

Interval between the ARFCNs of each group. The value is an integer from 1 to 48. The unit is *15 (minute), that is, the value must be multiples of 15 minutes. For example, if this parameter is set to 2, the measurement time of each ARFCN is 2×15 minutes, that is, 30 minutes.

Measurement step length

Indicates the number of ARFCNs in the same group. The value is an integer from 1 to 32. The measurement step must be less than or equal to the minimum rest step of the selected cell.

Cell Object

Indicates the cell related to the neighboring cell measurement task.

Displays the frequency information.

Indicates the set of ARFCNs to be measured. The ARFCNs are classified by group. The number of ARFCNs of each group is determined by Measure Step. NOTE l You can select a maximum of 762 ARFCNs for a cell.

If the number exceeds 762, the NE returns an error message after the corresponding MML command is executed, indicating that the task creation or modification fails. l Before setting this parameter, you must set Measure

Step.

Soft parameter information

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Set the soft parameters.

If you select this option, the soft parameters that you set are valid for this measurement task.


8-35


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description RSSThres

The value is an integer from 0 to 127. When the difference between the levels of the neighboring cell and the serving cell in the MR is greater than this value, the relevant traffic statistical counter is incremented by one.

ASSThres

The value is an integer from 0 to 63. When the level of the neighboring cell in the MR is greater than this value, the relevant traffic statistical counter is incremented by one.

NCELLINTERFLE VELTHRES 1-7

You can set the thresholds of interference level for seven neighboring cells. The value is an integer from 0 to 127. When the difference between the levels of the neighboring cell and the serving cell in the MR is greater than this value, the relevant traffic statistical counter is incremented by one.

NOTE

l

Level refers to the strength of the received or transmitted signal. It is generally used in power control and handover algorithm.

l

ASSThres and RSSThres evaluate the reasonableness of the neighbor cell. According to the actual requirements, you can modify the two values to adjust the evaluation standard.

l

ADJINLVThres1 to ADJINLVThres7 evaluates the CIR distribution of neighboring cells and serving cells and the ratio among each segment. This parameter in combination with frequency configuration analysis indicates the severity level of each frequency interference, and thus can be used to adjust the C/I distribution segment of neighboring cells and serving cells. Carrier-to-interference ratio distribution refers to the distribution of the power of the carrier signals and the power of the interference signals, that is, C/I distribution.

Description of the parameters of GSM uplink frequency scanning tasks Parameter Basic information

Measure information

Description Task Name

Indicates the name of a uplink frequency scanning task.

OSS Name


E2E Task List

Select the GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Data Task node.

Time (Minute)

Indicates the total duration that a measurement task is performed. The value is an integer from 5 to 4320.

8-36


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description BSC Type

Indicates the BSC type of a uplink frequency scanning task.

Band

Indicates the frequency band used by a cell. The M2000 supports the scanning of the following frequency bands: l

DCS_1800

l

EGSM_900

l

GSM850

l

P_GSM900

l

PSC1900

l

R_GSM900

Cell Object

Indicates the name of a cell related to the uplink frequency scanning task.

Frequency Type

Indicates the types of the test ARFCNs. The options are as follows: l

All Frequency In The Frequency Segment Indicates that all the ARFCNs in the selected frequency band are measured.

l

All Configuration In the Selected Cells Indicates the union of the ARFCNs of the selected cell.

l

The User Defined in the Frequency Segment Indicates that you need to manually select the ARFCNs to be measured.

8.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM MR Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM MR analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM MR analysis task.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-37


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter Description Parameter Basic Information


Indicates the name of an MR analysis task. Value range: l


l

The following characters are not allowed: ` ~ ! @ #$%^&*()+={}[]\|;':,.?/<>"

l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

You need to select GSM MR Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type

l

Once task: The system executes the created tasks only once at the specified time.

l

Period task: The system executes the created tasks at the preset time.

Note

Indicates the description of the task. Value range:

Time Information

Begin Date

l


l

The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! # $ %^*+=|\/,'`

Indicates time for starting a task. The start time should be later than the current server time. You can either type the time value in this field, or to select the date and time in the Date click Selection dialog box. This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

Cycle

Indicates the interval between periodic tasks. This parameter involves the period unit and the interval. l

Unit: day.

l

Interval: 1 to 9999.

This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks. Execution Times

Indicates the times that a periodic task is executed. If this parameter is set to 0, you can infer that the task is executed all the time. Value range: 0 to 9999. This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

8-38


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description Data Time Scope

The start time should precede the end time. You can either type the time value in this field, or click to select the date and time in the Date Selection dialog box. This parameter is valid for only one-time tasks.

Task Start At

Indicates the start time for executing analysis tasks. The parameter value must be later than the end time of Data Time Scope.

Time

l

All day: The task is executed every day during the selected time range.

l

Specify: The task is executed during the specified time segment every day during the selected time range. The time segment cannot overlap. The start time of the next time segment must be later than or the same as the end time of the current time segment.

Object Information

Parameter Information

BSC

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the BSCs of the entire network.

Cell Group

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the cell groups of the entire network.

Uplink Quality ≥ X MR of a Value (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the level of uplink quality is not smaller than X, is greater than Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the level of uplink quality. It is an integer between 1 and 7. The default value is 4. Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 100. The default value is 10.

Downlink Quality ≥ X MR of a Value (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the level of downlink quality is not smaller than X, is greater than Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the level of downlink quality. It is an integer between 1 and 7. The default value is 4. Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 100. The default value is 10.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-39


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description Uplink Level ≤ X MR of dBm (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the value of uplink level is not greater than X (dBm), is greater than Y % of the total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the value of uplink level. It can be -100, -95, -90, -85, -80, -75, or -70. The default value is -90. Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 100. The default value is 70.

Downlink Level ≤ X MR of dBm (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the value of downlink level is not greater than X (dBm), is greater than Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the value of downlink level. It can be -100, -95, -90, -85, -80, -75, or -70. The default value is -90. Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 100. The default value is 40.

TA ≥ X MR of a Value (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the TA value is not smaller than X, is greater than Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the TA value. It is an integer from 1 to 63. The default value is 6. Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 100. The default value is 50.

Downlink Level Uplink Level > X MR of dB (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the difference between the downlink level and uplink level is greater than X (dB), is greater than Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the level difference. It can be -15, -10, -6, -3, or -1. The default value is -15. Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 100. The default value is 40.

Downlink Level Uplink Level < X MR of dB (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the difference between the downlink level and uplink level is smaller than X (dB), is greater than Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the level difference. It can be 1, 3, 6, 10, or 15. The default value is 15. Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 100. The default value is 40.

8-40


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description Total Number of MR < X

If the number of received MRs is smaller than X, the TRX is problematic. X indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to 9999. The default value is 200.

TopN =X

Indicates the number of TopN counters. You can query the information about X TRXs whose performance is the poorest as indicated by the selected counter. X indicates the number of TopN counters. It is an integer from 1 to 99. The default value is 10.

8.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSC Reports This describes the parameters related to querying the GBSC reports. You can refer to these parameters when querying the GBSC reports. NOTE

For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

Parameters for Querying TRXs on the Entire Network Area (2) displays the number of TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs in each GBSC on the entire network. For details, see Table 8-6. Table 8-6 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (1)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID

Indicates the ID of a BSC.

BSC Name

Indicates the name of a BSC, for example, BSC_1.

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received signal quality (full rate) values of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received signal quality (full rate) values of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received signal quality (half rate) values of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received signal quality (half rate) values of the MSs exceeding the threshold.


8-41


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (full rate) of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (full rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (half rate) of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (half rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average TA Distribution

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values of Average TA Distribution exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Link Balance

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values of Link Balance exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Uplink Interference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Uplink Interference topic.

TRX Count for Downlink Interference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Downlink Interference topic.

TRX Count for Uplink Weak Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Uplink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Downlink Weak Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Downlink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Weak TRX Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Weak TRX Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Over-Distance Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Over-Distance Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Link Balance (Uplink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Link Balance (Uplink Problem) topic.

TRX Count for Link Balance (Downlink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Link Balance (Downlink Problem) topic.

TRX Count for Other Problems

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of other topics.

Area (3) displays the information about all the TRXs in each GBSC on the entire network. For details, see Table 8-7. 8-42


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Table 8-7 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (2) Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Total Number of Measurement Reports for Full Rate

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the full-rate channel.

Total Number of Measurement Reports for Half Rate

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the halfrate channel.

Average Uplink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality (full rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality (full rate) of the MS.

Average Uplink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality (half rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality (half rate) of the MS.

Average Uplink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MS.

Average Uplink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MS.

Average TA Distribution

Indicates the weighted average TA that the MS uses to advance its timings of transmissions to the BTS.

Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS - Average received level of the BTS - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters for Querying TRXs in a GBSC If you select a counter node, the TRX frequencies in the GBSC are sorted by the counter in area (2). If you select a topic node, the problematic TRX frequencies meeting the requirements of the topic are displayed in area (2). For details, see Table 8-8.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-43


8 GSM MR Analysis

Table 8-8 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (1)

8-44

Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Cell ID

Indicates the number of the cell that the TRX belongs to.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell that the TRX belongs to.

TRX ID

Indicates the number of the TRX controlled by the BSC.

TRX Name

Indicates the name of the TRX controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the fullrate channel.


Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the halfrate channel.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.




Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to the TopN TRX or problematic TRX controlled by the BSC - Average received level of the BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX or problematic TRX controlled by the BSC - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Area (3) displays the information about all TRXs in the cell to which the TopN TRXs or problematic TRXs selected in Area (2) belong. For details, see Table 8-9. Table 8-9 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (2)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Cell ID

Indicates the number of the cell that the TRX belongs to.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell that the TRX belongs to.

TRX ID

Indicates the number of the TRX controlled by the BSC.

TRX Name

Indicates the name of the TRX controlled by the BSC.




Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the half-rate channel.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all TRXs.


8-45


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description


Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all TRXs.



Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to each TRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding to each TRX - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters related to the basic information Area (5) displays the information about the queried performance analysis task. For details, see Table 8-10. Table 8-10 Parameters related to the task information Parameter

Description

Task Name

Indicates the name of the queried performance analysis task.

Start Time

Indicates the time that the Nastar starts generating a task report.

End Time

Indicates the time that the Nastar stops generating a task report.

Task Creator

Indicates the creator's name of the queried performance analysis task.

Area (6) displays the information about the cell corresponding to the selected TRX. For details, see Table 8-11. Table 8-11 Parameters related to the cell information

8-46

Parameter

Description

Cell Object ID

Indicates internal ID of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

Cell Name

Indicates name of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

LAC

Indicates location area code of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

CI

Indicates the ID of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

BCCH

Indicates the frequency transmitted on the BCCH.

BCC

Indicates the base station color code. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

NCC


Cell Layer

Indicates the layer where the cell is located.

Cell Prior

Indicates the cell priority.

Half Rate Supported

Indicates whether the half rate is supported.

Frequency Hopping Type

Indicates the type of the frequency hopping, such as the RF frequency hopping and baseband frequency hopping.

GPS Supported

Indicates whether the GPRS service is supported.

EDGE Supported

Indicates whether the Edge service is supported.

Concentric Circle Supported

Indicates whether the intelligent underlay-overlay cell function is supported.

Base Station Type

Indicates the BTS type.

Area (7) displays the information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation advice. For details, see Table 8-12. Table 8-12 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Topic

Description

Suggestion











8-47


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description

Suggestion




Weak TRX coverage

l


l


l

Remote coverage

Link balance (uplink)

8-48

l



l


l

Remote TRX coverage

l

l



l


l


l


l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description

Link balance (downlink )

l


l


Others

Suggestion

l


l


l


l



8.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM Cell Group Reports This describes the parameters for querying the GSM cell group reports. You can refer to the description when querying the GSM cell group reports. NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying the TRXs on the Entire Network The number of TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs in each cell group is displayed in Area (2). For details, see Table 8-13. Table 8-13 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (1)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Cell Group ID

Indicates the ID of a cell group.

Cell Group Name

Indicates the name of a cell group, for example, CELL_1.

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average quality values of the received signals (full rate) of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.


8-49


8 GSM MR Analysis

8-50

Parameter

Description

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average quality values of the received signals (full rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average quality values of the received signals (half rate) of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average quality values of the received signals (half rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (full rate) of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (full rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Uplink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (half rate) of the BTSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average Downlink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average received levels (half rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average TA Distribution

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values of Average TA Distribution exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Link Balance

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values of Link Balance exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Uplink Interference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Uplink Interference topic.

TRX Count for Downlink Interference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Downlink Interference topic.

TRX Count for Uplink Weak Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Uplink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Downlink Weak Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Downlink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Weak TRX Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Weak TRX Coverage topic.

TRX Count for OverDistance Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Over-Distance Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Link Balance (Uplink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Link Balance (Uplink Problem) topic.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

TRX Count for Link Balance (Downlink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Link Balance (Downlink Problem) topic.

TRX Count for Other Problems

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the Other Problem topic.

The calculation result of the TRXs in each cell group on the entire network is displayed in Area (3). For details, see Table 8-14. Table 8-14 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (2)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Cell Group ID


Cell Group Name







Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTS.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MS.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTS.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MS.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MS.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTS.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MS.


Indicates the weighted average TA that is used by the MS to advance its timings of transmissions to the BTS.


8-51


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS - Average received level of the BTS - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters Related to Querying TRXs in a Cell Group If you select a counter node, the TRX frequencies in the selected cell group are sorted by the counter in area (2). If you select a topic node, the problematic TRX frequencies meeting the requirements of the topic are displayed in Area (2). For details, see Table 8-15. Table 8-15 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (1)

8-52

Parameter

Description

Cell Group ID


Cell Group Name


Cell ID

Indicates the ID of the cell where a TRX is located.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell where a TRX is located.

TRX ID

Indicates the number of a TRX in a cell group.

TRX Name

Indicates the name of a TRX in a cell group.






Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description


Indicates the average received level value (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.


Indicates the average received level value (full rate) of the MS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.


Indicates the average received level value (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.


Indicates the average received level value (half rate) of the MS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group.



Link Balance

Indicates the dB value, corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cell group, calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to the TopN TRX or problematic TRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX or problematic TRX Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

All the TRXs in the cell where the selected TopN TRX or problematic TRX resides are displayed in Area (3). For details, see Table 8-16. Table 8-16 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (2)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Cell ID


Cell Name


TRX ID

Indicates the number of a TRX in a cell group.

TRX Name

Indicates the name of a TRX in a cell group.




8-53


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description




Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MS corresponding to each TRX.



Link Balance


Parameters Related to the Basic Information The information about a selected performance analysis task is displayed in Area (5). For details, see Table 8-17. Table 8-17 Parameters related to the task information

8-54

Parameter

Description

Task Name

Indicates the name of a selected performance analysis task.

Begin Time

Indicates the time when the Nastar starts to generate a task report.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

End Time

Indicates the time when the Nastar stops to generate a task report.

Task Creator


The information about the cell corresponding to the selected TRX is displayed in Area (6). For details, see Table 8-18. Table 8-18 Parameters related to the cell information Parameter

Description

Cell Object ID

Indicates the internal ID of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

LAC

Indicates the location area code of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

CI


BCCH


BCC

Indicates the color code of a base station.

NCC


Cell Layer


Cell Prior


Half Rate Supported

Indicates whether half rate is supported.


Indicates the type of the frequency hopping, such as the RF hopping and baseband frequency hopping.

GPS Supported


EDGE Supported

Indicates whether the EDGE service is supported.



Base Station Type


The information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation suggestions are displayed in Area (7). For details, see Table 8-19.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-55


8 GSM MR Analysis

Table 8-19 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions Topic

Description

Suggestion













Weak TRX coverage

l


l


l

Remote coverage

8-56

l



l


l

Remote TRX coverage

l

l



l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description


l


l



Others

l


l


l


l


Suggestion l


l


l


l



8.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSM TopN TRX Reports This describes the parameters for querying the GSM TopN TRX reports. You can refer to the description when querying the GSM TopN carrier reports. NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying TopN TRXs In Area (2), the system displays the information about the 10 TRXs of which the selected counter indicates the poorest performance. For details, see Table 8-20. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8-57


8 GSM MR Analysis

Table 8-20 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (1)

8-58

Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Cell ID

Indicates the ID of the cell where a TopN TRX is located.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell where a TopN TRX is located.

TRX ID

Indicates the number of a TopN TRX.

TRX Name

Indicates the name of a TopN TRX.






Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MS corresponding to the TopN TRX.



Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to the TopN TRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

If you select a record of a TopN TRX in Area (2), the system displays the frequencies of all the TRXs in the cell where the selected TopN TRX resides in Area (3). For details, see Table 8-21. Table 8-21 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (2)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Cell ID


Cell Name


TRX ID

Indicates the number of a TRX.

TRX Name

Indicates the name of a TRX.










Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX




Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX










8-59


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Link Balance


Parameters Related to the Basic Information In Area (5), the system displays the information about a selected performance analysis task. For details, see Table 8-22. Table 8-22 Parameters related to the task information Parameter

Description

TaskName


BEGINTIME


ENDTIME


Task Creator


In Area (6), the system displays the information about the cell corresponding to the selected TRX. For details, see Table 8-23. Table 8-23 Parameters related to the cell information

8-60

Parameter

Description

Cell Object ID


Cell Name


LAC


CI


BCCH


BCC


NCC

Indicates the network color code. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Cell Layer


Cell Prior


Half Rate Supported

Indicates whether the half rate is supported.



GPS Supported


EDGE Supported




Base Station Type


In Area (7), the system displays the information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation suggestions. For details, see Table 8-24. Table 8-24 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Topic

Description

Suggestion











8-61


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description

Suggestion




Weak TRX coverage

l


l


l

Remote coverage


8-62

l



l


l

Remote TRX coverage

l

l



l


l


l


l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description


l


l


Others

Suggestion

l


l


l


l



8.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MR Topic Analysis Reports This describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM MR topic analysis. You can refer to the description when querying the GSM MR topic analysis reports. NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying Problematic TRXs Involved in Topic Analysis The information about all the problematic TRXs involved in topic analysis is displayed in Area (2). For details, see Table 8-25. Table 8-25 Parameters related to the problematic TRXs involved in topic analysis (1)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Cell ID

Indicates the ID of the cell where a problematic TRX is located.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell where a problematic TRX is located.

TRX ID

Indicates the number of a problematic TRX.

TRX Name

Indicates the name of a problematic TRX. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-63


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description






Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MS corresponding to the problematic TRX.



Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to the problematic TRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding to the problematic TRX - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

If you select a record of a problematic TRX in Area (2), the frequencies of all the TRXs in the cell where the selected problematic TRX resides is displayed in Area (3). For details, see Table 8-26.

8-64


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Table 8-26 Parameters related to the TRXs involved in topic analysis (2)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID


BSC Name


Cell ID


Cell Name


TRX ID

Indicates the number of a TRX.

TRX Name











Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX.




Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS corresponding to each TRX.










8-65


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to each TRX Average received level of the BTS corresponding to each TRX Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters Related to the Basic Information The information about a selected performance analysis task is displayed in Area (5). For details, see Table 8-27. Table 8-27 Parameters related to the task information Parameter

Description

TaskName

Indicates the name of a performance analysis task.

BEGINTIME


ENDTIME


Task Creator


The information about the cell corresponding to the selected TRX is displayed in Area (6). For details, see Table 8-28. Table 8-28 Parameters related to the cell information

8-66

Parameter

Description

Cell Object ID


Cell Name


LAC


CI


BCCH


BCC


NCC

Indicates the network color code. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Cell Layer


Cell Prior


Half Rate Supported




GPS Supported


EDGE Supported




Base Station Type


The information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation suggestion are displayed in Area (7). For details, see Table 8-29. Table 8-29 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Topic

Description

Suggestion











8-67


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description

Suggestion




Weak TRX coverage

l


l


l

Remote coverage


8-68

l



l


l

Remote TRX coverage

l

l



l


l


l


l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description


l


l


Others

l


l


Suggestion l


l



8.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR Analysis Results of GSM Cells This describes the parameters for querying the MR analysis results of one or more GSM cells. You can refer to the description when querying the MR analysis results of GSM cells. NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying TopN TRXs and Problematic TRXs in the MR Analysis Results The calculation result of the TRXs in each cell is displayed in Area (8). For details, see Table 8-30. Table 8-30 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID

Indicates the ID of the BSC that a TRX belongs to.

BSC Name


Cell ID


Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell where a TRX is located. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-69


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description






Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of the received signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of the received signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of the received signals (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of the received signals (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average levels (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.



Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs - Average received level of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

If you select a record of a summarized TRX in Area (8), the information about all the TRXs in the selected cell is displayed in Area (9). For details, see Table 8-31.

8-70


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Table 8-31 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells (2)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC ID

Indicates the ID of the BSC that a TRX belongs to.

BSC Name

Indicates the name of the BSCs that a TRX of the selected cell belongs to, for example, BSC_1.

Cell ID


Cell Name


TRX ID

Indicates the number of a TRX in the selected cell.

TRX Name







Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of the received signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of the received signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received signal quality (half rate) values of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received signal quality (half rate) values of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average levels (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average levels (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.




8-71


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Link Balance

Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs - Average received level of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters Related to the Basic Information The information about a selected performance analysis task is displayed in Area (11). For details, see Table 8-32. Table 8-32 Parameters related to the task information Parameter

Description

TaskName


BEGINTIME


ENDTIME


Task Creator


The information about the cell corresponding to the selected TRX is displayed in Area (12). For details, see Table 8-33. Table 8-33 Parameters related to the cell information

8-72

Parameter

Description

Cell Object ID


Cell Name

Indicates name of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

LAC


CI


BCCH


BCC


NCC


Cell Layer

Indicates the layer where the cell is located. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Cell Prior


Half Rate Supported




GPS Supported


EDGE Supported




Base Station Type


The information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation suggestions are displayed in Area (13). For details, see Table 8-34. Table 8-34 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Topic

Description

Suggestion











8-73


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description

Suggestion




Weak TRX coverage

l


l


l

Remote coverage


8-74

l



l


l

Remote TRX coverage

l

l



l


l


l


l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


8 GSM MR Analysis

Topic

Description


l


l


Others

Suggestion

l


l


l


l



8.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR Analysis Results This describes the parameters related to comparing GSM MR analysis results. You can refer to these parameters when comparing GSM MR analysis results.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Object Name

Names of the objects to which two MR results to be compared belong

First Total Number of Measurement Reports (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the full-rate channel in the previous period.

Second Total Number of Measurement Reports (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the full-rate channel in the next period.

Difference of Total Measurement Reports (Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the number of MRs transferred over the full-rate channel in the previous and next periods.

First Total Number of Measurement Reports (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the half-rate channel in the previous period.


8-75


8 GSM MR Analysis

8-76

Parameter

Description

Second Total Number of Measurement Reports (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the half-rate channel in the next period.

Difference of Total Measurement Reports (Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the number of MRs transferred over the half-rate channel in the previous and next periods.

First Average Uplink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Uplink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink Receive Quality Difference (Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality (full rate) values of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average Downlink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Downlink Receive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Downlink Receive Quality Difference (Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality (full rate) values of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average Uplink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Uplink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink Receive Quality Difference (Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality (half rate) values of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average Downlink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Downlink Receive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

8 GSM MR Analysis

Parameter

Description

Average Downlink Receive Quality Difference (Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality (half rate) values of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average Uplink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Uplink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink Receive Level Difference (Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average Downlink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Downlink Receive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Downlink Receive Level Difference (Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average Uplink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Uplink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink Receive Level Difference (Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average Downlink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average Downlink Receive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Downlink Receive Level Difference (Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous and next periods.

First Average TA Distribution

Indicates the weighted average TA that the MS uses to advance its timings of transmissions to the BTS in the previous period.


8-77


8 GSM MR Analysis

8-78

Parameter

Description

Second Average TA Distribution

Indicates the weighted average TA that the MS uses to advance its timings of transmissions to the BTS in the next period.

Average TA Distribution Difference

Indicates the difference of the weighted average TAs that the MS uses to advance its timings of transmissions to the BTS in the previous and next periods.

First Link Balance

Indicates the dB value in the previous period, which is calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to each TRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding to each TRX - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Second Link Balance

Indicates the dB value in the next period, which is calculated through this expression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to each TRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding to each TRX - Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Link Balance Difference

Indicates the difference between the value of First Link Balance and the value of Second Link Balance.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis

9

GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis

About This Chapter This describes the GSM neighboring cell analysis. The GSM neighboring cell analysis supports the management of neighboring cell analysis tasks, check of the GSM neighboring cell analysis reports, and export of the GSM neighboring cell analysis reports. The Nastar performance analysis system supports the analysis of defined and undefined GSM neighboring cells. By using this function, you can identify and handle the problem of redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration of a cell. Direct display of the information can help you to solve network quality problems that are caused by the redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration. 9.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the basic knowledge of the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as the neighboring cell analysis functions, function application scenarios, and algorithms for neighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSM neighboring cell analysis. 9.2 Procedure for Using GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the process of the GSM neighboring cell analysis. 9.3 Managing GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 9.4 Querying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Report This describes how to query a GSM neighboring cell analysis report. You can check for the redundant or missing neighboring cells under certain BSCs, and then delete the redundant neighboring cells or add missing neighboring cells. 9.5 Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Reports This section describes how to query co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports. You can query all the neighboring cells of the specified cells. In addition, you can query whether coBCCH and co-BSIC cells of the current test cell exist among all the cells within a specified distance. Based on the query result, you can determine whether to change the BCCH or BSIC of the current test cell. 9.6 Querying Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This section describes how to query the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells. You can query whether any co-BCCH cells of the current test cell exists among all the Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-1



neighboring cells of the specified test cell. Based on the query result, you can determine whether to change the BCCH ARFCN of the current test cell. 9.7 Exporting Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This describes how to export the reports of GSM neighboring cell analysis. You can export the reports of neighboring cell analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to the CME of Huawei to improve the neighboring relations on the network. 9.8 Reference for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the GSM neighboring cell analysis.

9-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



9.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the basic knowledge of the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as the neighboring cell analysis functions, function application scenarios, and algorithms for neighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSM neighboring cell analysis. 9.1.1 GSM Neighbor Cell Analysis Function This describes the GSM neighboring cell analysis function. This function is used to analyze defined and undefined GSM neighboring cells. By performing this task, you can check and handle the problem of redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration of a cell. Direct display of the relevant analysis information can help you to solve network quality problems that are caused by the redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration. 9.1.2 Algorithms for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as the algorithms used to check missing neighboring cells and redundant neighboring cells.

9.1.1 GSM Neighbor Cell Analysis Function This describes the GSM neighboring cell analysis function. This function is used to analyze defined and undefined GSM neighboring cells. By performing this task, you can check and handle the problem of redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration of a cell. Direct display of the relevant analysis information can help you to solve network quality problems that are caused by the redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration.

Neighboring Cell Analysis After you set the conditions for checking the redundant or missing neighboring cell configurations, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the neighboring cells of a selected cell. The analysis results are displayed on a bar chart. In the results, the defined neighboring cells, undefined neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and missing neighboring cells are displayed in different colors. In addition, the Nastar performance analysis system enables you to export the results of the neighboring cell analysis as files. In the window of the neighboring cell analysis results, you can add missing neighboring cells, delete the redundant neighboring cells, and create the analysis result file. Then, the result file provides the optimization suggestions. You can export the results of the neighboring cell analysis as a CSV or XLS file. The CSV or XLS file can help you to optimize the neighboring cell relations on the network. Before the neighboring cell analysis, check whether a defined neighboring cell of the test cell is of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells. If a defined neighboring cell or an undefined neighboring cell close to the measurement cell is of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells, the network stability and accuracy of frequency analysis cannot be guaranteed.

Requirements for the Network The network must be stable during the period of collecting data for neighboring cell analysis. Otherwise, the accuracy of the analysis cannot be guaranteed. Table 9-1 describes the network changes and their impacts. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-3



Table 9-1 Network changes and their impacts Network Change

Impact

Adding or deleting BTSs

Affects the cell handover and network coverage. In this case, the analysis result cannot correctly reflect the current network status.

Antenna data changes such as the changes of the azimuth, tilt angle, and height

Results in the changes of the cell coverage and network interference.

Changes of the transmit power and the related parameters such as the discontinuous transmission and power control


Frequency planning change. For example, a new frequency planning is added to the network.

The change of the configuration data affects the identification of defined cells and undefined cells. In this case, the analysis result cannot correctly reflect the current network status. You are advised to keep the network stable during the data collection period.

Change of handover relations and parameters

Affects the statistical results during the period of collecting and optimizing the neighboring relation data.

Change of BSC topology or other NE topology

The BSC is responsible for collecting statistical results. Thus, the measurement task cannot be normally performed if the network topology is changed. You are advised to keep the network topology unchanged during the data collection period.

9.1.2 Algorithms for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as the algorithms used to check missing neighboring cells and redundant neighboring cells. The algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis are used to check missing neighboring cells and redundant neighboring cells. For details, see Figure 9-1.

9-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 9-1 Algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis

l

l

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

The algorithms for checking the missing GSM neighboring cells are as follows: 1.

Calculate the integrated priority of all the neighboring cells of the measurement cell. The neighboring cells are sorted in descending order of integrated priority. The sequence numbers of neighboring cells are inversely proportional to integrated priorities.

2.

If the sequence number of a neighboring cell is smaller than or equal to the value of No. 1, as shown in Area (1) in Figure 9-1, you can infer that the sequence number of this cell is relatively small among the neighboring cells of the measurement cell and that this cell is the direct neighboring cell of the measurement cell. You are advised to configure this cell as a neighboring cell.

3.

If the integrated priority of a neighboring cell is higher than TH or is TH, and the sequence number of this cell is between the value of No. 1 and the value of No. 2, as shown in Area (2) in Figure 9-1, you can infer that the sequence number of this cell is relatively small in a certain measurement period and that the level of the cell is higher than the relative level and absolute level. In this case, configure this cell as a neighboring cell.

4.

If an undefined cell meets either of the second and third requirements, configure the cell as a missing neighboring cell. Otherwise, do not configure the cell.

The algorithms for checking the redundant GSM neighboring cells are as follows: 1.

Calculate the integrated priority of the neighboring cells of the measurement cell. The neighboring cells are sorted in descending order of integrated priority. The sequence numbers of neighboring cells are inversely proportional to integrated priorities.

2.

If the sequence number of a neighboring cell is greater than the value of No. 2, as shown in Area (3) in Figure 9-1, you can infer that the sequence number of this cell is relatively large in a certain measurement period and that the level of the cell is rarely higher than the relative level and absolute level. In this case, regard this cell as a redundant neighboring cell and delete it.

3.

If an undefined cell meets the second requirement, regard this cell as a redundant neighboring cell and delete it. Otherwise, do not configure the cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5



9.2 Procedure for Using GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the process of the GSM neighboring cell analysis. Figure 9-2 shows the general process of GSM neighboring cell analysis. Figure 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create a neighboring analysis task

Query the neighboring cell analysis report

Export the neighboring cell analysis report End

Table 9-2 describes the process of GSM neighboring cell analysis. Table 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis

9-6

Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

2


You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

3

Create a neighboring analysis task

You can create a neighboring cell analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required performance data and neighboring measurement data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Query the neighboring cell analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are successfully performed, add missing neighboring cells, and delete redundant neighboring cells.

5

Export the neighboring cell analysis report

You can export a frequency analysis report from the Nastar.

9.3 Managing GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 9.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 9.3.2 Creating a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. By performing neighboring cell analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solve the network faults. 9.3.3 Modifying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task to meet the new requirement. 9.3.4 Checking a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-7



9.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

Prerequisite l


l


l



Then ...


Perform Step 4.


Perform Step 5.




b.


c.


2.


3.


4.

l


l


l


From the object navigation tree, select the cell related to the task. The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects that meet the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive.

9-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area. 5.

Set the frequency. NOTE


6.



b.


c.


7.





b.


c.


2.


3.



b.


c.


4.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



b.

When Frequency Typeis set to User Defined in The Frequency Segment, you need to select a frequency from the frequency list. The selected frequencies are colored yellow. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9



5.


----End



2.




2.



9.3.2 Creating a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. By performing neighboring cell analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solve the network faults.

Prerequisite l


l


l

Tasks of this type can be performed only once.

l


Context

Procedure in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Step 1 Click Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, and Note. The value of Execution Type can be only Once Task. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Time Setting for Once Task Data. 9-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page. l


l



–


Step 7 Set Neighboring Optimization Parameter. on the Parameter Setting tab page. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete a neighboring cell analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE


1.

Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task This describes how to suspend a neighboring cell analysis task. To delay the task execution, you can suspend a neighboring cell analysis task that is in the Idle state. After this operation, the neighboring cell analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.


2.

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click Only the tasks whose Status is Idle can be suspended. Otherwise, the unavailable.

l

. button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended neighboring cell analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-11


9 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis NOTE

Only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.


9.3.3 Modifying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task to meet the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

A GSM neighboring cell analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the parameters, see 9.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the navigation tree of objects, and the Neighboring Optimization Parameter parameter.

Step 4 Click Complete. ----End

9.3.4 Checking a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. 9-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Prerequisite l


l

A GSM neighboring cell analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of a neighboring cell analysis task

Select a task from the task list in the upperright pane. Double-click the task or click

.

You can check the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 9.3.3 Modifying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task. Checking the execution progress of the active task

Select a task from the task list in the upperright pane. Then, you can view the execution progress of the task in the Progress column.

Checking the task execution results

Select a task from the task list in the upperright pane. Then, you can view the results of the previous execution of the selected task in the Last Running Result column. You can view all the analysis results of a selected task in the lower-right pane. NOTE In the result list, if the result information about tasks that fail to be executed at a certain period already exists in the database, you can right-click the results, and then choose Analyze Result Again from the shortcut menu to analyze the results of this period again. Only the results of tasks that fail to be executed are analyzed again.

----End

Postrequisite l

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

In the drop-down list boxes above the task list, you can set the filter conditions to filter the tasks by the task status, task execution type, and task type. You can also type the keyword of a task name in the text box. Then, the system searches for the tasks by the keyword. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13



By clicking , you can restore the preset filtering conditions to the initial state, that is, all the task information is displayed. l


9.4 Querying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Report This describes how to query a GSM neighboring cell analysis report. You can check for the redundant or missing neighboring cells under certain BSCs, and then delete the redundant neighboring cells or add missing neighboring cells.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report from the shortcut menu. The Neighboring Cell Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a cell from the measurement cell list in Area (1) in the Neighboring Cell Analysis window. l

For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis.

l

The defined neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed in the defined neighboring cell list in Area (2). The undefined neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed in the undefined neighboring cell list in Area (3). The system determines the redundant neighboring cells, missing neighboring cells, cochannel neighboring cells, and neighboring cells requiring no operations according to the neighboring cell analysis algorithms. It also provides the relevant operations. For details about the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, see 9.1.2 Algorithms for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis. You can double-click the defined neighboring cell list area or the undefined neighboring cell list to zoom in the area, and then double-click the area again to restore the area to the original size.

9-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis l

In the lower pane, that is, Area (4), the undefined neighboring cells, defined neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and missing neighboring cells are displayed in legends in different colors. You can select a parameter from the drop-down list box above Area (4). Then, the parameter values corresponding to each neighboring cell are displayed on a line chart. The chart in Area (4) displays only the top 32 neighboring cells with the highest integrated priorities.

----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


9.5 Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Reports This section describes how to query co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports. You can query all the neighboring cells of the specified cells. In addition, you can query whether coBCCH and co-BSIC cells of the current test cell exist among all the cells within a specified distance. Based on the query result, you can determine whether to change the BCCH or BSIC of the current test cell.

Prerequisite You have logged in to the Nastar client. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-15



Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Right-click a result and choose Same BCCH & BSIC Checking from the shortcut menu. The Same BCCH & BSIC Checking Result window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 In the Same BCCH & BSIC Checking Result window, view the co-BCCH and co-BSIC analysis result of all the cells involved in the task. ----End

Postrequisite l


l


9.6 Querying Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This section describes how to query the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells. You can query whether any co-BCCH cells of the current test cell exists among all the neighboring cells of the specified test cell. Based on the query result, you can determine whether to change the BCCH ARFCN of the current test cell.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. 9-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Right-click a result and choose Same BCCH With Neighboring Cells Analysis from the shortcut menu. The Same BCCH With Neighboring Cells Analysis Result window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 In the Same BCCH With Neighboring Cells Analysis Result window, view the co-BCCH neighboring cell analysis result of all the cells involved in the task. ----End

Postrequisite l


l


9.7 Exporting Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This describes how to export the reports of GSM neighboring cell analysis. You can export the reports of neighboring cell analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to the CME of Huawei to improve the neighboring relations on the network.

Prerequisite l


l

You have checked the reports of GSM neighboring cell analysis.

l

Perform the following operations as required:

Procedure

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-17



If you need to ...

Then ...

Export the overview information about 1. Click in the Neighboring Cell neighboring cells Analysis window. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the name, type and save path of the file. Then, click Save. After being saved, a CSV or XLS file is automatically open so that you can view the file conveniently. The CSV or XLS file contains the following information: the task name, creator, start time and end time of the results, and measurement cell. Export the results of optimizing the neighboring relations of a measurement cell

1. Click in the Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the name, type and save path of the file. Then, click Save. After being saved, a CSV or XLS file is automatically open so that you can view the file conveniently. The CSV or XLS file contains the following information: the task name, creator, start time and end time of the results, BSC where the measurement cell is located, ID of the measurement cell, defined neighboring cells, and undefined neighboring cells.

Export the information about the possible neighboring cells of a measurement cell

1. Click in the Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the name, type and save path of the file. Then, click Save. After being saved, a CSV or XLS file is automatically open so that you can view the file conveniently. The CSV or XLS file contains the following information: the task name, creator, start time and end time of the results, and possible neighboring cells of the measurement cell.

9-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If you need to ...

Then ...

Export all neighboring cell optimization results

1. Click in the Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save As dialog box is displayed. If the analysis result data amount of all the neighboring cells is large, it takes some time for the dialog box to be displayed. 2. Set the save path of the file. Then, click Save. You are allowed to save only the analysis results of all neighboring cells as XLS files by BSC. The analysis result of the neighboring cells of each cell corresponds to one XLS file. The naming convention is task name_NE name_NCS.xls.

NOTE

l

Exporting neighboring cell overview results refers to exporting the information about all the measurement cells involved in the selected analysis task.

l

Exporting the optimization results of the neighboring cells of a measurement cell refers to exporting the information about the defined and undefined neighboring cells of a measurement cell.

l

Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the information about the possible neighboring cells of of each measurement cell.

l

Exporting the analysis results of all neighboring cells refers to exporting the information about all defined and undefined neighboring cells of each measurement cell.

----End

9.8 Reference for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the GSM neighboring cell analysis. 9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface. 9.8.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks This section describes the parameters for creating GSM E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating a GSM E2E task. 9.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-19



9.8.4 Parameters for Querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells This describes the parameters for querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells. You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of GSM neighboring cells. 9.8.5 Parameters for Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Report This section describes the parameters for querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports. 9.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This section describes the parameters for querying the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells. You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of coBCCH GSM neighboring cells.

9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface. The neighboring cell analysis results can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shown in Figure 9-3. Figure 9-3 Interface for the neighboring cell analysis

9-20

No. Name

Description

(1)

Displays the information about the current measurement cell.

List of current measurement cell information


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



No. Name

Description

(2)

List of defined neighboring cells

Displays all the defined neighboring cells of the cell selected in Area (1)

(3)

List of undefined neighboring cells

Displays all the undefined neighboring cells of the cell selected in Area (1)

(4)

Chart area

Displays the information about all the neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell in histogram mode or in line chart NOTE l If the names of two or more cells are the same,

the cell names on the X-Axis are displayed as CellName(BCCH,BSIC). l If the cell names cannot be found, the cell names

on the X-Axis are displayed as (BCCH,BSIC).

(5)

Button area

Four buttons are provided to export all information about the neighboring cell, the neighboring cell optimization results of the measurement cell, the analysis results of possible neighboring cells, and all neighboring cell optimization results.

9.8.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks This section describes the parameters for creating GSM E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating a GSM E2E task.

Description of the parameters of GSM neighboring cell measurement tasks Parameter Basic information




OSS Name


E2E Task List




Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-21



Parameter

Description Measurement period




Cell Object





Step.




RSSThres


ASSThres




9-22


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



NOTE

l


l


l



Measure information



OSS Name


E2E Task List


Time (Minute)


BSC Type


Band

Indicates the frequency band used by a cell. The M2000 supports the scanning of the following frequency bands:

Cell Object

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l

DCS_1800

l

EGSM_900

l

GSM850

l

P_GSM900

l

PSC1900

l

R_GSM900



9-23



Parameter

Description Frequency Type



l


l


9.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM neighboring cell analysis task.



Indicates the name of a neighboring cell analysis task. Value range: l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

You need to select GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type

Such a task can be executed only once in a time segment.

Note


9-24

l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter Time Information



Task Start At


Object Information


BSC


Cell Group


Display Number of Undefined Neighboring Cells

Indicates that only the TopN frequencies of undefined neighboring cells are displayed.

Neighboring Cell Rank No.1

Indicates the lower threshold of the neighboring cell sequence numbers. Undefined neighboring cells whose sequence number is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter are missing neighboring cells.

N can be any integer from 20 to 150. The default value is 30.

This parameter can be set to any integer from 1 to 32. The default value is 6. This parameter must be set to a value smaller than the value of Neighboring Cell Rank No.2. Neighboring Cell Rank No.2

Indicates the upper threshold of the neighboring cell sequence numbers. Defined cells whose sequence number is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter are redundant neighboring cells. This parameter can be set to any integer from 1 to 32. The default value is 22. This parameter must be set to a value greater than the value of Neighboring Cell Rank No.1.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


9-25



Parameter

Description Neighboring Cell Integrated Priority TH

Indicates the threshold of the integrated priority of neighboring cells. Undefined neighboring cells whose sequence number is smaller than the value of Neighboring Cell Rank No.1 or whose integrated priority is greater than this threshold and sequence number is between Neighboring Cell Rank No.1 and Neighboring Cell Rank No.2 are missing neighboring cells. Defined neighboring cells whose sequence number is greater than the value of Neighboring Cell Rank No.2 are redundant neighboring cells. This parameter can be set to a floating number between 0 and 100. It can be a floating number with four digits after the decimal point. The default value is 2.

Omni Gain

Indicates the omnidirectional gain of an antenna. This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to 15. The default value is 11. Unit: dbi

Directive Gain

Indicates the directional gain of an antenna. This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to 25. The default value is 17. Unit: dbi

9.8.4 Parameters for Querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells This describes the parameters for querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells. You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of GSM neighboring cells. NOTE

For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis.

Parameters Related to the Information About a Test Cell

9-26

Parameter

Description

BSC Where Test Cell Is Located

Indicates the name of the BSC that a measurement cell belongs to, for example, BSC_1.

Test Cell Name

Indicates the name of a measurement cell, for example, Cell_1.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Total Number of Measurement Reports

Indicates the total number of MRs received by a measurement cell.

Number of Redundant Neighboring Cells

Indicates the number of redundant neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell.

Percentage of Measurement Report on Redundant Neighboring Cells (%)

Indicates the sum of the integrated priority of the redundant neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell in Area (2).

Number of Not Configured Neighboring Cells

Indicates the number of missing neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell.

Percentage of Measurement Report on Not Configured Neighboring Cells (%)

Indicates the sum of the integrated priority of the missing neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell in Area (2).

LAC

Indicates the location area code of the selected measurement cell.

CI

Indicates the ID of the selected measurement cell.

BCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of the selected measurement cell.

BSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of the selected measurement cell.

Test Cell ID

Indicates the ID of the selected measurement cell.

Parameters Related to the Defined Neighboring Cell Information

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Defined Neighboring Cell Name

Indicates the name of a defined neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.

CGI

Indicates the global ID of a defined neighboring cell.

Neighboring Cell BCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of a defined neighboring cell.

Neighboring Cell BSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of a defined neighboring cell.


9-27



Parameter

Description

Whether Exterior Neighboring Cell

Indicates whether the defined neighboring cell and the test cell are controlled by different BSCs.

Suggested Operation

Indicates the operation suggestions that the Nastar provides. The options are Redundant Neighboring Cell, Co-Channel Neighboring Cell, or No Operation.

User Modify

Indicates whether the user operations are recommended. If this option is selected, you can infer that you are advised to perform modification according to Suggested Operation. Otherwise, no user operation is recommended.

9-28

Integrated Priority TH (%)

Indicates the integrated priority of the neighboring cell, which is calculated according to the following expression: Number of MRs related to the neighboring cell level that is higher than the relative level and absolute level/Total number of MRs of the test cell x 100%

Priority

Indicates the sequence number of the defined neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell. The sequence number is obtained after all the neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell are sorted according to the integrated priority.

Distance (km)

Indicates the distance from the selected measurement cell to a defined neighboring cell.

In BA Time(min)

Indicates the duration that a defined neighboring cell is measured.

Number of Neighboring Measurement Reports

Indicates the number of MRs of a defined neighboring cell.

Test Cell Signal Strength (dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of the selected test cell.

Neighboring Cell Signal Strength (dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of the defined neighboring cell.

Mean S-N Difference

Indicates the average difference between the signal strength of the selected measurement cell and the signal strength of the defined neighboring cell.

>Relative TH MRs

Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that the difference between the signal strength of the defined neighboring cell and the signal strength of the measurement cell is greater than the threshold of the relative level.

>Absolute TH MRs

Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that the signal strength of the defined neighboring cell is greater than the threshold of the absolute level.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameters Related to the Undefined Neighboring Cell Information Parameter

Description

Undefined Neighboring Cell Name

Indicates the name of an undefined neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.

CGI

Indicates the global ID of an undefined neighboring cell.

Neighboring Cell BCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an undefined neighboring cell.

Neighboring Cell BSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of an undefined neighboring cell.

Whether Exterior Neighboring Cell

Indicates whether an undefined neighboring cell and a test cell are controlled by different BSCs.

Suggested Operation

Indicates the operation suggestions that the Nastar provides. The options are Not Configured Neighboring Cell, Co-Channel Neighboring Cell, or No Operation.

User Modify

Indicates whether the user operations are recommended. If this option is selected, you can infer that you are advised to perform modification according to Suggested Operation. Otherwise, no user operation is recommended.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Integrated Priority TH (%)

Indicates the integrated priority of the neighboring cell, which is calculated according to the following expression: Number of MRs related to the neighboring cell level that is higher than the relative level and absolute level/Total number of MRs of the test cell x 100%

Priority

Indicates the sequence number of an undefined neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell. The sequence number is obtained after all the neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell are sorted according to the integrated priority.

Distance (km)

Indicates the distance from the selected measurement cell to an undefined neighboring cell.

In BA Time(min)

Indicates the duration that an undefined neighboring cell is measured.

Number of Neighboring Measurement Reports

Indicates the number of MRs of an undefined neighboring cell.

Test Cell Signal Strength (dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of the selected test cell.

Neighboring Cell Signal Strength (dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of an undefined neighboring cell.


9-29



Parameter

Description

Mean S-N Difference

Indicates the average difference between the signal strength of the selected measurement cell and the signal strength of the undefined neighboring cell.

>Relative TH MRs

Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that the difference between the signal strength of the undefined neighboring cell and the signal strength of the measurement cell is greater than the relative level threshold.

>Absolute TH MRs

Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that the signal strength of the undefined neighboring cell is greater than the threshold of the absolute level.

9.8.5 Parameters for Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Report This section describes the parameters for querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports.


9-30

Parameter

Description

SBSC


SCELL


CGI

Indicates the global ID of a measurement cell.

BCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of a measurement cell.

BSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of a measurement cell.

NCELL

Indicates the name of a neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.

NCGI

Indicates the global ID of a neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.

ANGLE

Indicates the antenna azimuth of a measurement cell.

DISTANCE

Indicates the distance between the measurement cell and the current neighboring cell.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



9.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This section describes the parameters for querying the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells. You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of coBCCH GSM neighboring cells.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

SBSC


SCELL


CGI

Indicates the global ID of a measurement cell.

BCCH


BSIC


NCELL

Indicates the name of a neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.

NBSC

Indicates the name of the BSC that a neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell belongs to.

NCGI

Indicates the global ID of a neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.

NBCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of a neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.

NBSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of a neighboring cell of the selected measurement cell.


9-31


10 GSM Frequency Analysis

10

GSM Frequency Analysis

About This Chapter GSM frequency analysis involves the following operations on GSM frequencies: managing analysis tasks, querying analysis reports, exporting analysis reports, and querying optimization reports. The system allows for analysis of MR-based interference matrix frequency interference matrix, which helps you adjust the frequencies. You can also create frequency optimization solutions based on the frequency interference matrix and identify the feasibility of a solution by analyzing the frequency optimization results. 10.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Frequency Analysis This provides the basic knowledge of the GSM frequency analysis, which covers the following aspects: frequency analysis functions, function application scenarios, frequency analysis algorithms, frequency optimization algorithms, and ARFCN spacing rules. The basic knowledge helps you analyze and optimize the GSM frequencies more efficiently. 10.2 Procedure for Using GSM Frequency Analysis This describes the process of GSM frequency analysis. 10.3 Managing GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 10.4 Querying GSM Frequency Analysis Reports This describes how to query the GSM frequency analysis reports. You can query the relevant frequency analysis reports as required. Through the information about the interference matrix and frequency interference matrix in the reports, you can know the cells and frequencies with strong interference. The GSM frequency reports can be classified into reports of measurement cells, reports of GSM cell interference matrix, and reports of GSM cell frequency interference matrix. 10.5 Querying the GSM Frequency Optimization Report The Nastar performance analysis system allows you to query GSM frequency optimization reports. You can select the automatic frequency optimization or enable the Nastar to perform the frequency optimization by manually setting the related parameters. 10.6 Exporting GSM Interference Analysis Reports Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-1



This describes how to export the reports of GSM interference analysis. You can export the reports of frequency analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to the CME of Huawei to reduce the cell frequency interference on the network. 10.7 Exporting GSM Frequency Optimization Reports The Nastar performance analysis system allows you to export GSM frequency optimization reports. You can export the queried frequency optimization results to a CSV or an XLS file for future comparison and analysis. 10.8 Reference for the GSM Frequency Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the GSM frequency analysis functions.

10-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



10.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Frequency Analysis This provides the basic knowledge of the GSM frequency analysis, which covers the following aspects: frequency analysis functions, function application scenarios, frequency analysis algorithms, frequency optimization algorithms, and ARFCN spacing rules. The basic knowledge helps you analyze and optimize the GSM frequencies more efficiently. 10.1.1 GSM Frequency Analysis Function This describes the GSM frequency analysis function. By using this function, you can analyze the cell interference matrix and frequency interference matrix, check the interference between a cell and its neighboring cells, evaluate the results of the frequency planning, and analyze the strongly interfered cells and frequency. 10.1.2 Process of GSM Frequency Analysis This describes the process of GSM frequency analysis, which helps you perform frequency analysis more efficiently. 10.1.3 Process of GSM Frequency Optimization This describes the process of GSM frequency optimization, which helps you perform frequency optimization more efficiently. 10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs This describes the spacing rules of GSM ARFCNs, which help you optimize the frequencies more efficiently.

10.1.1 GSM Frequency Analysis Function This describes the GSM frequency analysis function. By using this function, you can analyze the cell interference matrix and frequency interference matrix, check the interference between a cell and its neighboring cells, evaluate the results of the frequency planning, and analyze the strongly interfered cells and frequency.

Frequency Analysis The Nastar performance analysis system provides the interference traffic of each neighboring cell of the measurement cell, and exports the interference matrix of each cell in a report. The output of the interference matrix is based on the real traffic of the network. The system can accurately calculate the ratio of the interference traffic to the cell traffic during the frequency adjustment. Before the frequency analysis, check whether a defined neighboring cell of the measurement cell is of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells. If a defined neighboring cell or an undefined neighboring cell close to the measurement cell is of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells, it affects the network stability and accuracy of the frequency analysis. In addition, the Nastar performance analysis system enables you to export the frequency analysis results as a CSV or XLS file.

Requirements for the Network The network must be stable during the period of collecting data for frequency analysis. Otherwise, the accuracy of the analysis cannot be guaranteed. Table 10-1 describes the network changes and their impacts. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-3




Impact





Changes of the transmit power and the related parameters such as the discontinuous transmission and power control


Frequency planning change. For example, a new frequency planning is added to the network

The change of the configuration data affects the identification of defined cells and undefined cells. In this case, the analysis result cannot correctly reflect the current network status. You are advised to keep the network stable during the data collection period.

Change of handover relations and parameters


Change of the BSC topology or other NE topologies

The BSC is responsible for collecting statistical results. Thus, the measurement task cannot be normally performed if the network topology is changed. You are advised to keep the network topology unchanged during the data collection period.

10.1.2 Process of GSM Frequency Analysis This describes the process of GSM frequency analysis, which helps you perform frequency analysis more efficiently. The mechanism of frequency analysis is as follows: The system identifies the interference between a measurement cell and its intra-frequency cells and cells on a neighboring frequency, estimates the result of frequency planning, analyzes the cells and ARFCNs with strong interference on the current network. For more information about the mechanism, see Figure 10-1.

10-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 10-1 Flow chart for frequency analysis Start Pre-process data for frequency optimization Check the validity and name of an undefined neighboring cell

Check the name of an undefined neighboring cell Calculate the interference matrices of co-frequency cells

Calculate the ICDM matrices of a test cell

Calculate the frequency interference matrices of a test cell Calculate the matrix of interference from a configured frequency to neighboring cells

End

10.1.3 Process of GSM Frequency Optimization This describes the process of GSM frequency optimization, which helps you perform frequency optimization more efficiently. The mechanism for frequency optimization is as follows: The system identifies the frequency interference when a measurement cell in a frequency interference matrix is configured with the current BCCH and TCH among the candidate ARFCNs. Then, it assigns a proper BCCH and proper TCHs for each measurement cell. For more information about the mechanism, see Figure 10-2.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-5



Figure 10-2 Flow chart for frequency optimization Start Generate interference matrix through frequency analysis task

Obtain interference matrix of selected cell

Calculate interference of configured ARFCN

Calculate interference of candidate ARFCNs

Calculate interference over VIP cell

End

10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs This describes the spacing rules of GSM ARFCNs, which help you optimize the frequencies more efficiently. The spacing rules are as follows: l

Spacing rules between BCCHs, TCHs, or between a BCCH and a TCH of co-site cells For example, you select three co-site cells: cell A, cell B, and cell C. The space between BCCHs of each cell is set to 2. If you select cell A as the measurement cell, and the BCCHs of cell B and cell C are respectively 16 and 20, the BCCH of cell A should not be 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, or 21. If these ARFCNs are present in the candidate BCCHs, the information about these ARFCNs are highlighted in pink.

l

Spacing rules between BCCHs, TCHs, or between a BCCH and a TCH of one cell Each cell has only one BCCH, and therefore no spacing rules are required between BCCHs of one cell. The space is 0 by default, that is, no restriction exists. For example, the space between TCHs of one cell is set to 2. If the TCHs of the selected measurement cell are 27, 51, and 61, the TCH of this cell should not be 26, 28, 50, 52, 60, or 62. If these ARFCNs are present in the candidate TCHs, the information about these ARFCNs are highlighted in red.

l

Spacing rules between BCCHs, TCHs, or between a BCCH and a TCH of a selected cell and its defined neighboring cells For example, the selected cell, namely, cell A, has cell B, cell C, and cell D as its defined neighboring cells. The BCCH space between cell A and its defined neighboring cells is set to 2. If the BCCHs of the neighboring cells are respectively 16, 19, and 27, the BCCH of

10-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



cell A should not be 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 26, 27, or 28. If these ARFCNs are present in the candidate BCCHs, the information about these ARFCNs are highlighted in orange. The spacing rules between ARFCNs provide a highlighting function. Information about ARFCNs that violate the co-cell rules is highlighted in red, and the legend is . Information about ARFCNs that violate the co-site rules is highlighted in pink, and the legend is

. Information about ARFCNs that violate the neighboring cell rules are highlighted

in orange, and the legend is . The system arranges the highlighting of ARFCNs by priority in the following descending order: co-cell ARFCNs, co-site ARFCNs, and neighboring cell ARFCNs. If an ARFCN meets multiple conditions, the information about this ARFCN is highlighted in the color with a higher or the highest priority.

10.2 Procedure for Using GSM Frequency Analysis This describes the process of GSM frequency analysis. Figure 10-3 shows the general process of GSM frequency analysis. Figure 10-3 Process of GSM frequency analysis Start

Create an E2E task

Create a frequency analysis task

Check the overview report of a test cell

Check the report of the test cell interference matrix

Check the report of the test cell frequency interference matrix

Export the frequency analysis report End

Table 10-2 describes the process of GSM frequency analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-7



Table 10-2 Process of GSM frequency analysis Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2


You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE to start the measurement task for all objects. NOTE Starting the measurement task for all objects needs to be performed only once. If this operation has been performed, you do not need to create an end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell task again.

When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task. 3

Create a frequency analysis task

4

l

Check the overview report of measuremen t cells

l

Check the report of the cell interference matrix

l

Check the report of the cell frequency interference matrix

5

10-8

Export the frequency analysis report

You can create a frequency analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required performance data and configuration data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis. You can view the analysis results of the tasks that are successfully performed, identify the strongly interfered cells and frequency, and evaluate the frequency planning results.

You can export a frequency analysis report from the Nastar.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



10.3 Managing GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 10.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 10.3.2 Creating a GSM Frequency Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM frequency analysis task. By performing frequency analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solve the network faults. 10.3.3 Modifying a GSM Frequency Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM frequency analysis task to meet the new requirement. 10.3.4 Checking a GSM Frequency Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM frequency analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM frequency analysis task


Prerequisite l


l


l



Then ...


Perform Step 4.


Perform Step 5.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-9






b.


c.


2.


3.


4.

l


l


l



5.



6.



b.


c.


7.



10-10



b.

From the OSS Name drop-down list box, select the OSS that is related to the E2E task. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



c.


2.


3.



b.


c.


4.

5.



b.



----End



2.




2.



10.3.2 Creating a GSM Frequency Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM frequency analysis task. By performing frequency analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solve the network faults. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-11



Prerequisite l


l


l

A frequency analysis task can be performed only once.

l


Context

Procedure in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Step 1 Click Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, and Note. The value of Execution Type can be only Once Task. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Time Setting for Once Task Data. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page. l


l



–


Step 7 Set Frequency Analysis Parameter on the Parameter Setting tab page. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete a frequency analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE


1.

10-12

Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend a frequency analysis task that is in the idle state. After this operation, the frequency analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the frequency analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.

Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

2.


.


button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended frequency analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the frequency analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.

Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

2.


.


10.3.3 Modifying a GSM Frequency Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM frequency analysis task to meet the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

A GSM frequency analysis task is created.

Context You are not allowed to modify the parameters of the task whose Status is Running or Complete. You can only view the information about the task. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-13



Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the parameters, see 10.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the navigation tree of objects, and the Frequency Analysis Parameter parameter.


10.3.4 Checking a GSM Frequency Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM frequency analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM frequency analysis task

Prerequisite l


l

A GSM frequency analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of a frequency analysis task


.

You can check the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 10.3.3 Modifying a GSM Frequency Analysis Task.

10-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Purpose

Operation

Checking the execution progress of the active task



Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results of the previous execution of the selected task in the Last Running Result column. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. NOTE In the result list, if the result information about tasks that fail to be executed at a certain period already exists in the database, you can right-click the results, and then choose Analyze Result Again from the shortcut menu to analyze the results of this period again. Only the results of tasks that fail to be executed are analyzed again.

----End

Postrequisite l


l


10.4 Querying GSM Frequency Analysis Reports This describes how to query the GSM frequency analysis reports. You can query the relevant frequency analysis reports as required. Through the information about the interference matrix and frequency interference matrix in the reports, you can know the cells and frequencies with strong interference. The GSM frequency reports can be classified into reports of measurement cells, reports of GSM cell interference matrix, and reports of GSM cell frequency interference matrix. 10.4.1 Querying the Interference Matrix Report of GSM Measurement Cells This describes how to query the interference matrix report of the GSM measurement cells. You can query the information about the cells involved in a frequency analysis task. With this Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-15



function, you can ascertain the information about the interference from co-channel or adjacentchannel cells to a measurement cell and the interference from a measurement cell to the cochannel or adjacent-channel cells. The Nastar automatically sorts the analyzed cells, determines the cells to be optimized, and uses the optimized cells as the basis for later frequency analysis. 10.4.2 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Interference Matrix This describes how to query the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. You can query the volume and proportion of the traffic that is affected by the interference from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell with a co-channel or adjacent-channel, and the volume and proportion of the traffic that is affected by the interference from a neighboring cell with a co-channel or adjacent-channel to the measurement cell. The analysis result of the interference matrix helps you learn about the information about the interference between cells and serves as a reference for frequency optimization. 10.4.3 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix This describes how to query the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix. You can query the traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurement cell and the BCCH of its neighboring cell. When querying the interference matrix, you can query the traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurement cell and the co-channel and adjacent channels of its neighboring cells.

10.4.1 Querying the Interference Matrix Report of GSM Measurement Cells This describes how to query the interference matrix report of the GSM measurement cells. You can query the information about the cells involved in a frequency analysis task. With this function, you can ascertain the information about the interference from co-channel or adjacentchannel cells to a measurement cell and the interference from a measurement cell to the cochannel or adjacent-channel cells. The Nastar automatically sorts the analyzed cells, determines the cells to be optimized, and uses the optimized cells as the basis for later frequency analysis.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report. The Frequency Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 View the list of measurement cells in the left pane in the displayed window. For details about the relevant parameters, see 10.8.5 Parameters for Querying the Overview Report of the GSM Test Cells. ----End 10-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


10.4.2 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Interference Matrix This describes how to query the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. You can query the volume and proportion of the traffic that is affected by the interference from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell with a co-channel or adjacent-channel, and the volume and proportion of the traffic that is affected by the interference from a neighboring cell with a co-channel or adjacent-channel to the measurement cell. The analysis result of the interference matrix helps you learn about the information about the interference between cells and serves as a reference for frequency optimization.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-17



You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report. The Frequency Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a measurement cell from the measurement cell list in the left pane and click the Interference Matrix tab in the right pane. Then, view the information about the interface matrix. For details about the relevant parameters, see 10.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report of GSM Cell Interference Matrix. ----End

Postrequisite l


l


10.4.3 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix This describes how to query the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix. You can query the traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurement cell and the BCCH of its neighboring cell. When querying the interference matrix, you can query the traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurement cell and the co-channel and adjacent channels of its neighboring cells.


Context The adjacent channels refer to the frequencies before and after a certain frequency of the measurement cell. For example, if a BCCH frequency of a measurement cell is 113, its adjacent channels are 112 and 114.

Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. 10-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report. The Frequency Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a measurement cell from the measurement cell list in the left pane and click the Frequency Interference Matrix tab in the right pane. Then, view the information about the frequency interference matrix. For details about the relevant parameters, see 10.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix. ----End

Postrequisite l


l


10.5 Querying the GSM Frequency Optimization Report The Nastar performance analysis system allows you to query GSM frequency optimization reports. You can select the automatic frequency optimization or enable the Nastar to perform the frequency optimization by manually setting the related parameters.


Context Automatic frequency optimization: The Nastar automatically selects ARFCNs to perform frequency optimization. This greatly improves the optimization efficiency and reduces manual operations. Manual frequency optimization: You can select certain cells from the interference matrix of a frequency analysis task and then set the algorithm parameters for frequency optimization. After that, you can identify the frequency interference when certain candidate ARFCNs are configured as the BCCH ARFCN and TCH ARFCN of the measurement cell. In this manner, you can select proper BCCH and TCH ARFCNs for each measurement cell.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-19



Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 In the result information list of the lower right pane, right-click a result, and then choose Frequency Optimization from the shortcut menu. The GSM Frequency Optimization dialog box is displayed. l

This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable.

l

If the query of the GSM frequency optimization report is performed, the default query conditions in this dialog box are the same as the query conditions set in the last query. These default query conditions are saved in the \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\conf\FreqConf directory of the installation path on the client. Each frequency analysis task corresponds to one file.

Step 4 On the Algorithm Parameter tab page, set the rules for spacing between ARFCNs, BCCH frequency range, TCH frequency range, VIP cell group, the ARFCNs used by the algorithm. Then, click OK. l

In the ARFCN Spacing Rule Setting area, double-click each pane to set the ARFCN spacing rules. For the relevant rules, see 10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs.

l

on the right of Set the BCCH ARFCN range, Set the TCH ARFCN range, or Click Set a VIP cell group to select a candidate ARFCN of the BCCH/TCH or select a VIP cell group.

l

The system allows you to set duplicate ARFCNs serving as both BCCH ARFCNs and TCH ARFCNs. That is, the range of BCCH ARFCNs and TCH ARFCNs can be overlapped. If duplicate ARFCNs exist, the Nastar analyzes and optimize ARFCNs and does not filter out the duplicate ARFCNs.

l

The system provides a highlighting function for spacing rules of ARFCNs. For details, see 10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs.

l

You can perform frequency optimization based on the current frequency configuration on the existing network or based on the last modified and submitted frequency ARFCN configuration.

l

in the upper left corner of the window to open the Frequency Usage Analysis Click dialog box to view the usage of the current BCCH and TCH frequencies, thus helping to improve the spectrum usage.

Step 5 Select the frequency optimization mode as required.

10-20

If you need to ...

Then ...

Select automatic frequency optimization

Perform Step 6 through Step 7.

Select manual frequency optimization

Perform Step 8 through Step 9.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 6 Click in the upper left corner of the window. The GSM Automatic Frequency Optimization dialog box is displayed. Step 7 On the Optimize Parameters tab page, set Phase Optimize Range, ARFCN Type, and Optimize Loop Count. Then, click OK. The system automatically selects the ARFCNs and performs frequency optimization. Step 8 Select a cell from area (1) in the GSM Frequency Optimization window. l

For the rules of dividing areas, see 10.8.2 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Optimization.

l

Area (3) displays all the configured and candidate BCCHs and TCHs of the measurement cell selected in area (1). Based on the user-defined algorithm parameters, the system calculates and identifies the ARFCNs that meet the co-cell rules, co-site rules, and neighboring cell rules, respectively. This information is fundamental for frequency optimization.

l

Area (4) displays the interfered traffic, external interference traffic, latest total interference traffic, original interference traffic, and total interference traffic in legends of different colors.

Step 9 Optional: Perform either of the following operations on the BCCH or TCH tab page as required: Purpose

Operation

Adding an ARFCN

1. Select an unconfigured ARFCN, and then select the corresponding option in the Configured column. You can also click upper-left corner of the window. 2. Click

in the

for the settings to take effect.

Deleting an ARFCN 1. Select a configured ARFCN, and then clear the corresponding option in the Configured column. You can also click in the upper-left corner of the window. 2. Click

for the settings to take effect.

After the submission, you can click and to view the interference on each ARFCN before and after the submission, respectively. Thus, you can analyze the change of interference on each ARFCN before and after the frequency optimization and identify the feasibility of this frequency optimization. NOTE

l

If an ARFCN is already configured as the BCCH in the selected cell, according to Spacing Rules of ARFCNs, this ARFCN cannot be configured as the TCH even if it is within the range of candidate TCH ARFCNs. Otherwise, the Nastar displays an error message, indicating that the ARFCN is already configured.

l

If you have configured an ARFCN as a TCH of the measurement cell, the neighboring ARFCNs of this ARFCN should not be configured as TCHs of this cell.

l

For the ARFCNs that violate the spacing rules, a dialog box is displayed during the ARFCN addition operation. Click Yes to proceed with the operation.

----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-21



Postrequisite l


l


10.6 Exporting GSM Interference Analysis Reports This describes how to export the reports of GSM interference analysis. You can export the reports of frequency analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to the CME of Huawei to reduce the cell frequency interference on the network.

Prerequisite l


l

You have checked the reports of GSM frequency analysis.

l

Perform the following operations as required:

Procedure

If you need to ...

Then ...

Export the frequency overview information

1. Click in the Frequency Analysis window. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the name, type and save path of the file. Then, click Save. After being saved, a CSV or XLS file is automatically open so that you can view the file conveniently.

Export the interference information about a specified cell


10-22


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If you need to ...

Then ...

Export the details about the interference 1. Click in the Frequency Analysis matrix on the entire network window. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the name, type and save path of the file. Then, click Save. After being saved, a CSV or XLS file is automatically open so that you can view the file conveniently. Export the information about the possible neighboring cells of a measurement cell


Export an interference comparison analysis report

1. Click in the Frequency Analysis window. The Select Two Task to Compare dialog box is displayed. 2. Click tasks.

, and then enter the names of two

3. Click OK. The Interference Compare Result window is displayed. The window contains three tabs, namely, Overview Compare, BSC Compare, and Cell Compare. 4. After you right-click in the query result area and then choose Save as, the Save dialog box is displayed. 5. Set the file name, file type, and save path. Then, click Save. The saved .csv or .xls file is opened automatically so that you can view it conveniently.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-23


10 GSM Frequency Analysis NOTE

l

Exporting frequency overview results refers to exporting the information about all the measurement cells involved in the selected analysis task.

l

Exporting the interference information about a specified cell refers to exporting the mutual interference information about a measurement cell and its neighboring cells, and the information about the frequency interference matrix involved in this measurement cell.

l

Exporting the details about the interference matrixes on the entire network refers to exporting the information about frequency interference matrixes involved in all the measurement cells.

l

Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the information about the possible neighboring cells of a measurement cell.

l

Exporting the interference comparison analysis report refers to exporting the information about the interference of two frequency analysis tasks.

----End

10.7 Exporting GSM Frequency Optimization Reports The Nastar performance analysis system allows you to export GSM frequency optimization reports. You can export the queried frequency optimization results to a CSV or an XLS file for future comparison and analysis.

Prerequisite l

You have logged in to the Nastar performance analysis client.

l

You have checked the GSM frequency optimization reports.

Procedure Step 1 In the GSM Frequency Optimization window, click

. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the filename, file type, and save path. Then, click Save. The saved CSV or XLS file can be open automatically so that you can view it conveniently. Step 3 (Optional) Export a frequency analysis prediction report. Exporting a frequency analysis prediction report refers to exporting a prediction report of a specified measurement cell before and after frequency optimization. 1.

In the GSM Frequency Optimization window, click Result window is displayed.

. The Interference Compare

The window contains three tabs, namely, Overview Compare, BSC Compare, and Cell Compare. 2.

Right-click in the query result area, and then choose Save as from the shortcut menu. The Save dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set the file name, file type, and save path. Then, click Save. The saved .csv or .xls file is opened automatically so that you can view it conveniently.

----End

10-24


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



10.8 Reference for the GSM Frequency Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the GSM frequency analysis functions. 10.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Analysis This describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface. 10.8.2 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Optimization This describes the interface for GSM frequency optimization. You can familiarize yourself with each area to facilitate the operations on this interface. 10.8.3 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks This section describes the parameters for creating GSM E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating a GSM E2E task. 10.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM frequency analysis task. 10.8.5 Parameters for Querying the Overview Report of the GSM Test Cells This describes the parameters related to querying the overview report of the GSM measurement cells. You can refer to the description when querying the overview report of the GSM measurement cells. 10.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report of GSM Cell Interference Matrix This describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. You can refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. 10.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix This describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix. You can refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix. 10.8.8 Parameters for Querying GSM Frequency Optimization Reports This describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM frequency optimization.

10.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Analysis This describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface. The frequency analysis results can be displayed in a table. The list of summary information about the measurement cells, list of information about interference matrix, and list of information about frequency interference matrix are contained, as shown in Figure 10-4 and Figure 10-5.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-25



Figure 10-4 Frequency analysis interface (1)

10-26

No. Name

Description

(1)

Measurement Cell Overview Information

Displays the information about all taskrelated measurement cells.

(2)

Neighboring Cell-Measurement Cell Interference Matrix Detail

Displays the traffic interfered by the neighboring cells of the measurement cell selected in Area (1).

(3)

Measurement Cell-Neighboring Cell Interference Matrix Detail

Displays the traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell selected in Area (1) to the defined and undefined neighboring cells.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 10-5 Frequency analysis interface (2)

No. Name

Description

(4)

Frequency Interference Matrix

Displays the traffic affected by the interference between the measurement cell selected in Area (1) and its neighboring cells by frequencies.

(5)

BCCH Configured Frequency Cell List Displays the interfered traffic between the measurement cell and its neighboring cells on the same BCCH or between the measurement cell and its neighboring cells with the adjacent BCCH when the frequency selected in Area (4) is set to be the BCCH of the measurement cell.

(6)

Button area

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Five buttons are provided to export the overview information about frequency analysis, the interference of specified cell, the interference matrix, the possible neighboring cell analysis results, and the interferance compare analysis results.


10-27



10.8.2 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Optimization This describes the interface for GSM frequency optimization. You can familiarize yourself with each area to facilitate the operations on this interface. The frequency optimization results can be tabulated into general information, BCCH information, and TCH information, respectively. Figure 10-6 shows the interface. Figure 10-6 Frequency optimization interface

10-28

SN Name

Description

(1) General information

Shows the information about all the measurement cells selected in the current task.

(2) Button area

Provides nine buttons respectively for adding a frequency, deleting a frequency, returning to the previous operation results, switching to the next operation result, exporting the frequency optimization results, submitting the operation, checking frequency usage ratio, interference compare analysing and auto frequency optimizing.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



SN Name

Description

(3) BCCH information and TCH information

l

The BCCH table shows all the configured and candidate BCCHs of the measurement cell selected in area (1).

l

The TCH table shows all the configured and candidate TCHs of the measurement cell selected in area (1).

At the top of the ARFCN, Total Interference Traffic, Interfered Traffic, External Interference Traffic, Interference Traffic to VIP Cells, Latest Total Interference Traffic, and Original Total Interference Traffic columns, set the ascending order or descending order. Area (4) displays the images in a new order. (4) Image area

Shows the information about frequency interference in the selected cell in a combination of bar charts and line charts.

(5) Legends of the highlighting function

Displays the ARFCNs in different colors that violate the related rules of co-cells, co-sites, and neighboring cells.

(6) Algorithm parameter area

Displays the algorithm parameters set when frequency optimization is queried. Rules for spacing between frequencies, and VIP cell groups are contained in this area. By default, this area is hidden. You need to

click on the right of the window to display this area. (7) Current status area

Displays the Current Loop Times and the Automatic Optimize Percent.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-29



Description of the parameters of GSM neighboring cell measurement tasks Parameter

Description

Basic information


Task Name


OSS Name


E2E Task List




Measurement period




Cell Object





Step.


10-30




Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description RSSThres


ASSThres




NOTE

l


l


l



Measure information



OSS Name


E2E Task List


Time (Minute)


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-31



Parameter

Description BSC Type


Band

Indicates the frequency band used by a cell. The M2000 supports the scanning of the following frequency bands: l

DCS_1800

l

EGSM_900

l

GSM850

l

P_GSM900

l

PSC1900

l

R_GSM900

Cell Object


Frequency Type



l


l


10.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM frequency analysis task.

10-32


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)





Indicates the name of a frequency analysis task. Value range: l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

You need to select GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type


Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l



Task Start At


Object Information

Frequency Analysis Parameter

BSC


Cell Group


Display Number of Undefined Neighboring Cells

Indicates that only the TopN frequencies of undefined neighboring cells are displayed.

Co-Channel Interference C/I

Indicates the threshold of co-channel interference.

N can be any integer from 20 to 999. The default value is 30.

This parameter can be set to any integer from 6 to 15. The default value is 12. Unit: dB

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


10-33



Parameter

Description Adjacent-Channel Interference C/A

Indicates the threshold of adjacent-channel interference. This parameter can be set to any integer from -12 to 0. The default value is -6. Unit: dB

Omni Gain

Indicates the omnidirectional gain of an antenna. This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to 15. The default value is 11. Unit: dbi

Directive Gain

Indicates the directional gain of an antenna. This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to 25. The default value is 17. Unit: dbi

Max Distance of the Same BCCH &BSIC Check of Neighboring Cells (km)

Indicates the distance of the search for cells with the same BCCH ARFCN and BSIC as the test cell. If you set this parameter to 0, it indicates that the co-BCCH and co-BSIC check is not performed when the BCCH ARFCN is changed. Value range: floating numbers from 0.0 to 20.0. Default value: 5.0. Unit: km

10.8.5 Parameters for Querying the Overview Report of the GSM Test Cells This describes the parameters related to querying the overview report of the GSM measurement cells. You can refer to the description when querying the overview report of the GSM measurement cells.


10-34

Parameter

Description

BSC Name

Indicates the name of the BSC that the measurement cell belongs to, for example, BSC_1.

Test Cell

Indicates the name of the measurement cell, for example, Cell_1.

Test Cell CGI

Indicates the measurement cell CGI.

BCCH


BSIC



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Number of CoBCCH Neighboring Cells (Co-BCCH defined neighbors and Co-BCCH defined neighbors of tested cell's defined cells.)

Indicates the number of co-channel neighboring cells of a measurement cell, including the defined neighboring cells and undefined neighboring cells.

Probable CoInterferenced Traffic by neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the measurement cell from the co-channel neighboring cells.

Probable AdjInterferenced Traffic by neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the measurement cell from the adjacent-channel cells.

Probable CoInterferenced Traffic to neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the co-channel neighboring cells from the measurement cell.

Probable AdjInterferenced Traffic to neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the adjacent-channel cells from the measurement cell.

Total Number of Measurement Reports on Test Cells

Indicates the total number of downlink MRs received by the measurement cell within the measurement period.

Proximate CoChannel Neighboring Cell Distance (km)

Indicates the distance from the measurement cell to the nearest cochannel neighboring cell.

10.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report of GSM Cell Interference Matrix This describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. You can refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix.

Parameter related to the matrix of the interference from other cells to the measurement cell

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Interference Cell

Indicates the name of a cell that interferes the measurement cell.


10-35



Parameter

Description

Interference Cell BCCH Frequency

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an interfering cell.

Interference Cell BSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of an interfering cell.

Neighboring Cell Property

Indicates the attributes of an interfering cell, such as Defined Neighboring Cell and Undefined Neighboring Cell.

Overlapping Traffic

Indicates the number of MRs received by the measurement cell from the co-channel cells and adjacent-channel cells.

Percentage of CoInterferenced Traffic by Neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to be the same as that of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from a cochannel neighboring cell to the measurement cell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell during measurement period x 100%

Percentage of AdjInterferenced Traffic by Neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the frequency adjacent to the BCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from an adjacent-channel neighboring cell to the measurement cell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell during measurement period x 100%

Probable CoInterferenced Traffic by Neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboring cell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is the same as that of the neighboring cell.

Probable AdjInterferenced Traffic by Neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboring cell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is adjacent to the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Distance (km)

Distance from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell.

Parameter related to the matrix of the interference from the measurement cell to its neighboring cells

10-36

Parameter

Description

Interfered Cell

Indicates the name of a cell interfered by the measurement cell

Interfered Cell BCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an interfered cell.

Interfered Cell BSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of an interfered cell.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description


Indicates the attributes of an interfered cell, such as Defined Neighboring Cell and Undefined Neighboring Cell.

Overlapping Traffic

Indicates the number of MRs received by the co-channel cells and adjacent-channel cells from the measurement cell.

Percentage of CoInterferenced Traffic to Neighbor (%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to be the same as that of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to the co-channel neighboring cell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell during measurement period x 100%

Percentage of AdjInterferenced Traffic to Neighbor (%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the frequency adjacent to the BCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to the adjacent-channel neighboring cell/Number of reports generated by the test cell during measurement period x 100%

Probable CoInterferenced Traffic to Neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cell is the same as that of the neighboring cell.

Probable AdjInterferenced Traffic to Neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cell is adjacent to the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Distance (km)

Distance from the measurement cell to an interfered cell.

10.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix This describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix. You can refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix.

Parameters Related to Frequency Interference Matrix

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BCCH Frequency

Indicates the BCCHs of the defined and undefined neighboring cells of the measurement cell

Traffic of Test Cell Caused by Neighboring Cell Interference

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the value of BCCH Frequency, the value of this parameter is the total volume of the interfered traffic of the measurement cell. The interfered traffic is caused by the co-channel and adjacent-channel neighboring cells of the test cell.


10-37



Parameter

Description

Traffic of Neighboring Cell Caused by Test Cell Interference

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the value of BCCH Frequency, the value of this parameter is the total volume of the interfered traffic of the co-channel and adjacent-channel neighboring cells. The interfered traffic is caused by the measurement cell.

Proximate CoChannel Neighboring Cell Distance (km)

Indicates the distance from the measurement cell to the nearest cochannel cell when the BCCH of the measurement cell is configured to the value of BCCH Frequency.

Parameters Related to the Cells Whose BCCHs Specified by BCCH Frequency

10-38

Parameter

Description

Interference Cell BCCH Frequency

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an interfering cell.

Interference Cell BSIC Frequency

Indicates the base station identity code of an interfering cell.

Interference Cell ID.

Indicates the number of an interfering cell.

Interference Cell Name

Indicates the name of a cell that interferes the measurement cell.


Indicates the attributes of an interfering cell, such as Defined Neighboring Cell and Undefined Neighboring Cell.

Overlapping Traffic

Indicates the total number of reports sent from a co-channel cell to the measurement cell and reports sent from the measurement cell to the cochannel cell.

Percentage of CoInterferenced Traffic by neighbor (%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is the same as that of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from the co-channel neighboring cell to the measurement cell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell during measurement period x 100%

Percentage of AdjInterferenced Traffic by neighbor (%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the frequency adjacent to the BCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from the adjacent-channel neighboring cell to the measurement cell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell during measurement period x 100%

Probable CoInterferenced Traffic by neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboring cell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is the same as that of the neighboring cell.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Probable AdjInterferenced Traffic by neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboring cell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is adjacent to the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Percentage of CoInterferenced Traffic to neighbor (%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to be the same as that of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to the co-channel neighboring cell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell during measurement period x 100%

Percentage of AdjInterferenced Traffic to neighbor (%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to a BCCH adjacent to the BCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to the adjacent-channel neighboring cell/Number of reports generated by the test cell during measurement period x 100%

Probable CoInterferenced Traffic to neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cell is the same as that of the neighboring cell.

Probable AdjInterferenced Traffic to neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cell is adjacent to the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Distance (km)

Indicates the distance from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell.

10.8.8 Parameters for Querying GSM Frequency Optimization Reports This describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM frequency optimization.

Parameter Description of the Current Measurement Cell

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

BSC Name

Refers to the BSC to which the measurement cell belongs. For example, the BSC is named BSC_1.

Cell Name

Refers to the name of the measurement cell. For example, the cell is named Cell_1.

BCCH

Refers to the broadcast control channel of the current test cell.

LAC

Refers to the location code of the current measurement cell.

CI

Refers to the cell identity of the current measurement cell.

TCH

Refers to the traffic channel of the current measurement cell.


10-39



Parameter

Description

Total MR

Refers to the total number of measurement reports (MRs) of the current measurement cell.

Parameter Description of BCCH/TCH ARFCNs Parameter

Description

Configured

Indicates whether the current ARFCN is configured as the BCCH ARFCN or a TCH ARCFN of the selected cell.

ARFCN

Indicates the configured and candidate BCCH and TCH ARFCNs of the measurement cell.

Cell with the Strongest Interference

Indicates the name of the cell that has the strongest interference over the measurement cell. This parameter might be null in the following cases:

Cell Measured or Not

l

The system identifies the BCCH and BSIC values of the cell with the strongest interference but cannot locate the cell according to these values.

l

The system fails to identify the BCCH or BSIC value of the cell with the strongest interference, and these values are displayed as 0, that is, the cell with the strongest interference is not within the interference matrix, and thus it cannot be measured.

Indicates whether the cell with the strongest interference over the measurement cell is within the interference matrix and causes interference on the measurement cell, that is, whether the cell with the strongest interference is measured. The value can be Yes or No.

10-40

l

Yes indicates that the cell with the strongest interference over the measurement cell is within the interference matrix, that is, the cell with the strongest interference is measured. In such a case, External Interference Traffic of this ARFCN is reliable.

l

No indicates that the cell with the strongest interference over the measurement cell is not within the interference matrix, that is, the cell with the strongest interference is not measured. In such a case, External Interference Traffic of this ARFCN is unreliable.

Maximum Interference Traffic

Indicates the maximum interference traffic received by the measurement cell when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the current candidate ARFCN.

Total Interference Traffic

Indicates the total interference traffic received from and caused to other cells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the current candidate ARFCN.

Interfered Traffic

Indicates the total interference traffic received from other cells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the current candidate ARFCN.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Parameter

Description

External Interference Traffic

Indicates the total interference traffic caused to other cells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the current candidate ARFCN.

Interference Traffic to VIP Cells

Indicates the total interference traffic caused to other VIP cells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the current candidate ARFCN.

Latest Total Interference Traffic

Indicates the total interference traffic received from and caused to other cells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the current candidate ARFCN after the latest frequency optimization is performed.

Original Total Interference Traffic

Indicates the total interference traffic received from and caused to other cells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the ARFCN of the existing network.


10-41


11 GSM Uplink Interference Analysis

11

GSM Uplink Interference Analysis

About This Chapter This describes the GSM uplink interference analysis. The GSM uplink interference analysis involves the management and query of GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. The Nastar measures the uplink levels. By checking the analysis results, you can know the strength of the measured frequencies received in a certain cell and choose a proper frequency to be used. 11.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the GSM uplink interference analysis. The GSM uplink interference analysis function is used to analyze the diverse average interference strength and main average interference strength of uplink levels. In the network planning, this function enables the network planners to look for the frequency resources that are not interfered on the network. In the network optimization, this function enables the network planners to look for the frequency resources with better quality for the cells with interference sources according to the analysis of the measurement results. In the network monitoring, this function can be used to monitor the interference levels of the network. 11.2 Procedure for Using GSM Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the process of GSM uplink interference analysis. 11.3 Managing GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also view the status and the execution progress of a task. 11.4 Querying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Report This describes how to query a GSM uplink-interference analysis report. You can query the signal strength of the measured frequency received and choose the proper operating frequency based on the result. 11.5 Reference for the GSM Uplink Interference Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of GSM uplink interference analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11-1



11.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the GSM uplink interference analysis. The GSM uplink interference analysis function is used to analyze the diverse average interference strength and main average interference strength of uplink levels. In the network planning, this function enables the network planners to look for the frequency resources that are not interfered on the network. In the network optimization, this function enables the network planners to look for the frequency resources with better quality for the cells with interference sources according to the analysis of the measurement results. In the network monitoring, this function can be used to monitor the interference levels of the network. The uplink frequency analysis aims at testing uplink levels. The analysis results reflect the strength of the signals received by the measurement cell at the test frequencies. The engineers can select appropriate work frequencies according to the analysis results. The frequency planning of the BSCs is different. The following part describes the frequency planning of the BSC6000. The Huawei BTS can scan the received levels at uplink of all frequencies in the following frequency bands: GSM850 frequency band (869 MHz to 893 MHz), GSM900 frequency band (890 MHz to 915 MHz), GSM1800/PCS1900 frequency band (1805 MHz to 1880 MHz/1930 MHz to 1989 MHz), E-GSM extended frequency band (880 MHz to 890 MHz), and R-GSM extended frequency band (876 MHz to 880 MHz). That is, the Huawei BTS can scan the strength of the interference signals in the frequency bands ranging from 876 MHz to 915 MHz and from 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz. The principles of the frequency analysis for the BTS of the Huawei BTS3X series are as follows: In the case of not affecting normal calls, the uplink frequency analysis function is used to perform the cycling test by using the IDLE frame of a TCH within the measurement cell and scan the received levels at uplink of the specified frequencies (When the BSC allocates this channel, the TCH at the TRX where the BCCH is located is preferred). The TCH channel adopts the structure of 26 multiframes. Each TCH multiframe contains an IDLE frame. The period of the IDLE frame on the TCH channel is 26 multiframes x 0.577 (Burst length) x 8 (TDMA frame) = 120 ms. During the application, each frequency is measured 10 times, and about one minute is spent on measuring 50 frequencies. An uplink interference analysis task records a maximum of 124 measurement frequencies. Thus, about three minutes are spent on measuring these 124 frequencies. After you set the conditions of uplink interference analysis, the Nastar performance analysis system starts to analyze the uplink interference for the selected cells. The analysis results are displayed in histogram mode or in line chart to show the diverse average interference strength and main average interference strength of each frequency at different time and in different colors.

11.2 Procedure for Using GSM Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the process of GSM uplink interference analysis. Figure 11-1 shows the general process of GSM uplink interference analysis.

11-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create an uplink interference analysis task Query an uplink interference analysis report End

Table 11-1 describes the process of GSM uplink interference analysis. Table 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to an uplink frequency scanning task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to an uplink frequency scanning task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. NOTE If no end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell analysis task is created, first you need to create an end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell analysis task to enable the measurement of all the objects.

When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11-3



Seria l No.

Procedure

Description

3

Create an uplink interference analysis task

You can create an uplink interference analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required uplink ARFCN scanning data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Query the GSM uplink interference analysis report

You can browse the analysis result when the uplink interference analysis task is successfully performed. The system sorts interference signals on the BCCH and TCH frequencies in all cells and determines whether the uplink signal interference exists in some cells, thus providing references for you to select proper operating frequencies.

11.3 Managing GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage the GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also view the status and the execution progress of a task. 11.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 11.3.2 Creating a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. By performing uplinkinterference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the uplink-level data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the signal strength of the measurement ARFCNs received in certain cells and choose a proper operating ARFCN. 11.3.3 Modifying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task to meet the new requirement. 11.3.4 Checking a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task.


Prerequisite l

11-4

You have logged in to the Nastar client. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11 GSM Uplink Interference Analysis l


l



Then ...


Perform Step 4.


Perform Step 5.




b.


c.


2.


3.


4.

l


l


l



5.



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11-5



6.



b.


c.


7.





b.


c.


2.


3.



b.


c.


4.

5.



b.



----End


11-6

From the task list in the right pane of the E2E Task Management window, select a task record, and then click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



2.




2.



11.3.2 Creating a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to create a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. By performing uplinkinterference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the uplink-level data in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the signal strength of the measurement ARFCNs received in certain cells and choose a proper operating ARFCN.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context



l

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can click any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the query result that meets the search condition.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11-7


11 GSM Uplink Interference Analysis –


–


Step 7 Set Uplink Interference Analysis Parameter on the Parameter Setting tab page. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete an uplink-interference analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE


1.

Choose GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference analysis task that is in the Idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the uplink-interference analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.


2.


l

. button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended uplink-interference analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the uplink-interference analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


11-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



2.


.


11.3.3 Modifying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task to meet the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

A GSM uplink-interference analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the object navigation tree, and the Uplink Interference Analysis parameter.


11.3.4 Checking a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to check a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task.

Prerequisite l


l

A GSM uplink-interference analysis task is created.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11-9



Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of an uplinkinterference analysis task


.

You can check the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 11.3.3 Modifying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task. Checking the execution progress of the active task




----End

Postrequisite l


l

11-10

The system enables you to search for task information. You can click any line in the task information list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the task information that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

11.4 Querying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Report This describes how to query a GSM uplink-interference analysis report. You can query the signal strength of the measured frequency received and choose the proper operating frequency based on the result.


Procedure Step 1 Choose GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Result. The GSM Uplink Frequency Interference Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Optional: To view the counter chart corresponding to a frequency, select a frequency and choose Cell Uplink Interference Analysis from the navigation tree on the left. Alternatively, rightclick the frequency and choose Cell Uplink Interference Analysis. l

The counter bar chart shows the interference strength of all the measured frequencies in the measurement cell at a certain time. The counter line chart shows the interference strength of a certain frequency in the selected cell during the measurement period.

l

You can choose Cell Uplink Interference Overview from the navigation tree in the left pane to switch to the list of measured frequencies.

----End

Postrequisite l


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Right-click the chart, and then choose Property from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Chart Property dialog box, set the coordinate axes of and basic information about the chart. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-11



–


–


–


l


11.5 Reference for the GSM Uplink Interference Analysis GUI This describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of GSM uplink interference analysis. 11.5.1 Interface Description: GSM Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. 11.5.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks This section describes the parameters for creating GSM E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating a GSM E2E task. 11.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. 11.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of GSM Cells This describes the parameters for querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSM cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSM cells.

11.5.1 Interface Description: GSM Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The analysis results of the uplink interference can be displayed in tables or in counter charts, as shown in Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3. 11-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 11-2 Interface for the overview of the uplink interference of cells

Figure 11-2 shows the signal strength of all the cell frequencies in a selected cell group or under a selected BSC. To view the counter chart corresponding to a frequency, select a frequency, and then click Cell Uplink Interference Analysis in the navigation tree in the left pane. Alternatively, right-click the frequency and choose Cell Uplink Interference Analysis. Figure 11-3 Interface for the uplink interference analysis of a cell

In Figure 11-3, the counter bar chart shows the interference strength of all the measured frequencies in the measurement cell at a certain time; the counter line chart shows the interference strength of a certain frequency in the selected cell during the measurement period. In the bar Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11-13



chart, each value on the vertical coordinate is the sum of 110 and the interference strength of the measured frequency, which ensures that the values on the vertical coordinate are positive. For details about the parameters on the interface, see 11.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of GSM Cells.


Description of the parameters of GSM neighboring cell measurement tasks Parameter Basic information




OSS Name


E2E Task List




Measurement period




Cell Object

11-14



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description Displays the frequency information.



Step.




RSSThres


ASSThres




NOTE

l


l


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


11-15




Measure information



OSS Name


E2E Task List


Time (Minute)


BSC Type


Band

Indicates the frequency band used by a cell. The M2000 supports the scanning of the following frequency bands:

11-16

l

DCS_1800

l

EGSM_900

l

GSM850

l

P_GSM900

l

PSC1900

l

R_GSM900

Cell Object


Frequency Type



l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



11.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM uplink-interference analysis task.



Indicates the name of an uplink-interference analysis task. Value range: l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

You need to select GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type


Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l



Task Start At


Object Information

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

BSC


Cell Group



11-17



Parameter Parameter Information

Description Frequency band of the current cell is

Minimum Diversity Threshold

Indicates the band of the current cell. The value of this parameter can be PGSM 900, EGSM 900, RGSM 900, DSC 1800, PCS 1900, GSM 450, GSM 480, and GSM 850. The default value is PGSM 900. Indicates the threshold of the average interference strength of the uplink diversity antenna. This parameter can be set to any integer from -115 to 0. The default value is -115. Unit: dBm

Minimum Main Threshold

Indicates the threshold of the average interference strength of the uplink main antenna. This parameter can be set to any integer from -115 to 0. The default value is -115. Unit: dBm

Frequency Type Setting

Indicates an ARFCN type.

Arithmetic of Average

Indicates the method for calculating the average value.

The value can be BCCH or TCH.

The value can be Signal Strength Average or Power Average. If the parameter is set to Signal Strength Average, the average value is calculated directly based on the signal strength. If the parameter is set to Power Average, the average value is calculated based on the power that is converted from the signal strength and then the average value is converted to a value in the unit of signal strength.

11.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of GSM Cells This describes the parameters for querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSM cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSM cells.

Parameters Related to the Uplink Interference of GSM Cells

11-18

Parameter

Description

BSC Sequence Number

Indicates the ID of the BSC that a measured TRX belongs to.

BSC Name

Indicates the name of a BSC, for example, BSC_1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell that a measured TRX belongs to.

Frequency

Indicates the frequency of a measured TRX.

Type

Indicates the type of a measured TRX. The options are BCCH and TCH.

Diverse Average Interference Strength (dBm)

Indicates the diverse average interference strength of a measured TRX.

Main Average Interference Strength (dBm)

Indicates the main average interference strength of a measured TRX.

Parameters Related to the Uplink Interference Analysis of GSM Cells Parameter

Description

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the cell that a measured TRX belongs to.

BSC Name


Time Scope

Indicates the time range in which an uplink interference analysis task is performed.

BCCH Frequency

Indicates a BCCH of the selected cell.

Frequency Hopping Mode

Indicates the type of the frequency hopping.

TCH List

Indicates all the TCH frequencies of the selected cell.

Time Point

Indicates the counter bar chart of the selected cell at a certain time.

Sort Type

Indicates the data displayed in the bar chart.

The options are No Frequency Hopping, Baseband Frequency Hopping, Radio Frequency Hopping, and BCCH Synthesized Baseband Frequency Hopping.

The options are Frequency, Diversity, and Main. Diversity indicates the diverse average interference strength, and Main indicates the main average interference strength. Frequency

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Indicates the trend of the strength of a frequency in the selected cell in a certain time segment. The trend is displayed on a line chart.


11-19


12 UMTS Centralized Task Management

12

UMTS Centralized Task Management

About This Chapter The Nastar provides centralized management for the UMTS timing tasks. By setting UMTS timing tasks, you can collect data from the EMS periodically, save the data as a file in certain path on the Nastar system, and import the data from the file to the database periodically for future query and analysis. In addition, you can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save system resources. By using the function of UMTS centralized task management, you can create, modify, delete, suspend, resume, or cancel a UMTS timing task. In addition, you can view information such as status and progress of a task. 12.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management Centralized task management involves the concepts such as types of timing tasks, parameters for task scheduling, and states of timing tasks. Learning the basic knowledge of the centralized task management helps you perform the operations related to the centralized task management. 12.2 Creating a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to create UMTS timing tasks. Thus, you can create UMTS timing tasks by setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of network maintenance. 12.3 Modifying a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a UMTS user-defined timing task. If the execution of a UMTS user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 12.4 Modifying a UMTS Data Deletion Task This describes how to modify a UMTS data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to the Nastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the UMTS data deletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save system resources. A UMTS data deletion task is a system timing task. You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a UMTS data deletion task, you must be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a UMTS data deletion task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 12.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of backing up data. 12.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-1



You can set an automatic suspend time or an automatic resume time for a timing task. In this situation, the Nastar automatically suspends the task or resumes the task. 12.7 Viewing Timing Tasks Through the Nastar function of viewing timing tasks, you can view the status of all timing tasks in a centralized manner. This helps you adjust the concerned timing tasks according to actual conditions. 12.8 Reference to the UMTS Centralized Task Management Interface This describes the interface for the UMTS centralized task management and related information such as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand the functions of the UMTS centralized task management.

12-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



12.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management Centralized task management involves the concepts such as types of timing tasks, parameters for task scheduling, and states of timing tasks. Learning the basic knowledge of the centralized task management helps you perform the operations related to the centralized task management.



Description

One-time task


Periodic task


Tasks Divided According to Task Features According to different task features, the Nastar divides the managed tasks into two types: system timing tasks and user timing tasks. Table 12-2 describes the meanings of each task type. Table 12-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features Task Type

Description

System Timing Tasks


User Timing Tasks


12.1.2 System Timing Tasks The system timing task is created during the installation or upgrade of the Nastar system. User dbuser is the Creator of the system timing task. The Nastar uses Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



12-3


12 UMTS Centralized Task Management NOTE

l


l




l

The Nastar uses


12.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters The task scheduling parameters are the parameters related to the task execution type, consisting of task start time, task execution period, and execution times. Table 12-3 describes the task scheduling parameters. Table 12-3 Description of the task description parameters Parameter

Description

Task Type


Task start time


Period

l


l


l


Run Times


For example, if the scheduling parameters of the data collection task are:

12-4

l


l

Start time = 2006-10-21 09:07:28

l


l

Period execution times = 0 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)







l


l


l


l


l



12.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks This describes how to customize the interface for managing timing tasks. The system can display timing tasks of the specified function type in the navigation tree or display the timing tasks that meet the conditions in the task list. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-5





Operation




12.2 Creating a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to create UMTS timing tasks. Thus, you can create UMTS timing tasks by setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of network maintenance.


l

12-6

Creating a Task of Importing UMTS UplinkInterference Data, Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data,


Then ...




Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If you need to ... l

l

Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data, Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data,

Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters,


Then ...



-


12.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink-Interference Data A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is performed to import data from the uplinkinterference data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data. 12.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data A task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from the neighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data. 12.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data A task of importing UMTS configuration data is performed to import data from the configuration data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS configuration data. 12.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data A task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is performed to import data from the coverage analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data. 12.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is performed to import data from the engineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

12.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink-Interference Data A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is performed to import data from the uplinkinterference data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-7



Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The UMTS uplink-interference data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l

For the user-defined timing tasks of the same type, the system can create only one.

Context


You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Data by default.



2.

Select the task of importing uplink-interference data from Task Type.

Step 4 Click Next to set the execution time of the task and other related parameters. 1.

Click . In the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box, set the start time. You can also set the start time in the Start Time area. NOTE


2.



Postrequisite l


12-8

l


l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



1.


2.



–


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-9



1.


2.


3.


l


12.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data A task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from the neighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data by default.



2.

Select the neighboring-cell analysis data import task from Task Type.


12-10

Click . In the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box, set the start time. You can also set the start time in the Start Time area. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




2.



Postrequisite l


l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



1.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-11


2.




–


l



1.


2.


3.


l


12.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data A task of importing UMTS configuration data is performed to import data from the configuration data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS configuration data.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The UMTS configuration data is collected to the Nastar server. For details of creating the performance data collection task, see 7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task.

Context

12-12

l

A task of importing UMTS configuration data is a user-defined timing task.

l

The task can be executed only periodically. The options of the execution period are Hour, Day, Week, and Month. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12 UMTS Centralized Task Management l



You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import UMTS CFG Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import UMTS CFG Data by default.



2.



Click


You can also set the start time in the Start Time area. NOTE


2.



Postrequisite l


l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-13


2.




–


l



1.


2.



–


l



1.


2.


3.


l


12-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



12.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data A task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is performed to import data from the coverage analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The UMTS coverage analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import UMTS Coverage Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import UMTS Coverage Analysis Data by default.



2.

Select the coverage analysis data import task from Task Type.




2.



Postrequisite l

Deleting a task If required, you can delete created tasks to save system resources.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-15



NOTE

l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



1.


2.



–


l

12-16

Canceling a task Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



You can cancel a running task. After a task is canceled, its state is changed from Running to Idle. NOTE


1.


2.


3.


l


12.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is performed to import data from the engineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The UMTS engineering parameters are collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


Choose Task Type > UMTS Data Import > UMTS Engineering Parameter Import from the navigation tree. Double-click the node, the New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to UMTS Engineering Parameter Import by default.

Step 3 Set the information about the task. 1.

Enter the name of timing task in Task Name.

2.

Select the task of importing engineering parameters from Task Type.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-17



Step 4 Click Next to set the time. 1.



2.



Postrequisite l

Delete a task. You can delete created tasks to save the system resources. NOTE

l

Each user can delete only the tasks that are created by him. If you are a user in the administrator group, you can delete all the user-defined tasks.

l


l


1.


2.

Select a periodic task from the task list in the right part of the window.

3.

Click Delete.

4.

In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. Then the task is deleted from the task list.

l

Suspend a task. To delay the execution of a task, you can suspend a timing task that is in the idle state. 1.


2.


Suspend a task manually. Select an existing timing tasks that are in the idle state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–

Suspend a task automatically. Select a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK. To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 12.8.12 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task.

l

Resume a task. You can restore a suspended task to wait for the dispatching. Then the status of the task is changed to idle.

12-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Only idle tasks can wait to be used.

1.


2.


Resume a task manually. Select an existing timing tasks that are in the suspended state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

–

Resume a task automatically. Select a timing task to be resumed from the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Resume Time and set its value. Click OK. To set the time for automatically resuming a task, see 12.8.12 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task.

l

Cancel a task. You can cancel a running task. The task status is changed to idle after being cancelled. NOTE


1.


2.

Select an existing running task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and choose Cancel.

3.


l

View a log. You can view the system log related to an import task. For details, see 5.3.1 Querying System Logs.

12.3 Modifying a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a UMTS user-defined timing task. If the execution of a UMTS user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 12.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink Interference Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS uplinkinterference data. 12.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS neighboringcell analysis data. 12.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS configuration data. 12.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-19



This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data. 12.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters This section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS engineering parameters.

12.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink Interference Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS uplinkinterference data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is created.

l

A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is a user-defined timing task.

l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS Uplink Interference Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters and the Extended Parameterstab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

12.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS neighboringcell analysis data.

Prerequisite l

12-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12 UMTS Centralized Task Management l

A task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is created.

l

The task is a user-defined timing task.

l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest task information in the task list. NOTE


----End

12.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS configuration data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing UMTS configuration data is created.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS CFG Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest task information in the task list. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-21




----End

12.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is created.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS Coverage Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest task information in the task list. NOTE


----End

12.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters This section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS engineering parameters.

Prerequisite

12-22

l


l

A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is created. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Context l

A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.

l


Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > UMTS Data Import > UMTS Engineering Parameter Import from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click or click Attribute to view the Attribute dialog box. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the newest task information in the task list. NOTE

If the task is running, the modified data takes effect at the next execution.

----End

12.4 Modifying a UMTS Data Deletion Task This describes how to modify a UMTS data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to the Nastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the UMTS data deletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save system resources. A UMTS data deletion task is a system timing task. You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a UMTS data deletion task, you must be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a UMTS data deletion task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 12.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM history data. 12.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS uplink-interference data. 12.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data. 12.4.4 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS configuration data. 12.4.5 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-23




Prerequisite l


l


l


l


l


Context





----End

12.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS uplink-interference data.

Prerequisite

12-24

l


l

You are a member of the Administrators user group. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Context l

The task of deleting UMTS uplink-interference data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l

You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.

l

Deleting uplink-interference data refers to deleting the uplink-interference data collected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > Delete UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

12.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting neighboring-cell analysis data refers to deleting the neighboring-cell analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-25



Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

12.4.4 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS configuration data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting UMTS configuration data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > UMTS CFG Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

12.4.5 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data. 12-26


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting coverage analysis data refers to deleting the coverage analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > UMTS Coverage Analysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End


Prerequisite l


l


l


l


l


Context

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-27



Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Backup > Data Backup from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. NOTE




----End


Prerequisite l


l


l


l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the task type of which you plan to suspend/restore. Step 3 Select a task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and select Suspend/Restore Step 4 In the Timing Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time or Resume Time as required. Step 5 Set the suspend time or resume time. For details of setting an automatic suspend time or an automatic restore time, refer to 12.8.12 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task. ----End 12-28


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)





Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context



l



l


l


----End


Prerequisite l


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-29





Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context



l


----End

12.8 Reference to the UMTS Centralized Task Management Interface This describes the interface for the UMTS centralized task management and related information such as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand the functions of the UMTS centralized task management. 12.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management This part describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters, which helps you perform the related operations. 12.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions This section describes the parameters in the Task Filter Setting dialog box. When you set filter conditions for a task list, you can refer to this section. 12.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks This section describes the parameters on the Common Parameters tab on property panels of all timing tasks. When you modify a timing task, you can refer to this section. 12-30


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



12.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task This section describes the time parameters in the New Task dialog box. When you set the time of a periodic task, you can refer to this section. 12.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task This section describes the time parameter in the New Task dialog box. When you modify the time of a one-time task, you can refer to this section. 12.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting history data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting history data. 12.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS uplink interference data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS uplink interference data. 12.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting Neighboring UMTS Cell Analysis Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting neighboring UMTS cell analysis data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting neighboring UMTS cell analysis data. 12.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS configuration data. You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting UMTS configuration data. 12.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data. 12.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes the parameters related to the task of backing up data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of backing up data. 12.8.12 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task This section describes the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks.

12.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management This part describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters, which helps you perform the related operations. After you log in to the server, the Task Management interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-2. Table 12-4 describes each element displayed in Figure 12-2.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-31



Figure 12-2 Integrated Task Management interface

Table 12-4 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface

12-32

No.

Name

Description

(1)

Navigation tree


(2)



(3)

Button panel



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



No.

Name

Description

(4)

Task list




Description

User Name

Description:

Current User



Catego ry

User Task


System Task


State

Idle

Description: Indicates that the task waits for being performed by the system.

Running


Suspend


Finished


Last Run Result

Success


Processing


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-33



Parameter

Description

Partly Success

Description:

Failed

Description:



Description:

Unknown

Description:





Description

Value Range

Task Name

Description:

Value:


l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Run Type

Once

Description:

-


Description:

-

If you select this option, the system runs the created task periodically.

12-34


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Value Range

Start Time

Description:

Value:



Description:

Value:


l


l


Description:

Value:


0-65535

Period

Run Times



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Start Time

Description

Settings

Description:

Setting method:


You can set this parameter with the following two methods:


l


l


12-35



Parameter Period Setting

Period

Run Times

Description

Settings

Description:

Value:


l


l


Description:

Value:




Parameters Name

Description

Settings

Time Setting

Description:

Setting method:




l



12.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting history data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting history data. 12-36


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Range

Description

Config Data



Unit: day




Unit: day




Performanc e Data


Unit: day

The neighbor measurement task files are limited to the GSM network. Frqlog Data

An integer from 1 to 100 Unit: day

Indicates the storage duration of the files containing the uplink ARFCN scanning data in the relevant file path on the Nastar server. The uplink ARFCN scanning data is limited to the GSM network.

Other Type Data



Unit: day

12.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS uplink interference data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS uplink interference data.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


12-37




Value Range

Item

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. All the uplink interference data that is saved N days before the time of saving the latest data is deleted from the database.

Unit: day

For example, among all the uplink interference data in the database, if the time of saving the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes all the uplink interference data saved before 2009-03-24 from the database.

12.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting Neighboring UMTS Cell Analysis Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting neighboring UMTS cell analysis data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting neighboring UMTS cell analysis data.


Value Range

Item

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. All the neighboring cell analysis data that is saved N days before the time of saving the latest data is deleted from the database.

Unit: day

For example, among all the neighboring cell analysis data in the database, if the time of saving the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes all the VIP analysis data saved before 2009-03-24 from the database.

12.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS configuration data. You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting UMTS configuration data.

12-38


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Value Range

Item

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. All the configuration data that is saved N days before the time of saving the latest data is deleted from the database.

Unit: day

For example, among all the configuration data in the database, if the time of saving the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes all the configuration data saved before 2009-03-24 from the database.

12.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data.


Value Range

Item

Data Reserve Days

7, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 180

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. All the coverage analysis data that is saved N days before the time of saving the latest data is deleted from the database.

Unit: day

For example, among all the coverage analysis data in the database, if the time of saving the latest data is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes all the VIP analysis data saved before 2009-03-24 from the database.



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Range

Description

Full Backup Time



Backup Mode

ALL, INC



12-39



Parameter

Range

Description

Backup Path

-


12.8.12 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task This section describes the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks. Table 12-5 lists the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks. Table 12-5 Time parameters of a timing task Name

Description

Settings

Suspend Time

Description:

Setting method:



Resume Time

12-40



l


l


l


l


l


Description:

Setting method:




Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13 UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis

13

UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis

About This Chapter UMTS uplink-interference analysis involves managing uplink-interference analysis tasks and querying UMTS uplink-interference analysis reports. The system analyzes the received total wideband power (RTWP) data that is sent by the NodeB. It initially locates the interfered base station by using the interference ranking function. Then, you can analyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct based on the overall RTWP trend of the selected cell. In this way, you can determine the interference features. You can also determine whether the main and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas. 13.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis The UMTS uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the RTWP data reported by NodeBs. Based on uplink-interference analysis results, you can determine whether the carriers on the existing network are experiencing interference. You can also locate antenna feeder problems by analyzing the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of the uplink. 13.2 Process of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis This describes the process of UMTS uplink-interference analysis. 13.3 Managing UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 13.4 Querying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Report This describes how to query the UMTS uplink-interference analysis report. You can query the RTWP data reported by the NodeB and initially locate the BTS that is interfered. Then, you can analyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct based on the overall RTWP trend of the selected cell. In this way, you can determine the interference features. You can also determine whether the main and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas. 13.5 Reference for the UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis GUI This describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS uplinkinterference analysis. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13-1



13.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis The UMTS uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the RTWP data reported by NodeBs. Based on uplink-interference analysis results, you can determine whether the carriers on the existing network are experiencing interference. You can also locate antenna feeder problems by analyzing the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of the uplink. Uplink interference is a key factor that affects the QoS of networks with respect to the following aspects: conversation quality, call drop, handover, congestion, network coverage, and network capacity. If interference and load cannot be distinguished, load control cannot work properly. The uplink-interference analysis function is applicable to the RTWP data reported by NodeBs. Through the uplink-interference-ranking function, you can locate the NodeB experiencing interference initially. Then, by checking the overall RTWP trend of the selected cell, you can analyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct. In this way, you can determine the interference features. You can also determine whether the main and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas. After the conditions for uplink-interference analysis are set, the Nastar performs uplinkinterference analysis on the selected cells. The analysis results are displayed in a line chart. The chart displays the values of the main and diversity antennas of each cell at each time point in different colors and shows overall RTWP trend and detailed trend of the selected cell.

13.2 Process of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis This describes the process of UMTS uplink-interference analysis. Figure 13-1 shows the general process of UMTS uplink-interference analysis.

13-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 13-1 Workflow of uplink-interference analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create an uplink interference analysis task Query an uplink interference analysis report End

Table 13-1 describes the items listed in Figure 13-1. Table 13-1 Description of the workflow of uplink-interference analysis No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to an uplinkinterference analysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to an uplinkinterference analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13-3



No.

Procedure

Description

3

Create an uplinkinterference analysis task

You can create an uplink-interference analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required configuration data and RTWP data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Query an uplinkinterference analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the uplink-interference analysis task that is successfully performed and initially locate the BTS that experiences interference. You can analyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct based on the overall RTWP trend and detailed trend of the selected cell. In this way, you can determine the interference features. You can also determine whether the main and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas.

13.3 Managing UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 13.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 13.3.2 Creating a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to create a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. By performing UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the RTWP data of each NodeB in the database at the preset time. Based on the analysis result, you can learn about the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas and the trend of the signal strength related to the selected cell, which helps you to detect abnormal interference on the network. 13.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task to meet the new requirement. 13.3.4 Checking a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to check a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task.

13.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 13-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Prerequisite l


l


l


Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management. The E2E Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Click New.... The New Task dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the basic information about the task. 1.

In Task Name, type the name of the E2E task.

2.


3.

In E2E Task List, select a task. Table 13-2 describes the mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks. Table 13-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks E2E Tasks

Analysis tasks

RTWP data task

Uplink interference analysis task

Neighboring cell data task

Co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task

Coverage data task

Coverage analysis task

Step 4 Click Next to set Begin Time and End Time, and select one or multiple NEs from the NE list. The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects that meet the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area. Step 5 Click Complete. The MML Preview dialog box is displayed, showing the MML commands related to the current theme analysis E2E task. The MML commands can be exported for future use. Step 6 Click OK. The new E2E task is displayed in the task list. ----End

Postrequisite After an E2E task is created, in the Task Management window, you can view the corresponding collection task that has been created by the system. After the collection task is executed, you can perform the corresponding data import task. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13-5



To view the attributes of a created E2E task, perform the following operations: 1.


2.




2.



13.3.2 Creating a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to create a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. By performing UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the RTWP data of each NodeB in the database at the preset time. Based on the analysis result, you can learn about the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas and the trend of the signal strength related to the selected cell, which helps you to detect abnormal interference on the network.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to be analyzed cannot exceed seven days.

Context


13-6

Choose RNC or Cell Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation tree as required. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13 UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis l



–



Postrequisite l

Deleing a task You can delete an uplink-interference analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE


1.

Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click click Delete Task.

3.


or right-

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference analysis task that is in the idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the uplink-interference analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.

Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

2.


.

Only the tasks whose Status is Idle can be suspended. Otherwise, the button is unavailable. l

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended uplink-interference analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the uplink-interference analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-7



If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. 2.


.


13.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task to meet the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

A UMTS uplink-interference analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the relevant parameters, see 13.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the object navigation tree.


13.3.4 Checking a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes how to check a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task.

Prerequisite l

13-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13 UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis l

A UMTS uplink-interference analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of an uplinkinterference analysis task


.

For detailed operations, see 13.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis Task. Checking the execution progress of the active task




----End

Postrequisite l


l

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13-9




13.4 Querying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Report This describes how to query the UMTS uplink-interference analysis report. You can query the RTWP data reported by the NodeB and initially locate the BTS that is interfered. Then, you can analyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct based on the overall RTWP trend of the selected cell. In this way, you can determine the interference features. You can also determine whether the main and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas.


Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Uplink Interference Analysis Task. The UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a cell from the left list. Then, you can view the overall RTWP trend and the difference of the main and diversity antennas of the selected cell on the right area. l

In the area on the right, –

the upper part displays the trend chart of the interference signal strength of the main and diversity antennas related to the selected cell during a time range.

–

The chart at the lower part displays the distribution of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected cell. The difference between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas at each time point is calculated first. Then, the system calculates the percentage of a difference to the total number of differences.

You can zoom in or zoom out the chart by dragging it with the mouse. l

The RTWP data displayed on the overall RTWP trend chart of the cell is not the original data. It is refreshed every minute.

----End

13-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


13.5 Reference for the UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis GUI This describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS uplinkinterference analysis. 13.5.1 Interface for UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. 13.5.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task This describes the parameters of UMTS E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS E2E task. 13.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. 13.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of UMTS Cells Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13-11



This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference analysis reports of UMTS cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference analysis reports of UMTS cells.

13.5.1 Interface for UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The uplink-interference analysis result interface displays the trends of the RTWP data in a line chart, as shown in Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Interface for the uplink-interference analysis of a cell

13-12

No. Name

Description

(1)

Cell information list

Displays the basic information about all the cells involved in an analysis task in a table.

(2)

Overall RTWP trend chart of a cell

Displays the trends of the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas of a selected cell in a time segment in a line chart.

(3)

Distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas

Displays the distribution of the difference between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected cell in column charts.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



13.5.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task This describes the parameters of UMTS E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS E2E task.

Parameter description Parameter Basic Information

Measurement Information


Indicates the name of an E2E task.

OSS Name


E2E Task List

Indicates the types of E2E tasks. You can select one of the following E2E tasks: RTWP data task, neighboring cell data task, or coverage data task.

Begin Time

Indicates the time when the task starts to run. The format is the same as that in the district setting, for example, DD/MM/YYYY.

End Time

Indicates the time when the task stops running. The format is the same as that in the district setting, for example, DD/MM/YYYY. The start time must be earlier than the end time.

NE Object

Indicates the NE related to the E2E task.

13.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task.



Indicates the name of an uplink-interference analysis task. Value range:

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive


13-13



Parameter

Description Task Type

You need to select UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type


Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l



Task Start At


Object Information

RNC

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the RNCs of the entire network.

Cell Group


13.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of UMTS Cells This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference analysis reports of UMTS cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference analysis reports of UMTS cells.


13-14

Parameter

Description

RNC ID

Indicates the ID of an RNC.

Cell ID

Indicates the ID of a cell.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of a cell, for example, Cell_1.

P-SC

Indicates the primary scrambling code (p-SC) of a cell.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Main Average Strength (dBm)

Indicates the average value of the interference strength of main antennas.

Diversity Average Strength (dBm)

Indicates the average value of the interference strength of diversity antennas.

Average Difference (Main-Diversity) (dB)

Indicates the value calculated by dividing the sum of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas at each time point in the selected time range by the total number of time points.

Standard Deviation (Main-Diversity)

Indicates the square root of the value calculated through the following steps: 1. Calculate the difference between the main and diversity values within the specified time range. 2. Calculate the average value of all the differences between the main and diversity values. 3. Calculate the sum value after squaring the values calculated after the difference between the main and diversity values at each time point subtracts the average value. 4. Calculate the square root value after the sum value is divided by the total number of time points.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


13-15


14

14 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis

UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis

About This Chapter This describes the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. The UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis involves managing neighboring cell analysis tasks, querying UMTS neighboring cell analysis reports, and exporting UMTS neighboring cell analysis reports. With the configuration data and engineering parameters, the Nastar determines the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and the priorities that need to be adjusted of a measurement cell based on MRs and events reported by UEs. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority. 14.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis This provides the basic knowledge of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis, such as the neighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for the neighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. 14.2 Process of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the process of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. 14.3 Managing UMTS Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of the tasks. 14.4 Querying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report The Nastar provides the function of querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a best cell. Then, you can configure the missing neighboring cells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based on the query results. 14.5 Exporting a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report This describes how to export a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. After querying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysis Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-1



results and save them in .csv files or .xls files. Based on the exported analysis results, you can configure neighboring relations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations between the cells on the network. 14.6 Reference for the UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI This describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

14-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



14.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis This provides the basic knowledge of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis, such as the neighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for the neighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. 14.1.1 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Function The MRs of UEs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. Based on the MRs and events reported by UEs, the Nastar can determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and the neighboring-cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a measurement cell. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority. 14.1.2 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms This describes the algorithms related to the analysis of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cells. The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells.

14.1.1 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Function The MRs of UEs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. Based on the MRs and events reported by UEs, the Nastar can determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and the neighboring-cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a measurement cell. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

Neighboring Cell Analysis Correct neighboring relations ensure that UEs located at the service boundary of a cell can be timely switched to the neighboring cell that has optimal signals. In this case, the handover gain can be obtained and internal interference of the network can be reduced. Thus, QoS and performance of the network are enhanced. Using the configuration data and engineering parameters, the Nastar can analyze the neighboring cells of a selected cell on the basis of the MRs and events reported by a UE. Based on the measurement data, the Nastar can determine the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cell priorities that need to be adjusted of the selected cell. In addition, the system can sequence the recommended priorities of the neighboring cells. By comparing the recommended priorities and the actually configured priorities, you can adjust the final priorities of the neighboring cells on the Nastar client. The Nastar displays results in a line or bar chart. It displays the neighboring cells of different types in different colors and the sequence of finally ascertained priorities. You can export the neighboring cell analysis results as a file in .csv or .xls format. Then, you can refer to this file when optimizing the neighboring relations. In measurement results, undefined neighboring cells are identified first by frequencies and primary scrambling codes (PSCs). On the network, cells that have the same frequency and same Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-3



PSC may exist around a best cell. You need to predict the signal strength based on the site location, antenna azimuth, and antenna gain of these cells and then determine the possible neighboring cells. In addition, you need to export the analysis report on the possible neighboring cells through the Nastar client.

Limitation and Impact The accuracy of neighboring cell analysis results may be affected in the following cases: l

Engineering parameters are incorrect.

l

The network is not stable during the data collection for neighboring cell analysis. For example, the air interface parameters or the network topology is not stable. Table 14-1 describes the network changes and their impacts.


Impact





Change of handover parameters


Change of the RNC topology or other topologies

Affects the execution of measurement tasks. The RNC is responsible for collecting statistical results. Thus, measurement tasks cannot be normally performed if the network topology is changed. You are advised to keep the network topology unchanged during the data collection.

NOTE

The Nastar can only be used for measuring and analyzing the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cells in the case of soft handover or softer handover.

14.1.2 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms This describes the algorithms related to the analysis of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cells. The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells. The neighboring cell analysis algorithms are the basis for determining the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells. l

The algorithm for calculating the recommended priority of a neighboring cell is as follows: 1.

Calculate the overall score of a neighboring cell. The overall score of a neighboring cell is determined together by the appearance times of the neighboring cell, the relative difference between the Ec/No of the neighboring

14-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



cell and the Ec/No of the best cell, and the absolute difference between the Ec/No of the neighboring cell and the Ec/No of the best cell. 2.

Sequence the total scores in descending order. The higher the total score is, the higher the recommended priority is. The recommended highest priority is 0.

l

The algorithm for determining a missing neighboring cell is as follows: In the case of an undefined neighboring cell, if the recommended priority of the neighboring cell is smaller than the recommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer that the neighboring cell is a missing neighboring cell.

l

The algorithm for determining a redundant neighboring cell is as follows: In the case of a defined neighboring cell, if the recommended priority of the neighboring cell is not smaller than the recommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer that the neighboring cell is a redundant neighboring cell.

14.2 Process of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the process of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. Figure 14-1 shows the general process of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. Figure 14-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task Query a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report Export a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-5



Table 14-2 describes the items listed in Figure 14-1. Table 14-2 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

3

Create a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task

You can create a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required measurement reports from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Query a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task that is successfully performed, configure missing neighboring cells, delete redundant neighboring cells, and adjust neighboring cell priorities.

5

Export a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis report

You can export a complaint assistant analysis report from the Nastar.

14.3 Managing UMTS Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of the tasks. 14.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 14-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



14.3.2 Creating a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to create a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on the configuration data and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the MRs that are reported by UEs and saved in the Nastar database to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By querying the results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locate the network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority. 14.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task as required. 14.3.4 Checking a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to check a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task, execution progress of the task, and the execution results.

14.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

Prerequisite l


l


l




2.


3.

In E2E Task List, select a task. Table 14-3 describes the mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks. Table 14-3 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

E2E Tasks

Analysis tasks

RTWP data task





14-7



E2E Tasks

Analysis tasks

Coverage data task



Postrequisite After an E2E task is created, in the Task Management window, you can view the corresponding collection task that has been created by the system. After the collection task is executed, you can perform the corresponding data import task. To view the attributes of a created E2E task, perform the following operations: 1.


2.




2.



14.3.2 Creating a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to create a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on the configuration data and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the MRs that are reported by UEs and saved in the Nastar database to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By querying 14-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



the results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locate the network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to be analyzed must within seven days.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Click in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, and Note. The value of Execution Type can be only Once Task. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Time Setting for Once Task Data. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page. l

Choose RNC or Cell Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation tree as required.

l



–


Step 7 Set Number of Configured Neighboring Cells on the Parameter Setting tab page. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task This describes how to delete a neighboring cell analysis task. You can delete the unnecessary neighboring cell analysis tasks to save system resources. NOTE

The tasks in Running state cannot be deleted.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-9



1.

Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


or right-

Suspending a task This describes how to suspend a neighboring cell analysis task. To delay the task execution, you can suspend a neighboring cell analysis task that is in idle state. After this operation, the neighboring cell analysis task is in suspended state. NOTE


1.


2.


. button

Only the tasks whose Status are Idle can be suspended. Otherwise, the unavailable. l

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended neighboring cell analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are in idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.

The task can be performed only when its Status is Suspend. If the task is not in suspended state, the button is unavailable.

14.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task as required.

Prerequisite l

14-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis l

A UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the relevant parameters, see 14.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the object navigation tree, and the Number of Configured Neighboring Cells parameter.


14.3.4 Checking a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to check a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task, execution progress of the task, and the execution results.

Prerequisite l


l

A UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-11



Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of a neighboring cell analysis task


.

You can check the attributes of the selected task or modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 14.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task. Checking the execution progress of the active task




----End

Postrequisite l


l


14-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



14.4 Querying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report The Nastar provides the function of querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a best cell. Then, you can configure the missing neighboring cells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based on the query results.


Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. All the analysis results of the selected task are displayed in the lower right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report from the shortcut menu. The Neighboring Cell Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a cell from the list of best cells in Area (2) in the Neighboring Cell Analysis window. l

For the rules of dividing areas, see 14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis.

l

The neighboring cell list in Area (4) displays all the neighboring cells of the selected cell. The Nastar determines the redundant neighboring cells, the missing neighboring cells, the neighboring cells whose priorities need to be adjusted, and the neighboring cells that require no operations based on the neighboring cell analysis algorithms. It also provides the relevant operation suggestions. For details about the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, see 14.1.2 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms. If a neighboring cell of the selected cell is unknown, the Nastar adds cellid:p-sc to identify the unknown neighboring cell. The system highlights the information about undefined neighboring cells in grey.

l

In the figure of Area (5), the normal neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and missing neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed in legends in different colors. You can select a parameter from the drop-down list box above Area (5). Then, the parameter values corresponding to each neighboring cell are displayed in a line chart. In the figure, the left axis represents the total scores, the right axis represents the value of the line chart, and the horizontal coordinate represents names of the neighboring cells. The neighboring cells are sequenced in descending order of the total scores from left to right.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-13



Step 5 Select a neighboring cell whose priority needs to be adjusted in Area (4), and then click the up or down icon above the list to adjust the priority. ----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


14.5 Exporting a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report This describes how to export a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. After querying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysis results and save them in .csv files or .xls files. Based on the exported analysis results, you can configure neighboring relations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations between the cells on the network.

Prerequisite

14-14

l


l

You have queried UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Procedure l

Perform the following operations as required. If ...

Then ...

You want to export the overview information about neighboring cells

1. Click in the UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the filename, file type, and save path, and then click Save. The saved .csv or .xls file is opened automatically so that you can view the information in it. The information in the .csv or .xls file consists of the task name, task creator, execution result, start time, end time, and best cell information.

You want to export all neighboring cell 1. Click in the UMTS Intra-Frequency optimization results Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed. If the analysis result data amount of all the neighboring cells is large, it takes some time for the dialog box to be displayed. 2. Set the save path, and then click Save. You are allowed to save only the analysis results of all neighboring cells as CSV files by RNC. The analysis result of the neighboring cells of each cell corresponds to one CSV file. The naming convention is task name_NE name_NCS.csv. Export the information about the 1. Click in the UMTS Intra-Frequency possible neighboring cells of a best cell Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the name, type and save path of the file. Then, click Save. After being saved, a CSV or XLS file is automatically open so that you can view the file conveniently. The CSV or XLS file contains the following information: the task name, creator, start time and end time of the results, and possible neighboring cells of the best cell.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-15



NOTE

l

Exporting overview information about neighboring cells refers to exporting the information about all the best cells involved in the selected analysis task.

l

Exporting all neighboring cell optimization results refers to exporting the information about the neighboring cells of each best cell.

l

Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the information about the possible neighboring cells of of each best cell.

----End

14.6 Reference for the UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI This describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. 14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis This describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. 14.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task This describes the parameters of UMTS E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS E2E task. 14.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task. 14.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This describes the parameters for querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports.

14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis This describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The analysis results of co-frequency neighboring cells can be displayed in tables or in column charts, as shown in Figure 14-2.

14-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 14-2 UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis interface

No. Name

Description

(1)

Button area

Consists of three buttons that are used for exporting the overview information about neighboring cells, all neighboring cell optimization results, and all possible neighboring cells of a best cell.

(2)

Current best cell information list Displays the information related to the current best cell.

(3)

Button area

Consists of three buttons used for adjusting the priorities of neighboring cells and restoring default priority.

(4)

Neighboring cell list

Displays all the co-frequency neighboring cells of the cell selected in area (2).

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-17



No. Name

Description

(5)

Displays the information about all the neighboring cells of the selected best cell in the combination of column charts and line charts.

Image area

NOTE If the name of a missing neighboring cell of the best cell is unknown, the neighboring cell is marked cellid:p-sc.

14.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task This describes the parameters of UMTS E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS E2E task.





OSS Name


E2E Task List


Begin Time


End Time


NE Object


14.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task.

14-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)







l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type


Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l


The start time must be earlier than the end time. You can either type the time in this field, or click to select the date and time in the Date Selection dialog box. This parameter is valid for only one-time tasks.

Task Start At

Indicates the time when the analysis task is executed. This start time must be equal to or later than the end time specified by Data Time Scope.

Object Information


RNC

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the RNCs on the entire network.

Cell Group

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the cell groups on the entire network.

Number of Configured Neighboring Cells

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that you are recommended to configure. N can be any integer ranging from 0 to 32. The default value is 30.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


14-19



14.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This describes the parameters for querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. NOTE

For details about the rules of dividing areas, see 14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis.

Parameters related to the general information about a best cell

14-20

Parameter

Description

RNC ID

Indicates the ID of the RNC.

Cell ID

Indicates the ID of the best cell.

Cell Name

Indicates the name of the best cell, for example, Cell_1.

P-SC

Indicates the primary scrambling code (P-SC) of the best cell.

Downlink ARFCN

Indicates the downlink absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) of the best cell.

Number of Measurement Reports

Indicates the number of MRs received by the best cell.

Average Ec/No (dB)

Indicates the average Ec/No of the best cell.

Average RSCP (dBm)

Indicates the average Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the best cell.

Number of the 1A1C Events

Indicates the total number of 1A/1C events triggered by neighboring cells.

Number of Missing Neighboring Cells

Indicates the number of missing intra-frequency neighboring cells among the undefined neighboring cells of the best cell.


Indicates the number of redundant intra-frequency neighboring cells among the defined neighboring cells of the best cell.

Number of Configured IntraFrequency Neighboring Cells

Indicates the number of defined intra-frequency neighboring cells of the best cell.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameters related to the detailed information about neighboring cells

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Neighboring RNC ID

Indicates the number of the RNC that the neighboring cell belongs to.

Neighboring Cell ID

Indicates the ID of a neighboring cell.

Neighboring Cell Name

Indicates the name of a neighboring cell, for example, Cell_1.

P-SC

Indicates the P-SC of a neighboring cell.

Neighboring Cell Type

Indicates the type of a neighboring cell. The options are Defined Neighboring Cell (reserved), Defined Neighboring Cell (redundant), Undefined Neighboring Cell (missing), and Undefined Neighboring Cell (non-operation).

Total Score

Indicates the total score of each neighboring cell. The total score is calculated through the neighboring cell algorithm based on each measurement result.

Final Priority

Indicates the final priority after the manual adjustment based on the recommended priority.

Recommended Priority

Indicates the recommended priority of a neighboring cell based on the total score of the neighboring cell. The higher the total score, the higher is the recommended priority.

Configured Priority

Indicates the priority of an intra-frequency neighboring cell in the configuration data.

Average RSCP of Neighboring Cells (dBm)

Indicates the average RSCP of a neighboring cell in all the MRs that contain the information about this neighboring cell.

Average ECNO of Neighboring Cells (dB)

Indicates the average Ec/No of a neighboring cell in all the MRs that contain the information about this neighboring cell.

Average ECNO of Primary Cells (dB)

Indicates the average Ec/No of the best cell in all the MRs that contains the current neighboring cell.

Average RSCP of Primary Cells (dBm)

Indicates the average RSCP of the best cell in all the measurement reports that contains the current neighboring cell.

MR Number of the Neighboring Cell in the Monitor Set/ Detective Set

Indicates the number of MRs that contain the current neighboring cell in the monitor set or detective set.

MR Number of the Neighboring Cell in the Active Set

Indicates the number of MRs that contain the current neighboring cell in the active set.


14-21


14-22


Parameter

Description

Number of the 1A/ 1C Events

Indicates the number of 1A/1C events triggered by the current neighboring cell.

Number of the 1D Events

Indicates the number of 1D events triggered by the current neighboring cell.

Distance (km)

Indicates the distance between the best cell and the current neighboring cell.

Neighboring Cell Service Type

Indicates the type of the neighboring cell. The options are indoor and outdoor. By knowing the types of neighboring cells, you can avoid deleting important neighboring cells.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15 UMTS Coverage Analysis

15

UMTS Coverage Analysis

About This Chapter UMTS coverage analysis involves managing UMTS coverage analysis tasks, querying UMTS coverage analysis reports, and exporting UMTS coverage analysis reports. The Nastar analyzes the MRs sent by a UE and directly displays the information about coverage status, signal quality, and user distribution of the measurement cell through the GUI. It helps you to quickly locate the problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS on the radio network. 15.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Coverage Analysis The UMTS coverage analysis function enables you to analyze the MR sent by a UE. The analysis results help you to check the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network. 15.2 Process of UMTS Coverage Analysis This describes the process of UMTS coverage analysis. 15.3 Managing a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to manage UMTS coverage analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can also view the status and execution progress of such a task. 15.4 Querying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report This describes how to query a UTMS coverage analysis report. You can query the MRs sent by a UE in a time segment. The query results help you to check the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network. 15.5 Exporting a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report This describes how to export a UMTS coverage analysis report and how to export a UMTS coverage analysis original data. After querying coverage analysis results, you can export the found analysis results as .csv files. Based on the exported analysis results, you can determine the coverage of the measurement cells on the network. Also, you can export the original data to compare with the analysis results. 15.6 Reference for the UMTS Coverage Analysis GUI

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-1



This describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS coverage analysis.

15-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



15.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Coverage Analysis The UMTS coverage analysis function enables you to analyze the MR sent by a UE. The analysis results help you to check the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network. The MR sent by an UE consists of downlink RSCP and Ec/No, and the TP when the UE is connected. After you specify the conditions for coverage analysis, the Nastar analyzes the coverage of the selected cell and then displays the analysis results in a two-dimensional chart, a threedimensional chart, and a table. l

The two-dimensional chart displays the AMR(Adaptive MultiRate), VP(Video Phone), BE (Backround Interactive), AMR+BE, and OTHER services. For each service, three counters, namely, RSCP_DL, Ec/No_DL, and TP counters.

l

The three-dimensional chart displays the PS(Packet Switched) and CS(Circuit Switching) services. For each service, three counters, namely, RSCP_DL, Ec/No_DL, and TP, are involved.

l

The summary table displays the statistics on the counters that correspond to the services in the two-dimensional chart.

The analysis results can be exported as a .csv file. You can optimize the cell coverage based on the analysis results.

15.2 Process of UMTS Coverage Analysis This describes the process of UMTS coverage analysis. Figure 15-1 shows the general process of coverage analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-3



Figure 15-1 Workflow of coverage analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create a coverage analysis task

Query a coverage analysis report

Export a coverage analysis report

End

Table 15-1 describes the items listed in Figure 15-1. Table 15-1 Description of the workflow of coverage analysis No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to a coverage analysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a coverage analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

15-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



No.

Procedure

Description

3

Create a coverage analysis task

You can create a coverage analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required measurement data and configuration data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Query a coverage analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the coverage analysis task that is successfully performed, learn about the coverage of the selected measurement cell on the network, and determine whether the problems such as weak coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS on the existing network.

5

Export a coverage analysis report

You can export a coverage analysis report from the Nastar or export coverage analysis original datas.

15.3 Managing a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to manage UMTS coverage analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can also view the status and execution progress of such a task. 15.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 15.3.2 Creating a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to create a UMTS coverage analysis task. By creating UMTS coverage analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyze the MRs sent by a UE. Based on the analysis results, you can learn about the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network. 15.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task as required. 15.3.4 Checking a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to check a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can check the attributes of the UMTS coverage analysis task, execution progress of the task, and the execution results.

15.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-5



Prerequisite l


l


l




2.


3.


Analysis tasks

RTWP data task




Coverage data task



Postrequisite After an E2E task is created, in the Task Management window, you can view the corresponding collection task that has been created by the system. After the collection task is executed, you can perform the corresponding data import task. 15-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



To view the attributes of a created E2E task, perform the following operations: 1.


2.




2.



15.3.2 Creating a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to create a UMTS coverage analysis task. By creating UMTS coverage analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyze the MRs sent by a UE. Based on the analysis results, you can learn about the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Choose RNC or Cell Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation tree as required. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-7


15 UMTS Coverage Analysis l

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. –


–

You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search range.

Step 7 On the Parameter Setting tab page, set filtering conditions. By default, the system provides 12 filtering conditions. You can add or modify filtering conditions. l

Adding a filtering condition Select a counter under a type of service. Set the formula related to the filtering condition, and then click Add. The two-dimensional chart supports the setting of the formula with either one counter or two counters. The three-dimensional chart supports the setting of the formula with only two counters.

l

Modifying a filtering condition In the area of the filtering conditions, select the target formula, and then modify the formula in the condition setting area. Then, click Apply.

l

Deleting a filtering condition In the area of the filtering conditions, select a target formula, and then click Delete.

Modifying or deleting the filtering condition of a task whose Status is Running or Complete is not allowed. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete a coverage analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE

The tasks that are in the Running status cannot be deleted.

1.

Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


or right-

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend a coverage analysis task that is in the idle state. After this operation, the coverage analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the coverage analysis tasks that are not suspended.

15-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



1.


2.


. button is


Resuming a task You can resume a suspended coverage analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the coverage analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.


15.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task as required.

Prerequisite l


l

A UMTS coverage analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The

Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-9


15 UMTS Coverage Analysis l

For details about the relevant parameters, see 15.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Coverage Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the object navigation tree, and the filtering conditions of the analysis task.


15.3.4 Checking a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task This describes how to check a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can check the attributes of the UMTS coverage analysis task, execution progress of the task, and the execution results.

Prerequisite l


l

A UMTS coverage analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of a coverage analysis task


.

You can check the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 15.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task. Checking the execution progress of the active task

15-10



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Purpose

Operation


Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results of the previous execution of the selected task in the Last Running Result column. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. NOTE In the result list, if the result information about tasks that fail to be executed at a certain period already exists in the database, you can right-click the results, and then choose Analyze Result Again from the shortcut menu to analyze the results of this period again. Only the results of tasks that fail to be executed are analyzed again.

----End

Postrequisite l


l


15.4 Querying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report This describes how to query a UTMS coverage analysis report. You can query the MRs sent by a UE in a time segment. The query results help you to check the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network.


Procedure Step 1 Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-11



If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Coverage Analysis from the shortcut menu. The UMTS Coverage Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a cell under RNC Overview Report or Cell Group Overview Report from the list on the left pane. View the two-dimensional chart, three-dimensional chart, and summary table on the right pane. l

In the two-dimensional chart, the information about the AMR, VP, BE, AMR+BE, and Other services is displayed on five tab pages, respectively. Each tab page displays the RSCP, ECNO, and TP counters of the corresponding service in a column chart and a counter accumulation distribution line chart. The two-dimensional chart contains two vertical axes and one horizontal axis. The horizontal axis represents the value of each counter. The left vertical axis represents the percentage of the number of MRs of each counter to the total number of MRs. The right vertical axis represents the value in the line chart. The value of any counter on the horizontal axis is taken as the benchmark. The values (indicating the sum of the MR percentage of each counter) that are equal to or smaller than the benchmark value are displayed on the right vertical axis.

l

In the three-dimensional chart, each two of the three counters (RSCP, ECNO, and TP) are grouped for the PS and CS services. Therefore, you can find six tabs in the chart. The distribution of different counters is identified in different colors. After you type the value ranges of the counters corresponding to the horizontal and vertical axes in the formula area, the system automatically calculates the sum of the density of the counter distribution in this overlapped area.

l

The summary table displays the statistics on the counters that correspond to the services in the two-dimensional chart.

----End

Postrequisite

15-12

l


l



–


–

Right-click the chart, and then choose Print from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Page Setup dialog box, set print properties, and then click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15 UMTS Coverage Analysis –


l


15.5 Exporting a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report This describes how to export a UMTS coverage analysis report and how to export a UMTS coverage analysis original data. After querying coverage analysis results, you can export the found analysis results as .csv files. Based on the exported analysis results, you can determine the coverage of the measurement cells on the network. Also, you can export the original data to compare with the analysis results.

Prerequisite l


l

You have queried UMTS coverage analysis reports.

Context Exporting the overview information about coverage analysis refers to exporting the general information about all the measurement cells involved in the selected analysis task.

Procedure l

Export UMTS coverage aAnalysis overview. Click

l

Export UMTS coverage analysis original data. Click

l

in the UMTS Coverage Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed.

in the UMTS Coverage Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed.

Set the save path, and then click Save. The saved .csv file is opened automatically so that you can view the information in it. The information in the .csv file consists of the coverage information about a measurement cell.

----End

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-13



15.6 Reference for the UMTS Coverage Analysis GUI This describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS coverage analysis. 15.6.1 Interface for UMTS Coverage Analysis This describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. 15.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task This describes the parameters of UMTS E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS E2E task. 15.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Coverage Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS coverage analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS coverage analysis task. 15.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Coverage Analysis Reports This describes the parameters for checking UMTS coverage analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying a UMTS coverage analysis report.

15.6.1 Interface for UMTS Coverage Analysis This describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The analysis results of coverage analysis can be displayed in a two-dimensional chart, a threedimensional chart, and a summary table, as shown in Figure 15-2, Figure 15-3 and Figure 15-4.

15-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 15-2 Interface for the coverage analysis (1)

No. Name

Description

(1)

Button area

The buttons used for export UMTS Coverage Analysis Overview and export UMTS Coverage Analysis Original Data.

(2)

Cell object navigation tree

You can precisely locate a cell object through the navigation tree.

(3)

Search panel

You can precisely locate a cell object through the search condition.

(4)

Filtering condition area

The system filters counters according to the filtering formula that is set during the creation of analysis tasks and then displays the result counters.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-15



No. Name (5)

Description

Two-dimensional chart area The information about the AMR, VP, BE, AMR+BE, and Other services is displayed on five tab pages, respectively. Each tab page displays the RSCP, ECNO, and TP counters of the corresponding service in a column chart and a counter accumulation distribution line chart.


No. Name (6)

15-16

Description

Three-dimensional chart area In the three-dimensional chart, each two of the three counters (RSCP, ECNO, and TP) are grouped for the PS and CS services. Therefore, you can find six tabs in the chart.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



No. Name

Description

(7)

After you type the values of the counters corresponding to the horizontal and vertical axes in area (6), the system automatically calculates the sum of the density of the counter distribution in this overlapped area.

Formula area


No. Name (8)

Description

Summary table area The summary table displays the statistics on the counters that correspond to the services in the two-dimensional chart.

15.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task This describes the parameters of UMTS E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS E2E task. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


15-17







OSS Name


E2E Task List


Begin Time


End Time


NE Object


15.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Coverage Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS coverage analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS coverage analysis task.


15-18


Indicates the name of a coverage analysis task. Value range: l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree.

Execution Type



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l



Task Start At

Indicates the time when the analysis task is executed. The time specified in this field should not precede the end time specified in the Data Time Scope field.

Object Information

RNC

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the RNCs of the entire network.

Cell Group


Parameters

The system provides 12 default filtering conditions. You can add, delete, or apply the filtering conditions.

15.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Coverage Analysis Reports This describes the parameters for checking UMTS coverage analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying a UMTS coverage analysis report.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Service Type

Indicates the type of service. The coverage analysis involves the following types of services: AMR, VP, BE, AMR+BE, and OTHER.

Total Number of TP Measurement Reports

Indicates the total number of TP MRs of the selected cell, which is calculated based on the service type.

Total Number of RSCP Measurement Reports

Indicates the total number of RSCP MRs of the selected cell, which is calculated based on the service type.


15-19



15-20

Parameter

Description

Total Number of ECNO Measurement Reports

Indicates the total number of Ec/No MRs of the selected cell, which is calculated based on the service type.

Average TP

Indicates the average TP of the selected cell in the selected time segment, which is calculated based on the service type.

Average RSCP(dBm)

Indicates the average RSCP of the selected cell in the selected time segment, which is calculated based on the service type.

Average ECNO(dB)

Indicates the average Ec/No of the selected cell in the selected time segment, which is calculated based on the service type.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16 CDMA Centralized Task Management

16

CDMA Centralized Task Management

About This Chapter The Nastar provides centralized management for the CDMA timing tasks. By setting CDMA timing tasks, you can collect data from the EMS periodically, save the data as a file in certain path on the Nastar system, and import the data from the file to the database periodically for future reference. In addition, you can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save resource space of the system. By using the function of CDMA centralized task management, you can create, modify, delete, suspend, resume, or cancel a CDMA timing task. In addition, you can view information such as status and progress of a task. 16.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management Centralized task management involves the concepts such as types of timing tasks, parameters for task scheduling, and states of timing tasks. Learning the basic knowledge of the centralized task management helps you perform the operations related to the centralized task management. 16.2 Creating a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to create CDMA timing tasks. Thus, you can create CDMA timing tasks by setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of network maintenance. 16.3 Modifying a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a CDMA user-defined timing task. If the execution of a CDMA user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 16.4 Modifying a CDMA Data Deletion Task This describes how to modify a CDMA data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to the Nastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the CDMA data deletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save system resources. A CDMA data deletion task is a system timing task. You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a CDMA data deletion task, you must be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a CDMA data deletion task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 16.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of backing up data. 16.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-1



You can set an automatic suspend time or an automatic resume time for a timing task. In this situation, the Nastar automatically suspends the task or resumes the task. 16.7 Viewing Timing Tasks Through the Nastar function of viewing timing tasks, you can view the status of all timing tasks in a centralized manner. This helps you adjust the concerned timing tasks according to actual conditions. 16.8 Reference to the CDMA Centralized Task Management Interface This describes the interface for the CDMA centralized task management and related information such as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand the functions of the CDMA centralized task management.

16-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



16.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management Centralized task management involves the concepts such as types of timing tasks, parameters for task scheduling, and states of timing tasks. Learning the basic knowledge of the centralized task management helps you perform the operations related to the centralized task management.



Description

One-time task


Periodic task


Tasks Divided According to Task Features According to different task features, the Nastar divides the managed tasks into two types: system timing tasks and user timing tasks. Table 16-2 describes the meanings of each task type. Table 16-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features Task Type

Description

System Timing Tasks


User Timing Tasks


16.1.2 System Timing Tasks The system timing task is created during the installation or upgrade of the Nastar system. User dbuser is the Creator of the system timing task. The Nastar uses Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



16-3


16 CDMA Centralized Task Management NOTE

l


l




l

The Nastar uses


16.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters The task scheduling parameters are the parameters related to the task execution type, consisting of task start time, task execution period, and execution times. Table 16-3 describes the task scheduling parameters. Table 16-3 Description of the task description parameters Parameter

Description

Task Type


Task start time


Period

l


l


l


Run Times


For example, if the scheduling parameters of the data collection task are:

16-4

l


l

Start time = 2006-10-21 09:07:28

l


l

Period execution times = 0 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)







l


l


l


l


l



16.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks This describes how to customize the interface for managing timing tasks. The system can display timing tasks of the specified function type in the navigation tree or display the timing tasks that meet the conditions in the task list. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-5





Operation




16.2 Creating a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to create CDMA timing tasks. Thus, you can create CDMA timing tasks by setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of network maintenance.


l

l

16-6

Creating a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data, Creating a Task of Importing CDMA UplinkInterference- Ranking Analysis Data, Creating a Task of Importing the CDMA


Then ...




Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If you need to ...

l

l

Uplink- InterferenceSpectrum Analysis Data, Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data, Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data,


Then ...



16.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data A task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is performed to import data from the VIP KPI analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data. 16.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data A task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is performed to import data from the uplink-interference-ranking analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA uplinkinterference-ranking analysis data. 16.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is performed to import data from the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database. This describes how to create a task of importing the CDMA uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis data. 16.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data A task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from the neighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data. 16.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data A task of importing CDMA configuration data is performed to import data from the configuration data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA configuration data.

16.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data A task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is performed to import data from the VIP KPI analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-7



Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The data related to CDMA VIP KPI analysis is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data by default.



2.

Select the VIP KPI analysis data import task from Task Type.




2.



Postrequisite l


16-8

l


l


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



1.


2.



–


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-9



1.


2.


3.


l


16.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-InterferenceRanking Analysis Data A task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is performed to import data from the uplink-interference-ranking analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA uplinkinterference-ranking analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Data by default.



2.

From Task Type, select the task of importing uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.

Step 4 Click Next to set the execution time of the task and other related parameters. 16-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



1.



2.



Postrequisite l


l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-11



1.


2.



–


l



1.


2.


3.


l


16.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing the CDMA UplinkInterference-Spectrum Analysis Data A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is performed to import data from the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database. This describes how to create a task of importing the CDMA uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis data.

Prerequisite

16-12

l


l


l


l

The CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Context l

A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l



You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Data by default.



2.

From Task Type, select the task of importing the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.


Click


You can also set the start time in the Start Time area. NOTE


2.



Postrequisite l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-13


4.



l



2.



–


l



1.


2.



–


l



16-14

1.


2.

Select the running task from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Cancel. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



3.


l


16.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data A task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from the neighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The data related to CDMA neighboring-cell analysis is collected to the Nastar server.

l

A task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Context


You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (1X) or Import CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO). The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (1X) or Import CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO) by default.



2.

Select the neighboring-cell analysis data import task from Task Type.




2. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Set Period and Run Times. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-15




Postrequisite l


l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.



–


l



1.


2.


16-16

Resuming a task manually Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Select the timing task that is in the suspended state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. –


l



1.


2.


3.


l


16.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data A task of importing CDMA configuration data is performed to import data from the configuration data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA configuration data.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The CDMA configuration data is collected to the Nastar server. For details of creating the performance data collection task, see 7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task.

Context l

A task of importing CDMA configuration data is a user-defined timing task.

l


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-17




You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click Import CDMA CFG Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import CDMA CFG Data by default.



2.





2.



Postrequisite l


l


l


l


1.


2.


3.

Click Delete.

4.


l



2.


16-18

Suspending a task manually Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Select the timing task that is in the idle state from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. –


l



1.


2.



–


l



1.


2.


3.


l


16.3 Modifying a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task The Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a CDMA user-defined timing task. If the execution of a CDMA user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-19



16.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data. 16.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplinkinterference-ranking analysis data. 16.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis data. 16.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA neighboring cell analysis data. 16.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA configuration data.

16.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is created.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest task information in the task list. NOTE


----End 16-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



16.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-InterferenceRanking Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplinkinterference-ranking analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is created.

l

A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

16.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-InterferenceSpectrum Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is created.

l

A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is a user-defined timing task.

Context

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-21


16 CDMA Centralized Task Management l


Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

16.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA neighboring cell analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing CDMA neighboring cell analysis data is created.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (1X) or Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA IntraFrequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO) from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest task information in the task list. 16-22


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




----End

16.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA configuration data.

Prerequisite l


l

A task of importing CDMA configuration data is created.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA CFG Data from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest task information in the task list. NOTE


----End

16.4 Modifying a CDMA Data Deletion Task This describes how to modify a CDMA data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to the Nastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the CDMA data deletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the database at the preset time to save system resources. A CDMA data deletion task is a system timing task. You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a CDMA data deletion task, you must be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a CDMA data deletion task is complete, you cannot modify the task. 16.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSM history data. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-23



16.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA VIP KPI analysis data. 16.4.3 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data. 16.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data. 16.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA neighboring cell analysis data. 16.4.6 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA configuration data.


Prerequisite l


l


l


l


l


Context



Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. 16-24


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




----End

16.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA VIP KPI analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting VIP KPI analysis data refers to deleting the VIP KPI analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

16.4.3 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-InterferenceRanking Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-25



Context l

The task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting uplink-interference-ranking analysis data refers to deleting the uplinkinterference-ranking analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

16.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-InterferenceSpectrum Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data refers to deleting the uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. 16-26


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

16.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA neighboring cell analysis data.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting CDMA neighboring cell analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l

Deleting neighboring cell analysis data refers to deleting the neighboring cell analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (1X) Maintenance or Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA IntraFrequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO) Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End

16.4.6 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Configuration Data This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting CDMA configuration data. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-27



Prerequisite l


l


l

The task of deleting CDMA configuration data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA CFG Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page. Step 5 Click OK. You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list. NOTE


----End


Prerequisite l


l


l


l


l


Context

16-28


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Backup > Data Backup from the navigation tree on the left. Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages. NOTE




----End


Prerequisite l


l


l


l


l


Context

Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed. Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the task type of which you plan to suspend/restore. Step 3 Select a task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and select Suspend/Restore Step 4 In the Timing Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time or Resume Time as required. Step 5 Set the suspend time or resume time. For details of setting an automatic suspend time or an automatic restore time, refer to 16.8.8 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task. ----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-29





Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context



l



l


l


----End


Prerequisite

16-30

l


l

At least one timing task exists. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)





Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context



l


----End

16.8 Reference to the CDMA Centralized Task Management Interface This describes the interface for the CDMA centralized task management and related information such as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand the functions of the CDMA centralized task management. 16.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management This part describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters, which helps you perform the related operations. 16.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions This section describes the parameters in the Task Filter Setting dialog box. When you set filter conditions for a task list, you can refer to this section. 16.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks This section describes the parameters on the Common Parameters tab on property panels of all timing tasks. When you modify a timing task, you can refer to this section. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-31



16.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task This section describes the time parameters in the New Task dialog box. When you set the time of a periodic task, you can refer to this section. 16.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task This section describes the time parameter in the New Task dialog box. When you modify the time of a one-time task, you can refer to this section. 16.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting history data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting history data. 16.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data This describes the parameters related to the task of backing up data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of backing up data. 16.8.8 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task This section describes the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks.

16.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management This part describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters, which helps you perform the related operations. After you log in to the server, the Task Management interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 16-2. Table 16-4 describes each element displayed in Figure 16-2. Figure 16-2 Integrated Task Management interface

16-32


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Table 16-4 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface No.

Name

Description

(1)

Navigation tree


(2)



(3)

Button panel


(4)

Task list




Description

User Name

Description:

Current User



Catego ry

User Task


System Task


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-33



Parameter

Description

State

Description:

Idle

Indicates that the task waits for being performed by the system. Running


Suspend


Finished


Last Run Result

Success


Processing


Partly Success

Description:

Failed

Description:



Description:

Unknown

Description:




16-34


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Description

Value Range

Task Name

Description:

Value:


l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Run Type

Once

Description:

-


Description:

-

If you select this option, the system runs the created task periodically. Start Time

Period

Run Times

Description:

Value:



Description:

Value:


l


l


Description:

Value:


0-65535


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-35




Period Setting

Start Time

Period

Run Times

Description

Settings

Description:

Setting method:


You can set this parameter with the following two methods: l


l

to select the Click date and time in the Date/Time Selection dialog box.

Description:

Value:


l


l


Description:

Value:




16-36


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameters Name

Description

Settings

Time Setting

Description:

Setting method:




l



16.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting history data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting history data.


Range

Description

Config Data



Unit: day




Unit: day




Performanc e Data


Unit: day

The neighbor measurement task files are limited to the GSM network. Frqlog Data

An integer from 1 to 100 Unit: day

Indicates the storage duration of the files containing the uplink ARFCN scanning data in the relevant file path on the Nastar server. The uplink ARFCN scanning data is limited to the GSM network.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


16-37



Parameter

Range

Description

Other Type Data



Unit: day



Range

Description

Full Backup Time



Backup Mode

ALL, INC


Backup Path

-


16.8.8 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task This section describes the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks. Table 16-5 lists the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks.

16-38


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Table 16-5 Time parameters of a timing task Name

Description

Settings

Suspend Time

Description:

Setting method:



Resume Time

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



l


l


l


l


l


Description:

Setting method:




16-39


17 CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis

17

CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis

About This Chapter CDMA uplink interference analysis consists of uplink-interference-ranking analysis and uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis. By using the uplink-interference-ranking analysis function, you can know the overall interference status of the selected carrier. This helps you to check whether any external interference exists on the network. If a carrier has external interference, you can enable the Nastar to display the relevant spectrum data in a chart by using the uplink-interferencespectrum analysis function. Thus, you can check the interference features. 17.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Uplink-Interference Analysis The CDMA uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the uplink level measurement data reported by BTSs. The analysis is classified into two types: uplinkinterference-ranking analysis and uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Based on uplinkinterference-ranking analysis results, you can determine whether the carriers on a network are experiencing external interference. The distribution chart of the difference between the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the uplink can help you to locate antenna feeder problems. If any carrier is experiencing external interference, the network optimization engineers can perform the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis function to analyze the spectrum and period of the external interference. As a result, interference problems can be located quickly. 17.2 Process of CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the process of CDMA uplink interference analysis. 17.3 Managing CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 17.4 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Report This describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report. By querying the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report, you can analyze the uplink-level measurement data reported by the BTS during a time segment, obtain the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of concurrent users of the selected carriers during a time range, and learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users. The Nastar ranks the selected carriers according to the query result and then helps you to determine whether any external interference exists on the network. 17.5 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Report Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17-1



This describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. By querying the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task, you can analyze the scanning data (reported by the BTS) about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands and enables the Nastar to display the distribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze the spectral and periodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-related problems. 17.6 Reference for the CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA uplinkinterference analysis.

17-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



17.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Uplink-Interference Analysis The CDMA uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the uplink level measurement data reported by BTSs. The analysis is classified into two types: uplinkinterference-ranking analysis and uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Based on uplinkinterference-ranking analysis results, you can determine whether the carriers on a network are experiencing external interference. The distribution chart of the difference between the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the uplink can help you to locate antenna feeder problems. If any carrier is experiencing external interference, the network optimization engineers can perform the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis function to analyze the spectrum and period of the external interference. As a result, interference problems can be located quickly. Uplink interference is a key factor that affects the QoS of networks with respect to the following aspects: conversation quality, call drop, handover, congestion, network coverage, and network capacity. If interference and load cannot be distinguished, load control cannot work properly. After the conditions for uplink-interference-ranking analysis are set, the Nastar performs uplinkinterference-ranking analysis on the selected carriers. The analysis results are displayed in a line chart. The chart displays the values and trends of the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of subscribers of each carrier in different colors. After the conditions for uplink-interference-spectrum analysis are set, the Nastar performs uplink-interference-spectrum analysis on the selected carriers. The analysis results are displayed in a line chart. In the chart, the average interference strength of all the frequency sampling points of each carrier in a time segment is displayed in a color. In addition, the values and trends of the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of each sampling frequency point at each time point within a selected time segment are displayed in different colors.

17.2 Process of CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis This describes the process of CDMA uplink interference analysis. Figure 17-1 shows the process of CDMA uplink interference analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17-3



Figure 17-1 Workflow of uplink interference analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create an uplinkinterference-ranking analysis task Querying a uplinkinterference-ranking analysis report

Whether external interference exists

No

Yes Create an uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis task Query an uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis report End

Table 17-1 describes the items listed in Figure 17-1.

17-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Table 17-1 Description of the workflow of uplink interference analysis No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to an uplink interference analysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to an uplink interference analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3

Create an uplinkinterferenceranking analysis task

You can create an uplink-interference-ranking analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required uplink spectrum scanning log, uplink RSSI measurement data, and configuration data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Querying a uplinkinterferenceranking analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the uplink-interferenceranking analysis task that is successfully performed. In addition, you can query the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected test carrier on the network, the number of subscribers, and the trend of subscribers. The Nastar ranks the selected carriers according to the query result and thus helps you to determine whether any external interference exists on the network.

5

Create an uplinkinterferencespectrum analysis task

You can create an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required uplink spectrum scanning log, uplink RSSI measurement data, and configuration data from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

5

Query an uplinkinterferencespectrum analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the uplink-interferencespectrum analysis task that is successfully performed. The Nastar analyzes the scanning data about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands in the database at a preset time and displays the distribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Based on the information, you can analyze the spectral and periodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-related problems.


17-5



17.3 Managing CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of a task. 17.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 17.3.2 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task This describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. By performing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the uplink-level measurement data reported by the BTS in the database at the preset time. By querying the analysis results of a selected carrier, you can learn about the corresponding RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of concurrent users during a time range, and you can also learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users. Then, you can determine whether any external interference exists on the network. 17.3.3 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task This describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. By performing uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the scanning data about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands in the database at the preset time and displays the distribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze the spectral and periodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-related problems. 17.3.4 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task to meet the new requirement. 17.3.5 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task to meet the new requirement. 17.3.6 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task This describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. 17.3.7 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task This describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interferencespectrum analysis task.

17.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

17-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Prerequisite l


l


l




2.


3.


Analysis tasks

VIP subscriber monitoring task

VIP KPI analysis task

Interference data task

Uplink-interference-ranking analysis task

Spectrum data task

Uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task

1x neighboring cell data task


DO neighboring cell data task


Complaint analysis data task

Complaint assistant analysis task

Step 4 Click Next to set Begin Time and End Time, and select one or multiple NEs from the NE list. The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects that meet the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area. Step 5 Click Complete. The MML Preview dialog box is displayed, showing the MML commands related to the current theme analysis E2E task. The MML commands can be exported for future use. Step 6 Click OK. The new E2E task is displayed in the task list. ----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17-7





2.




2.



17.3.2 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task This describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. By performing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the uplink-level measurement data reported by the BTS in the database at the preset time. By querying the analysis results of a selected carrier, you can learn about the corresponding RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of concurrent users during a time range, and you can also learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users. Then, you can determine whether any external interference exists on the network.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context

Procedure in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Step 1 Click Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, and Note. The value of Execution Type can be only Once Task. 17-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Time Setting for Once Task Data. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page. l

Choose BSC or Carrier Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation tree as required.

l



–


Step 7 Set Filtering Conditions of Datasource for TopN Analysis on the Parameter Setting tab page. You can flexibly set the main interference threshold and the diversity interference threshold. That is, you can set either of the thresholds or set both thresholds. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete an uplink-interference-ranking analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE


1.

Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference-ranking analysis task that is in the idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference-ranking analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

Only the uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks that are not suspended can be scheduled by the system.

1.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17-9



2.


.


button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended uplink-interference-ranking analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the uplink-interference-ranking analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.


17.3.3 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task This describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. By performing uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the scanning data about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands in the database at the preset time and displays the distribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze the spectral and periodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-related problems.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l


Context

Procedure in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Step 1 Click Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, and Note. The value of Execution Type can be only Once Task. 17-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Time Setting for Once Task Data. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page. l


l



–



Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE


1.

Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task that is in the idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.


2.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


. button is

17-11


17 CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis l

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.


17.3.4 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task to meet the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the relevant parameters, see 17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the object navigation tree, and the Filtering Conditions of Datasource for TopN Analysis parameter.

Step 4 Click Complete. ----End 17-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



17.3.5 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task You can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task to meet the new requirement.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Click the CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis Task node from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the relevant parameters, see 17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, and the information about the object navigation tree.


17.3.6 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task This describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task is created.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17-13



Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: If you need to ...

Then ...

Checking the attributes of an uplinkinterference-ranking analysis task


.

You can view the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 17.3.4 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task. Check the execution progress of a task.




----End

Postrequisite l


l

17-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




17.3.7 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task This describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interferencespectrum analysis task.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of an uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis task


.

You can check the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 17.3.5 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-InterferenceSpectrum Analysis Task. Checking the execution progress of the active task

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



17-15



Purpose

Operation



----End

Postrequisite l


l


17.4 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Report This describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report. By querying the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report, you can analyze the uplink-level measurement data reported by the BTS during a time segment, obtain the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of concurrent users of the selected carriers during a time range, and learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users. The Nastar ranks the selected carriers according to the query result and then helps you to determine whether any external interference exists on the network.

Prerequisite You have logged in to the Nastar client. 17-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task. The CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a test carrier from the list on the left of the window. Then, you can view the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected carrier, the number of concurrent users, the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users, and the distribution chart of the differences between the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas in the area on the right. l

The left area displays the minimum average values of the RSSIs. By default, the minimum average values are in a sequence of descending order. You can adjust the sequence as required.

l

In the area on the right: –

The chart at the upper part displays the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected carrier during the measurement period, the number of concurrent users, and the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users.

–

The chart at the lower part displays the distribution of the differences between the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected carrier. The difference between the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas at each time point is calculated first. Then, the system calculates the percentage of a difference to the total number of differences.

You can zoom in or zoom out the trend chart by dragging it with the mouse. ----End

Postrequisite l


l

To query chart properties, and save, print, and resize the chart in the chart area, perform the following operations:

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

–


–


–

Right-click the chart, and then choose Print from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Page Setup dialog box, set print properties, and then click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17-17

17 CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis –



l


17.5 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Report This describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. By querying the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task, you can analyze the scanning data (reported by the BTS) about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands and enables the Nastar to display the distribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze the spectral and periodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-related problems.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task. The CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a carrier from the list on the left. Then, view the distribution chart of the spectrum scanning data and the frequency-interference time sequence chart of the selected carrier in the area on the right. In the area on the right, the chart above, by default, displays the average signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of all the frequency sampling points of a selected carrier in a certain time segment. Select a time point from the drop-down list box in the upper-right part the chart. Then, you can view the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of all the frequency sampling points at the selected time. From the drop-down list box in the lower-right part of the distribution chart, select a frequency sampling point. Then, the chart below displays the values 17-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



of the signal interference strength of the main and diversity antennas of the selected frequency sampling point in a certain time segment, and the trends of the values. You can zoom in or zoom out the distribution chart and sequence chart by dragging them using the mouse. ----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


17.6 Reference for the CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA uplinkinterference analysis. 17.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. 17.6.2 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17-19



This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. 17.6.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks This describes the parameters of CDMA E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA E2E task. 17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplinkinterference-ranking analysis task. 17.6.5 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis task. 17.6.6 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-ranking analysis reports of CDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-ranking analysis reports of CDMA cells. 17.6.7 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis reports of CDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis reports of CDMA cells.

17.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The analysis results of the uplink-interference-ranking can be displayed in tables or in line charts, as shown in Figure 17-2.

17-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 17-2 Interface for the uplink-interference-ranking analysis

No. Name

Description

(1)

Current test carrier information list

Displays the basic information about all the carriers involved in an analysis task in a table.

(2)

Detailed information about the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of users

Displays the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected carrier during the measurement period, the number of concurrent users, and the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users in charts.

(3)

Distribution chart of the differences between the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas

Displays the distribution of the differences between the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of the selected carrier in column charts.

17.6.2 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The analysis results of the uplink-interference-spectrum can be displayed in line charts, as shown in Figure 17-3. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17-21



Figure 17-3 Interface for the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis

In Figure 17-3, the chart above, by default, displays the average signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of all the frequency sampling points of a selected carrier in a certain time segment. Select a time point from the drop-down list box in the upper-right part the chart. Then, you can view the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of all the frequency sampling points at the selected time. From the drop-down list box in the lower-right part of the distribution chart, select a frequency sampling point. Then, the chart below displays the values of the signal interference strength of the main and diversity antennas of the selected frequency sampling point in a certain time segment, and the trends of the values.

17.6.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks This describes the parameters of CDMA E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA E2E task.


17-22



OSS Name


E2E Task List

Indicates the types of E2E tasks. You can select one of the following E2E tasks: VIP subscriber monitoring task, interference data task, spectrum data task, 1x neighboring cell data task, DO neighboring cell data task, or complaint analysis data task.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter Measurement Information

Description Begin Time

Indicates the time when the task starts to run. The format is the same as that in the district setting, for example, YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

End Time

Indicates the time when the task stops running. The format is the same as that in the district setting, for example, YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss. The start time must be earlier than the end time.

NE Object


17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA UplinkInterference-Ranking Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplinkinterference-ranking analysis task.



Indicates the name of an uplink-interferenceranking analysis task. Value range: l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

You need to select CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type


Note


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l


l



17-23



Parameter Time Information



Task Start At


Object Information


BSC


Carrier Group

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the carrier groups of the entire network.

Filtering Conditions of Datasource for TopN Analysis

Indicates the minimum interference strength threshold of the uplink main and diversity antennas. This parameter can be set to any integer from -120 to 0. The default value is -90. Unit: dBm

17.6.5 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA UplinkInterference-Spectrum Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplinkinterference-spectrum analysis task.



Indicates the name of an uplink-interferencespectrum analysis task. Value range:

Task Type

17-24

l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

You need to select CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description Execution Type


Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l



Task Start At


Object Information

BSC


Carrier Group

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the carrier groups of the entire network.

17.6.6 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-ranking analysis reports of CDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-ranking analysis reports of CDMA cells.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

Carrier Name

Indicates the name of the test carrier, for example, Carrier_1.

Average RSSI of Main (dBm)

Indicates the average RSSI of the main antennas of the carriers in a selected time segment.

Average RSSI of Diversity (dBm)

Indicates the average RSSI of the diversity antennas of the carriers in a selected time segment.

Maximum Number of User Legs

Indicates the maximum number of subscriber-occupied traffic channels of each carrier in a selected time segment.


17-25



Parameter

Description

Minimum RSSI Average of the Main and Diversity (dBm)

Indicates the average value of the minimum RSSI of the main antenna and of the diversity antenna of each carrier in a selected time segment.

Average Difference (Main-Diversity) (dB)

Indicates the value calculated by dividing the sum of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas at each time point in the selected time range by the total number of time points.

Standard Deviation (Main-Diversity)

Indicates the square root of the value calculated by dividing the sum of the square of the difference between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas at each time point in the selected time range by the total number of time points.

17.6.7 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis reports of CDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis reports of CDMA cells.


Description

Central frequency

Indicates the frequency of the selected carrier.

BSCName

Indicates the name of the BSC that a carrier belongs to, for example, BSC_1.

Site name

Indicates the name of the BTS that a carrier belongs to. The naming rule is BTS name - BTS ID.

CellName

Indicates the name of the cell that a carrier belongs to. The naming rule is cell name - cell ID.

Sector Name

Indicates the name of the sector that a carrier belongs to. The naming rule is sector name - sector ID.

17-26

Band

Indicates the band of a carrier.

Center Frequency

Indicate the frequency of the selected carrier.

Bandwidth Spectrum

Indicates the frequency range corresponding to a spectrum.

RBW

Indicates the resolution bandwidth.

Time Span

Indicates the time segment of the data selected for the analysis task.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18

18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis

CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis

About This Chapter This describes the CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. The CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis function enables you to manage neighboring cell analysis tasks, check CDMA neighboring cell analysis reports, and export the CDMA neighboring cell analysis reports. Based on the configuration data and the engineering parameters, the Nastar analyzes the Pilot Strength Measurement Message (PSMM)/Route Update message (RU) reported by UEs on the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a measurement cell and the priorities that need to be adjusted. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority. 18.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis This provides the basic knowledge of the CDMA neighboring cell analysis, such as the neighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for the neighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to the CDMA neighboring cell analysis. 18.2 Process of CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis This describes the process of CDMA co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis. 18.3 Managing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of the tasks. 18.4 Query a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report The Nastar provides the function of querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a test carrier. Then, you can configure the missing neighboring cells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based on the query results. 18.5 Exporting a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report This describes how to export a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. After querying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysis Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-1



results and save them in .csv files or .xls files or export the found analysis results as MML scripts. Based on the exported analysis results or generated MML scripts, you can configure neighboring relations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations between the carriers on the network. 18.6 Reference for the CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the CDMA neighboring cell analysis.

18-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



18.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis This provides the basic knowledge of the CDMA neighboring cell analysis, such as the neighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for the neighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to the CDMA neighboring cell analysis. 18.1.1 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Functions The MRs of MSs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. By using the CDMA cofrequency neighboring cell analysis functions, the Nastar can summarize and analyze the PSMM/ RU messages reported by MSs on the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority. 18.1.2 CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms This describes the algorithms related to the analysis of CDMA co-frequency neighboring cells. The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells.

18.1.1 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Functions The MRs of MSs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. By using the CDMA cofrequency neighboring cell analysis functions, the Nastar can summarize and analyze the PSMM/ RU messages reported by MSs on the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

Neighboring Cell Analysis When an overlapped coverage area with strong signals exists between sectors, handovers may occur between the sectors. In this case, you need to configure neighboring relations. Correct neighboring relations ensure that MSs located at the service boundary of a cell can be switched in time to the neighboring cell that has optimal signals. In this case, handover gains can be obtained and the transmit power of the terminals on the network can be reduced. Thus, QoS and performance of the network are enhanced. Using the configuration data and engineering parameters, the Nastar can analyze the neighboring cells of a selected carrier on the basis of the PSMM/RU messages reported by a MS. By collecting weighted statistics based on handover relations, the Nastar can determine the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and the priorities that need to be adjusted. In addition, the Nastar can sequence the recommended priorities of the neighboring cells. By comparing the recommended priorities and the actually configured priorities, you can adjust the final priorities of the neighboring cells on the Nastar client. The Nastar displays results in line or bar chart. It displays both the neighboring cells of different types and the sequence of finally ascertained priorities in different colors. The results of neighboring cell analysis can be exported as a file in .csv or .xls format or be used to generate a script that can be directly used for the network. You can configure neighboring Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-3



relations based on the exported file or the generated script to optimize the neighboring relations of the carrier on the network. In measurement results, undefined neighboring cells are identified first by frequencies and pseudo number (PN). On the network, cells that have the same frequency and same PN may exist around a best cell. You need to predict the signal strength based on the site location, antenna azimuth, and antenna gain of these cells and then determine the possible neighboring cells. In addition, you need to export the analysis report on the possible neighboring cells through the Nastar client.

Limitation and Impact The PSMM message may fail to meet the requirements due to improper PN planning of the existing network, incorrect site configuration and installation, or impacts of geographical locations. Thus, the accuracy of neighboring cell optimization results is affected. In this case, you need to manually confirm or adjust the optimization results (especially at the BSC boundary area or the area where different network modes are adopted) based on the results of neighboring cell analysis. Here, network modes can be GSM, CDMA, and WCDMA. The accuracy of neighboring cell analysis results may be affected in the following cases: l

Engineering parameters are incorrect.

l

The air interface parameters during data collection for neighboring cell analysis are not stable.

l

PN-related problems occur. For example, the reuse distance of a same or near PN is excessively short, neighboring cells of the same PN are incorrectly configured, or the PN Oneway/Twoway problem occurs.

l

Neighboring cell data of less than three days (seven days are recommended) is collected. NOTE

The Nastar can only be used for measuring and analyzing the CDMA co-frequency neighboring cells in the case of soft handover or softer handover.

18.1.2 CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms This describes the algorithms related to the analysis of CDMA co-frequency neighboring cells. The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells. The neighboring cell analysis algorithms are the basis for determining the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells. l

The algorithm for calculating the recommended priority of a neighboring cell is as follows: 1.

Calculate the weighted value of the neighboring cell. The overall score of a neighboring cell is determined together by the appearance times of the neighboring cell, the relative difference between the Ec/Io of the neighboring cell and the Ec/Io of the measurement cell, and the absolute difference between the Ec/Io of the neighboring cell and the Ec/Io of the measurement cell.

2.

Sequence the weighted values in descending order. The higher the weighted value is, the higher the priority is. The recommended highest priority is 0.

3. 18-4

Determine whether the priority of the neighboring cell needs to be adjusted. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Handovers occur in the neighboring cell. In addition, the neighboring cell is configured in the BAM. When Abs (Recommended priority - Configured priority) ≥ 4, you can infer that the priority of the neighboring cell needs to be adjusted. l

The algorithm for determining a missing neighboring cell is as follows: Handovers occur in the neighboring cell. In addition, the neighboring cell is not configured in the BAM. If the recommended priority of the neighboring cell is smaller than the recommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer that the neighboring cell is a missing neighboring cell.

l

The algorithm for determining a redundant neighboring cell is as follows: No handover occurs in the neighboring cell. In addition, the neighboring cell is configured in the BAM. If the recommended priority of the neighboring cell is not smaller than the recommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer that the neighboring cell is a redundant neighboring cell.

18.2 Process of CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis This describes the process of CDMA co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis. Figure 18-1 shows the process of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis. Figure 18-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task Query a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report Export a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report End

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-5



Table 18-1 describes the items listed in Figure 18-1. Table 18-1 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

3

Create a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task

You can create a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required measurement reports from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Query a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis task that is successfully performed, configure missing neighboring cells, delete redundant neighboring cells, and adjust neighboring cell priorities.

5

Export a cofrequency neighboring cell analysis report

You can export a co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis report from the Nastar.

18.3 Managing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of the tasks. 18.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E Task This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 18.3.2 Creating a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task 18-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



This describes how to create a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on the configuration data and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the PSMMs/RUs reported by UEs on the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By querying the results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locate the network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority. 18.3.3 Modifying a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA neighboring cell analysis task as required. 18.3.4 Checking a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to check a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task as required.


Prerequisite l


l


l




2.


3.

In E2E Task List, select a task. Table 18-2 describes the mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks. Table 18-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

E2E Tasks

Analysis tasks





Spectrum data task



18-7



E2E Tasks

Analysis tasks










2.




2.



18.3.2 Creating a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to create a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on the 18-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



configuration data and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the PSMMs/RUs reported by UEs on the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By querying the results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locate the network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

Prerequisite l


l


l


l

The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to be analyzed must be within seven days.

Context



l



–


Step 7 Set Recommended Number of Neighboring Cells on the Parameter Setting tab page. Step 8 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task This describes how to delete a neighboring cell analysis task. You can delete the unnecessary neighboring cell analysis tasks to save system resources.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-9


18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis NOTE

The tasks in Running state cannot be deleted.

1.

Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task This describes how to suspend a neighboring cell analysis task. To delay the task execution, you can suspend a neighboring cell analysis task that is in idle state. After this operation, the neighboring cell analysis task is in suspended state. NOTE


1.


2.


.


button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended neighboring cell analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are in idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.

The task can be performed only when its Status is Suspend. If the task is not in suspended state, the button is unavailable.

18.3.3 Modifying a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA neighboring cell analysis task as required.

Prerequisite l

18-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis l

A CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the relevant parameters, see 18.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the object navigation tree, and the Recommended Number of Neighboring Cells parameter.


18.3.4 Checking a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task This describes how to check a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task as required.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required:

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-11



If you need to ...

Then ...

Check the attributes of a neighboring cell analysis task.


.

You can view the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 18.3.3 Modifying a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task. Check the execution progress of a task.




----End

Postrequisite l


l


18-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



18.4 Query a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report The Nastar provides the function of querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a test carrier. Then, you can configure the missing neighboring cells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based on the query results.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of a selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis from the shortcut menu. The CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a carrier from the list of test carriers in Area (2) in the CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis window. l

For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA CoFrequency Neighboring Cell Analysis.

l

The neighboring cell list in Area (4) displays all the neighboring cells of the selected carrier. Based on the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, the Nastar determines the redundant neighboring cells, the missing neighboring cells, the neighboring cells whose priorities need to be adjusted, and the neighboring cells that require no operations. It also provides the relevant operation suggestions. For details about the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, see 18.1.2 CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms.

l

If a neighboring cell of the selected carrier is unknown, the Nastar calculates the possible location of the neighboring cell and adds Unknow PN to the corresponding name of the selected carrier in Area (4) to identify the unknown neighboring cell.

l

The figure in Area (5), displays the normal neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, missing neighboring cells, and the neighboring cells whose priorities need to be adjusted of the selected carrier in legends in different colors. You can select a parameter from the dropdown list box above Area (5). Then, the parameter values corresponding to each neighboring cell are displayed in a line chart. In the figure, the left axis represents the weighted values of the neighboring cells, the right axis represents the value of the line chart, and the horizontal coordinate represents the names

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-13



of the neighboring cells. In the figure, the neighboring cells are sequenced in descending order of the weighted values from left to right. Step 5 Select a neighboring cell whose priority needs to be adjusted in Area (4), and then click the up or down icon above the list to adjust the priority. The adjustment result is saved as a .dat file in the local installation directory. l

Click above the list. A dialog box for adding new neighboring cells is displayed. Select a carrier and set its priority. Then, click OK. The selected carrier is added to the neighboring cell list according to the preset priority.

l

After you adjust the priority of a neighboring cell, you can click above the list to restore the original priority and then the corresponding .dat file is deleted from the local installation directory accordingly.

----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


18.5 Exporting a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report This describes how to export a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. After querying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysis 18-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



results and save them in .csv files or .xls files or export the found analysis results as MML scripts. Based on the exported analysis results or generated MML scripts, you can configure neighboring relations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations between the carriers on the network.

Prerequisite l


l

You have queried CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports.

l

Perform the following operations as required.

Procedure

If ...

Then ...

You want to export the general information about a test carrier

1. Click in the CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the filename, file type, and save path, and then click Save. The saved .csv or .xls file is opened automatically so that you can view the information in it. The information in the .csv or .xls file consists of the task name, task creator, execution result, start time, end time, and test carrier information.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-15



If ...

Then ...

You want to export the neighboring cell optimization results of a test carrier

l

Exporting the results as a .csv file or an .xls file 1. Click in the CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the filename, file type, and save path. Then, click Save. The saved .csv or .xls file is opened automatically so that you can view the information in it. The information in the .csv or .xls file consists of the task name, task creator, execution result, start time, end time, and test carrier information.

l

Exporting the results as MML scripts in the CDMA Intra-Frequency 1. Click Neighboring Cell Analysis window. Choose Export Optimized Script. The Export Script - Export Optimized Script dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the save path of the scripts and the neighboring-cell analysis results to be exported, and then click OK. The system saves the neighboring-cell analysis results as MML scripts.

You want to export the manually 1. Click in the CDMA Intra-Frequency adjusted neighboring cell Neighboring Cell Analysis window. Choose optimization results of a test carrier Export Manually Adjusted Script. The Export Script - Export Manually Adjusted Script dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the save path of the scripts and script objects, and then click OK. The system saves the neighboring-cell analysis results as MML scripts.

18-16


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If ...

Then ...

You want to export all neighboring cell analysis results

1. Click in the CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed. If the data amount of the analysis results of all the neighboring cells is large, you need to wait for a while for the dialog box to appear. 2. Set the filename and save path, and then click Save. You are allowed to save all the neighboringcell analysis results only as .xls files by test carrier. The analysis results of each test carrier corresponds to one .xls file. The file is named task name_test carrier name_NbrInfo.xls.

Export the information about the possible neighboring cells of a best cell

1. Click in the CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed. 2. Set the name, type and save path of the file. Then, click Save. After being saved, a CSV or XLS file is automatically open so that you can view the file conveniently. The CSV or XLS file contains the following information: the task name, creator, start time and end time of the results, and possible neighboring cells of the test carrier.

NOTE

l

Exporting the general information about a test carrier refers to exporting the information about all the test carriers involved in the selected analysis task.

l

Exporting the neighboring cell optimization results of a test carrier refers to exporting the information about the neighboring cells of a specified test carrier.

l

Exporting the manually adjusted neighboring cell optimization results of a test carrier refers to exporting the neighboring cell optimization results that are manually adjusted from all the neighboring cell analysis results of a specified test carrier.

l

Exporting all neighboring cell analysis results refers to exporting the information about all the test carriers and the information about the neighboring cells of the test carriers.

l

Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the information about the possible neighboring cells of of the test carriers.

----End

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-17



18.6 Reference for the CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the CDMA neighboring cell analysis. 18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface. 18.6.2 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks This describes the parameters of CDMA E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA E2E task. 18.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task. 18.6.4 Parameters for Querying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This describes the parameters for querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports.

18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface. The analysis results of co-frequency neighboring cells can be displayed in tables or in line charts, as shown in Figure 18-2.

18-18


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Figure 18-2 Interface for the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis

No. Name

Description

(1)

Button area

Consists of five buttons that are used for exporting overview data of measured carrier, neighboring cell analysis data, all neighboring analysis data, neighboring cell script and analysis results of possible neighboring cells.

(2)

Current test carrier information list Displays the information related to the current test carrier.

(3)

Button area

Consists of three buttons used for adjusting the priorities of neighboring cells and saving adjustment results.

(4)

Neighboring cell list

Displays all the co-frequency neighboring cells of the carrier selected in area (2).

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-19



No. Name

Description

(5)

Displays the information about all the neighboring cells of the selected test carrier in the combination of line charts.

Image area

NOTE If a neighboring cell of the selected carrier is unknown, the Nastar calculates the possible location of the neighboring cell and adds Unknow PN to the corresponding name of the selected carrier in Area (2) to identify the unknown neighboring cell.






OSS Name


E2E Task List


Begin Time


End Time


NE Object


18.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA CoFrequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA cofrequency neighboring cell analysis task. 18-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)







l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type


Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l


The start time must be earlier than the end time. You can either type the time in this field, or click to select the date and time in the Date Selection dialog box. This parameter is valid for only one-time tasks.

Task Start At

Indicates the time when the analysis task is executed. This start time must be equal to or later than the end time specified by Data Time Scope.

Object Information


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

BSC

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the BSCs on the entire network.

Carrier Group

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the carrier groups on the entire network.

Recommended Number of Neighboring Cells

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that you are recommended to configure. This parameter can be any integer ranging from 1 to 40. The default value is 20.


18-21



18.6.4 Parameters for Querying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports This describes the parameters for querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports. You can refer to the description when querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports.

Parameters related to the general information about a test carrier Parameter

Description

MSC Where Test Carrier Is Located

Indicates the name of the MSC that the test carrier belongs to.

BSC Where Test Carrier Is Located

Indicates the name of the BSC that the test carrier belongs to, for example, BSC_1.

Test Carrier Name



Indicates the number of missing intra-frequency neighboring cells among the undefined neighboring cells of the test carrier.


Indicates the number of redundant intra-frequency neighboring cells among the defined neighboring cells of the test carrier.

Number of Neighboring Cells Whose Priorities Are Adjusted

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that are specified as Adjusted Priority in the detailed neighboring cell list of the test carrier.

Parameters related to the detailed information about neighboring cells

18-22

Parameter

Description


Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.

Weighted Value

Indicates the weighted value calculated through the neighboring cell weighted algorithm.

Handoff Count

Indicates the number of handovers of a neighboring cell.

Suggestion by Tool

Lists the recommended operations on a neighboring cell and displays whether the neighboring cell is defined.


Indicates the recommended priority of a neighboring cell based on the weighted value of the neighboring cell. The higher the weighted value, the higher is the recommended priority.

Configured Priority

Indicates the priority of an intra-frequency neighboring cell in the configuration data.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description

Adjusted Priority


Average EcIo

Indicates the average Ec/Io of a neighboring cell in all the MRs that contain the information about this neighboring cell.

Distance (km)

Indicates the distance between the test carrier and the current neighboring cell.

MSC ID

Indicates the ID of the MSC that a neighboring cell belongs to.

BTS ID

Indicates the ID of the BTS that a neighboring cell belongs to.

Cell ID


Sector ID

Indicates the ID of the sector that a neighboring cell belongs to.

ARFCN

Indicates the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.

Band

Indicates the band of a neighboring cell. The value 0 represents 800 MHz, the value 1 represents 1900 MHz, and the value 5 represents 450 MHz.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


18-23


19 CDMA VIP KPI Analysis

19

CDMA VIP KPI Analysis

About This Chapter CDMA VIP KPI analysis involves managing the tasks of analyzing the QoS of CDMA VIP subscribers and querying the analysis reports about the QoS of CDMA VIP subscribers. The Nastar filters the call events records of the VIP subscribers among all the user call events records of the entire network and thus obtains the related counters about the voice service and data service of the VIP subscribers. By monitoring the QoS-related KPIs of the VIP subscribers every day, the Nastar enables you to locate and solve the network problems, which may incur complaints, beforehand. Then, you can provide good services to VIP subscribers and improve satisfaction of VIP subscribers. 19.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis The CDMA VIP KPI analysis function enables you to routinely monitor the calls of the selected VIP subscribers on the network. By analyzing the monitor reports, you can learn about the QoS of the VIP subscribers. The CDMA VIP KPI analysis function can also help network engineers to analyze and solve, actively and beforehand, the potential network problems that may affect VIP subscriber services, thus improving the satisfaction of VIP subscribers. 19.2 Process of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis This describes the process of CDMA VIP KPI analysis. 19.3 Managing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of such tasks. 19.4 Querying the Analysis Reports About the QoS of CDMA VIP Subscribers The Nastar provides the function of querying the analysis reports about the QoS of CDMA VIP subscribers. By checking the KPI reports related to the voice service and data service of the selected VIP subscribers every day, you can learn about the QoS of the VIP subscribers and locate and solve network problems beforehand. 19.5 Reference for the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA VIP KPI analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA VIP KPI analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-1



19.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis The CDMA VIP KPI analysis function enables you to routinely monitor the calls of the selected VIP subscribers on the network. By analyzing the monitor reports, you can learn about the QoS of the VIP subscribers. The CDMA VIP KPI analysis function can also help network engineers to analyze and solve, actively and beforehand, the potential network problems that may affect VIP subscriber services, thus improving the satisfaction of VIP subscribers. You can group VIP subscribers based on the requirements on services so that you can monitor the calls of the VIP subscribers of the same group in a unified manner. The analysis report on the VIP KPIs contains the information about the KPIs such as the 1X voice service, 1X data service, EVDO service, and wireless environment measurement.

19.2 Process of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis This describes the process of CDMA VIP KPI analysis. Figure 19-1 shows the process of VIP KPI analysis. Figure 19-1 Workflow of VIP KPI analysis

Start

Create an E2E task

Create a VIP KPI analysis task

Query a VIP KPI analysis report

Export a VIP KPI analysis report

End

Table 19-1 describes the items listed in Figure 19-1. 19-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Table 19-1 Description of the workflow of VIP KPI analysis No.

Procedure

Description

1

Querying NE Data


2

Create an endto-end task corresponding to a VIP KPI analysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management on the Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window, and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a VIP KPI analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs the measurement task and generates measurement results. When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task.

3

Create a VIP KPI analysis task

You can create a VIP KPI analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required user call events records from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4

Query a VIP KPI analysis report

You can view the analysis results of the VIP KPI analysis task that is successfully performed. The Nastar monitors the KPI reports related to the voice service and data service of VIP subscribers daily. This helps you to learn about the quality of service (QoS) of VIP subscribers. In addition, you can locate and solve the network problems, which may incur complaints, beforehand.

5

Export a VIP KPI analysis report

You can export a VIP KPI analysis report from the Nastar.

19.3 Managing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of such tasks. 19.3.1 Managing CDMA VIP Groups This section describes how to manage the CDMA VIP groups. You can create VIP groups as required and add certain VIP subscribers to a VIP group to monitor the service quality of these VIP subscribers simultaneously. In addition, you can modify the attributes of a VIP group, delete, or export a VIP group. 19.3.2 Creating a CDMA E2E Task

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-3



This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar, the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commands to the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results. 19.3.3 Creating CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks By creating CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyze the user call events records of the selected VIP subscribers. Then, you can obtain relevant counters about the voice service and data service of the VIP subscriber. By monitoring the QoSrelated KPIs of the VIP subscribers every day, the Nastar enables you to locate and solve the network problems, which may incur complaints, beforehand. Then, you can provide good services to VIP subscribers and improve satisfaction of VIP subscribers. 19.3.4 Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes how to modify the attributes of CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task as required. 19.3.5 Checking CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes how to check CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can check the attributes, the execution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task.

19.3.1 Managing CDMA VIP Groups This section describes how to manage the CDMA VIP groups. You can create VIP groups as required and add certain VIP subscribers to a VIP group to monitor the service quality of these VIP subscribers simultaneously. In addition, you can modify the attributes of a VIP group, delete, or export a VIP group.

Prerequisite l


l

You have the rights to create VIP subscribers and VIP groups.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > VIP Group Management from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. The VIP Group Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: If You Want to ...

Then ...

Create a VIP group by adding one

Perform Step 3.

Create a VIP group by importing one

Perform Step 4.

Step 3 To create a VIP group by adding one, do as follows: 1.

Click the CDMA VIP Group Name tab. Then, click New to open the VIP Group Management - Create VIP Group dialog box.

2.

Set Group Name, Priority, and Description. If the * character is present on the right of a parameter, it indicates that the setting of this parameter is mandatory.

19-4


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



3.

Select one or multiple VIP subscribers from the Group Member list. You can add new VIP subscribers to this list as required or import VIP subscribers to this list, delete the existing VIP subscribers from the list, or export the VIP subscriber information in the list to .csv or .xls files. l

Adding a VIP subscriber a.

Click New below the Group Member list to open the VIP User Management dialog box.

b.

Set User Name, Phone Number, IMSI, IMSI, ESN, and Description. If the * character is present on the right of a parameter, it indicates that the setting of this parameter is mandatory.

c. l

Click Confirm.

Importing a VIP subscriber a.

Click Import below the Group Member list to open the Open dialog box.

b.

Select an edited VIP subscriber file, and then click Open. If a VIP subscriber file in .xls format is selected and the file contains multiple worksheets, a prompt is displayed. In this case, select the worksheet to be imported.

c.

After the import is complete, perform the operations as prompted. The number of new records, the number of updated records, and the number of failed records are displayed.

l

l

–

Click Close to complete the import operation.

–

Click Export Failing Result to export the error information as files so that you can learn the cause of the import failures.

Deleting a VIP subscriber a.

Select one or multiple VIP subscribers from the Group Member list and then click Delete below the list.

b.

In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Confirm.

Exporting the VIP subscriber information to .csv or .xls files a.

Click Export below the Group Member list.

b.


You can also select all records, find a record, or save a record through the shortcut menu prompted by right-clicking in the Group Member list. 4.

Click Confirm.

Step 4 To create a VIP group by importing one, do as follows: 1.

Click Import on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page to open the Open dialog box.

2.

Select an edited VIP group file, and then click Open. If a VIP group file in .xls format is selected and the file contains multiple worksheets, a prompt is displayed. In this case, select the worksheet to be imported. NOTE

If multiple lines of descriptions regarding a VIP group are inconsistent in the edited VIP group file, the system displays the last line of description on the Description title bar of the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page. It is recommended that the description in different lines regarding a VIP group be consistent when you define VIP group information.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-5



3.

After the import is complete, perform the operations as prompted. The number of new records, the number of updated records, and the number of failed records are displayed. l

Click Close to complete the import operation.

l

Click Export Failing Result to export the error information as files so that you can learn the cause of the import failures.

----End

Postrequisite l

Modifying the attributes of a VIP group 1.

Select a VIP group on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page and then click Modified to open the CDMA VIP user group management - Modify VIP user group dialog box.

2.

Modify the relevant parameters. For description of the parameters, see 19.5.2 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP Subscribers and VIP Groups.

3.

Click Confirm. If the VIP group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoing tasks. If the VIP group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updated in the next period after the modification.

l

Viewing the information about members of a VIP group On the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page, double-click a VIP group to view the detailed information about the members of the VIP group.

l

Deleting a VIP group 1.

Select a VIP group on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page, and then click Delete.

2.

In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Confirm. If the VIP group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoing tasks. If the VIP group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updated in the next period after the modification.

l

Exporting the VIP group information to .csv or .xls files 1.

On the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page, click Export.

2.


You can also select all VIP groups, and find or save a VIP group through the shortcut menu prompted by right-clicking on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page.


19-6


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Prerequisite l


l


l




2.


3.


Analysis tasks





Spectrum data task








Step 4 Click Next to set Begin Time and End Time, and select one or multiple NEs from the NE list. The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects that meet the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area. Step 5 Click Complete. The MML Preview dialog box is displayed, showing the MML commands related to the current theme analysis E2E task. The MML commands can be exported for future use. Step 6 Click OK. The new E2E task is displayed in the task list. ----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-7





2.




2.



19.3.3 Creating CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks By creating CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyze the user call events records of the selected VIP subscribers. Then, you can obtain relevant counters about the voice service and data service of the VIP subscriber. By monitoring the QoSrelated KPIs of the VIP subscribers every day, the Nastar enables you to locate and solve the network problems, which may incur complaints, beforehand. Then, you can provide good services to VIP subscribers and improve satisfaction of VIP subscribers.

Prerequisite l


l


l

Such tasks can be performed once or periodically. You can set the execution period of a periodic task to days.

l


Context

Procedure in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Step 1 Click Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, Execution Type, and Note. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Analysis Task Management-New Task. 19-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



If ...

Then ...

Once Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set only Time Setting for Once Task Data. Cycle Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set Task Configuration and Time Setting for Cycle Task Data. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Select one or multiple VIP subscribers or VIP subscriber groups from the navigation tree on the User Object Selection tab page. l

Choose VIPs or VIP Groups above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation tree as required.

l



–

You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search range.


Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete a VIP KPI analysis task that is not required for saving the system resources. NOTE


1.

Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend a VIP KPI analysis task that is in the idle state. After this operation, the VIP KPI analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the VIP KPI analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.


2. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


. 19-9




button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended VIP KPI analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the VIP KPI analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2.


.


19.3.4 Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes how to modify the attributes of CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task as required.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA VIP KPI analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the relevant parameters, see 19.5.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, and the information about the object navigation tree.

Step 4 Click Complete. ----End 19-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



19.3.5 Checking CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes how to check CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can check the attributes, the execution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA VIP KPI analysis task is created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Checking the attributes of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task


.

You can check the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 19.3.4 Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks. Checking the execution progress of the active task



Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results of the previous execution of the selected task in the Last Running Result column. You can view all the analysis results of a selected task in the lower-right pane. NOTE In the result list, if the result information about tasks that fail to be executed at a certain period already exists in the database, you can right-click the results, and then choose Analyze Result Again from the shortcut menu to analyze the results of this period again. Only the results of tasks that fail to be executed are analyzed again.

----End Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-11



Postrequisite l

In the drop-down list boxes above the task list, you can set the filter conditions to filter the tasks by the task status, task execution type, and task type. You can also type the keyword of a task name in the text box. Then, the system searches for the tasks by the keyword. By clicking , you can restore the preset filtering conditions to the initial state, that is, all the task information is displayed.

l


19.4 Querying the Analysis Reports About the QoS of CDMA VIP Subscribers The Nastar provides the function of querying the analysis reports about the QoS of CDMA VIP subscribers. By checking the KPI reports related to the voice service and data service of the selected VIP subscribers every day, you can learn about the QoS of the VIP subscribers and locate and solve network problems beforehand.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis from the shortcut menu. The CDMA VIP KPI Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 Select a counter from the counter list in Area (1) of the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis window. l

For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI Analysis.

l

The result display area, namely, Area (2) and (4), displays the distribution of the counters of corresponding VIP subscribers in a subscriber distribution chart and a subscriber distribution table. In the subscriber distribution chart, data about the counter is calculated as per day. The horizontal coordinate represents the IDs of the VIP subscribers. The vertical coordinate represents the values of the counter corresponding to each ID. If you select a date, the

19-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



subscriber distribution chart displays the calculation result of the counter for each VIP subscriber. In the subscriber distribution table, the counter data is calculated as per day. The data of the counter, which is calculated during the selected time range, is displayed for each VIP subscriber as per day. In this area, right-click a record about VIP subscriber, and then choose Complaint Assistant Analysis from the shortcut menu. After certain settings, the Complaint Assistant Analysis function is enabled. Then, you can select one or more counter sets to view the call records of the selected VIP subscribers. l

The task list of Area (3) in the right pane displays the basic information such as the task name, start time, end time, and creator of the task.

----End

Postrequisite l


l



–


–


–


l


19.5 Reference for the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA VIP KPI analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA VIP KPI analysis. 19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA KPI analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-13



19.5.2 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP Subscribers and VIP Groups This describes the parameters of VIP subscribers and groups. You can refer to the parameter description when creating or modifying a VIP subscriber or VIP group. 19.5.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks This describes the parameters of CDMA E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA E2E task. 19.5.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying the tasks of analyzing the QoS of CDMA VIP subscribers. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task. 19.5.5 Parameters for Querying a CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Report This describes the parameters for querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report. You can refer to the description when querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report.

19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA KPI analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The KPI analysis result interface displays the distribution of the counters of corresponding VIP subscribers in a subscriber distribution chart and a subscriber distribution table, as shown in Figure 19-2 and Figure 19-3. Figure 19-2 Interface for the KPI analysis (1)

19-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



SN Name

Description

(1) Counter list

Displays the basic information about all the counters involved in an analysis task in a table.

(2) Subscriber distribution chart of a counter Displays the data about the counter, which is calculated as per day. The horizontal coordinate represents the IDs of the VIP subscribers. The vertical coordinate represents the values of the counter corresponding to each ID. If you select a date, the subscriber distribution chart displays the calculation result of the counter for each VIP subscriber. (3) Task information list

Displays the basic information about this task in table, such as the task name, start time, end time, and creator of the task.

Figure 19-3 Interface for the KPI analysis (2)

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-15



SN Name

Description

(4) Subscriber distribution table of a counter Displays the counter data, which is calculated as per day. The data of the counter, which is calculated during the selected time range, is displayed for each VIP subscriber as per day.

KPI description

19-16

KPI

Description

Number of CS calls [Times]

Indicates the total number of calls of all the VIP subscribers.

Number of CS call drops [Times]

Indicates the total number of call drops of all the VIP subscribers.

Number of unsuccessful CS call setups [Times]

Indicates the total number of call setup failures of all the VIP subscribers.

CS call drop rate [%]

Indicates the call drop rate (%) of all the VIP subscribers.

Ratio of unsuccessful CS call setup [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of call setup failures of all the VIP subscribers.

Duration of CS call setup(on the system side) [ms]

Indicates the total duration of calls of all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in milliseconds (ms).

Number of PS calls [Times]

Indicates the total number of calls of all the VIP subscribers.

Number of PS call drops [Times]


Times of unsuccessful PS call setups [Times]

Indicates the total number of call setup failures of all the VIP subscribers.

PS call drop rate [%]

Indicates the call drop rate (%) of all the VIP subscribers.

Ratio of unsuccessful PS call setup [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of call setup failures of all the VIP subscribers.

Forward data throughput for data service [byte]

Indicates the forward data throughput of the data service of all the VIP subscribers. The data throughput is represented in bytes.

Reverse data throughput for data service [byte]

Indicates the reverse data throughput of the data service of all the VIP subscribers. The data throughput is represented in bytes.


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


KPI

Description

Average data rate of forward application layer [kbit/s]

Indicates the average forward data rate of the data service of all the VIP subscribers. The data rate is represented in kbit/s.

Average data rate of reverse application layer [kbit/s]

Indicates the average reverse data rate of the data service of all the VIP subscribers. The data rate is represented in kbit/s.

Connection setups [Times]

Indicates the total number of connection setups of all the VIP subscribers.

Connection setup successes [Times]

Indicates the total number of successful connection setups of all the VIP subscribers.

Call drops during connection [Times]


Connection setup failure ratio [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of connection setup failures of all the VIP subscribers.

Call drop ratio [%]

Indicates the call drop ratio (%) of all the VIP subscribers.

Access authentication failure ratio [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of access authentication failures of all the VIP subscribers.

Paging failure ratio [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of successful paging of all the VIP subscribers.

Connection setup average duration [ms]

Indicates the average duration of connection setup of all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in milliseconds (ms).

Total call duration [ms]

Indicates the total call duration of all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in milliseconds (ms).

Total flow of forward data [kbyte]

Indicates the total forward data throughput of all the VIP subscribers. The data throughput is represented in kbyte.

Total flow of reverse data [kbyte]

Indicates the total reverse data throughput of all the VIP subscribers. The data throughput is represented in kbyte.

User forward average rate [kbit/s]

Indicates the average forward data rate of all the VIP subscribers. The data rate is represented in kbit/s.

User reverse average rate [kbit/s]

Indicates the average reverse data rate of all the VIP subscribers. The data rate is represented in kbit/s.


19-17



19-18

KPI

Description

Occupancy percentage of calls in pilot strength(-3,0) [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of the duration of calls whose pilot strength ranges from -3 to 0 dB to the total duration of calls of all the VIP subscribers.

Occupancy percentage of calls in pilot strength(-6,-3) [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of the duration of calls whose pilot strength ranges from -6 dB to -3 dB to the total duration of calls of all the VIP subscribers.







Range of pilot strength during connection (-2,0) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whose pilot strength ranges from -2 to 0 dB for all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection (-4.5,-2) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whose pilot strength ranges from -4.5 dB to -2 dB for all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection (-7,-4.5) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whose pilot strength ranges from -7 dB to -4.5 dB for all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection (-10,-7) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whose pilot strength ranges from -10 dB to -7 dB for all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection (-32,-10) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whose pilot strength ranges from -32 dB to -10 dB for all the VIP subscribers. The duration is represented in seconds (s).


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



19.5.2 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP Subscribers and VIP Groups This describes the parameters of VIP subscribers and groups. You can refer to the parameter description when creating or modifying a VIP subscriber or VIP group.

Description of the parameters of VIP subscribers Parameter

Description

User Name

Indicates the name of a VIP subscriber. Value range: l


l

Any character except for ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \ / , ' `

l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Phone Number

Indicates the mobile number of a VIP subscriber.

IMSI

Indicates the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the VIP subscriber.

ESN

Indicates the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of the VIP subscriber.

MEID

Indicates the Mobile Equipment Identifier (MEID) of the VIP subscriber.

Description

Indicates the description of the VIP subscriber. Value range: l


l


Description of the parameters of VIP groups Parameter

Description

Group Name

Indicates the name of a VIP group. Value range:

Priority

l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Indicates the priority of a VIP group, such as Very Important, Important, Medium, Low, and Very Low. Select a parameter value from the drop-down list box.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-19



Parameter

Description

Description

Indicates the description of the VIP group. Value range:

Group Member

l


l


Indicates all the VIP subscribers of the VIP group.






OSS Name


E2E Task List


Begin Time


End Time


NE Object


19.5.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying the tasks of analyzing the QoS of CDMA VIP subscribers. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task.

19-20


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)





Indicates the name of a VIP KPI analysis task. Value range: l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree.

Execution Type

l

Once task: The system executes the created tasks only once at the specified time.

l

Period task: The system executes the created tasks at the preset time.

Note


Time Information

Begin Date

l


l


Indicates time for starting a task. The start time should be later than the current server time. You can either type the time value in this field, or to select the date and time in the Date click Selection dialog box. This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

Cycle

Indicates the interval between periodic tasks. This parameter involves the period unit and the interval. l

Unit: day.

l

Interval: 1 to 30.

This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks. Execution Times

Indicates the times that a periodic task is executed. If this parameter is set to 0, you can infer that the task is executed all the time. Value range: 0 to 9999. This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


19-21



Parameter



Task Start At


Time

l

All day: The task is executed every day during the selected time range.

l

Specify: The task is executed during the specified time segment every day during the selected time range. The time segment cannot overlap. The start time of the next time segment must be later than or the same as the end time of the current time segment.

Object Information

VIPs

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the VIP subscribers of the entire network.

VIP Groups

If you select this option, the navigation tree displays all the VIP groups of the entire network.

19.5.5 Parameters for Querying a CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Report This describes the parameters for querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report. You can refer to the description when querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report.

Parameter description

19-22

Parameter

Description

Counter Type

Indicates the service type that the KPI belongs to. The service type can be 1X voice service, 1X data service, EVDO service, 1X radio environment, and DO radio environment.

Counter Name

Indicates the name of a counter.

Section Time

Indicates the summary value of each KPI in this time segment.

User ID

Indicates the ID of a VIP subscriber. An ID uniquely identifies a VIP subscriber.

User Name

Indicates the name of a VIP subscriber. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Parameter

Description

Phone Number

Indicates the mobile number of a VIP subscriber.

IMSI

Indicates the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the VIP subscriber.

VIP Group

Indicates the name of the VIP group that a VIP subscriber belongs to.


19-23


20 CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis

20

CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis

About This Chapter CDMA complaint assistant analysis involves managing complaint assistant analysis tasks and querying CDMA complaint assistant analysis reports. After receiving a subscriber complaint, the Nastar quickly locates the relevant calls, which are recorded before and after the complaint, of the subscriber. By querying the user call events records, the Nastar helps you analyze the possible cause, locate and solve the problem, and thus improve the efficiency of handling complaints. 20.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis The CDMA complaint assistant analysis function helps you to analyze the subscriber calls that are recorded before and after a complaint and to locate and rectify the fault. This improves the efficiency of handling complaint and increases user satisfaction. 20.2 Process of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis This describes the process of CDMA complaint assistant analysis. 20.3 Managing CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of such tasks. 20.4 Querying a Complaint Assistant Analysis Report This describes how to query a complaint assistant analysis report. After receiving a complaint, the system quickly finds the UCERs related to the complaint. You can query the UCERs to analyze the possible causes of the complaint, locates and solves the problem quickly. This facilitates the complaint handling. 20.5 Reference for the CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA complaint analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA complaint assistant analysis.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


20-1



20.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis The CDMA complaint assistant analysis function helps you to analyze the subscriber calls that are recorded before and after a complaint and to locate and rectify the fault. This improves the efficiency of handling complaint and increases user satisfaction. You can group the user callevents record (UCER) counters based on the requirements on services so that you can perform analyses based on different service requirements. The compliant assistant analysis function can quickly locate the relevant UCERs before and after a complaint or locate all the UCERs that are related to a faulty cell based on the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI), the number of the MS, or the Equipment Serial Number (ESN). The Nastar provides the information about the key event of each call, call path, and MR that is sent before the call is released. By analyzing the information, the Nastar helps you to locate and rectify faults. This improves the efficiency of handling complaint and increases user satisfaction.

20.2 Process of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis This describes the process of CDMA complaint assistant analysis. Figure 20-1 shows the process of complaint assistant analysis. Figure 20-1 Workflow of complaint assistant analysis Start Set a complaint assistant analysis task Query a complaint assistant analysis report Export a complaint assistant analysis report End

Table 20-1 describes the items listed in Figure 20-1.

20-2


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Table 20-1 Description of the workflow of complaint assistant analysis No.

Procedure

Description

1

Create a complaint assistant analysis task

You can create a complaint assistant analysis task in the Analysis Task Management window of the main interface on the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains the required user call events record from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

2

Query a complaint assistant analysis report

After the Nastar receives a complaint, you can query the corresponding complaint assistant analysis report to quickly find the user call events record (UCERs) related to the complaint. Then, you can analyze the UCERs to find the possible causes of the complaint, locate the problem, and solve the problem quickly. This facilitates the complaint handling.

3

Export a complaint assistant analysis report

You can export a complaint assistant analysis report from the Nastar.

20.3 Managing CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks This describes how to manage CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can also view the status and execution progress of such tasks. 20.3.1 Creating User-Defined Counter Sets The Nastar provides the function of creating user-defined counter sets. You can group certain counters to a counter set so that you can analyze complaints based on the service requirements. 20.3.2 Creating CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks By creating CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to quickly locate the relevant calls, which are recorded before and after a complaint, of the subscriber after receiving the complaint. By querying the user call events records, the Nastar helps you analyze the possible cause and thus locate and solve the problem. 20.3.3 Modifying CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks This describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task as required. 20.3.4 Checking CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks This describes how to check CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can check the attributes, the execution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task.

20.3.1 Creating User-Defined Counter Sets The Nastar provides the function of creating user-defined counter sets. You can group certain counters to a counter set so that you can analyze complaints based on the service requirements.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


20-3



Prerequisite l


l

You are authorized to manage the counter set.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > CDMA Complaint Record Counter Set Management from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. The CDMA Complaint Record Counter Set Management window is displayed. The preset counter sets of the Nastar include DO Basic Counter Set, 1X Basic Counter Set, Network Connection Failure, No Signal in an Indoor Environment, Slow Response Speed of 1X Network Connection, Slow Response Speed of DO Network Connection, Call Drop, Call Failure, The voice quality is poor, No Signal in an Outdoor Environment, and Roaming. Step 2 Click New. The CDMA Complaint Counter Set Management - Create Counter Set window is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters. l

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search range.

l

For details about the relevant parameters, see 20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count Sets.


Postrequisite To modify the attributes of an existing user-defined counter set, perform the following operations: 1.

Select a counter set in the CDMA Complaint Record Counter Set Management window. Click Modify. The CDMA Complaint Counter Set Management - Modify Counter Set window is displayed.

2.

Modify the relevant parameter settings. You can select objects and modify the remarks. The name of the counter set, however, cannot be modified. For details about the relevant parameters, see 20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count Sets.

3.

Click OK.

To delete a counter set, perform the following operations: 1.

20-4

Select a counter set in the CDMA Complaint Record Counter Set Management window, and then click Delete. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



2.


20.3.2 Creating CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks By creating CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to quickly locate the relevant calls, which are recorded before and after a complaint, of the subscriber after receiving the complaint. By querying the user call events records, the Nastar helps you analyze the possible cause and thus locate and solve the problem.

Prerequisite l


l

The relevant trace tasks are already opened on NEs.

l


l


l

The task for importing the CDMA complaint analysis data is created by the system. You need not create the task.

Context

Procedure in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-New Step 1 Click Task dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, and Note. The value of Execution Type can be only Once Task. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Set Time Setting for Once Task Data. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Set OSS name and BSC name. Step 7 Click Next. Step 8 On the Filter by VIP tab page, perform the following operations: 1.

Select Start Filtering by User. The filtering condition can be Subscriber, IMSI, ESN, MEID, or any combination of these four options.

2.

Click Select from VIPs or VIP groups, select one or more VIP subscribers or subscriber groups, and then click OK. The Nastar filters the subscriber IDs based on the selected filtering condition and displays the results on the right area.

Step 9 On the Filter by NE tab page, perform the following operations: 1.

Select Start Filtering by NE. The filtering condition can be Accessed Carriers or Released Carriers.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


20-5



2.

Select one or more carriers from the navigation tree.

Step 10 Select one or more counter sets on the Select Counters to Be Queried tab page. Step 11 Click Complete. ----End

Postrequisite l

Deleting a task You can delete a complaint assistant analysis task that is not required so that you can save system resources. NOTE


1.

Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks.

l

2.


3.


.

Suspending a task To delay the task execution, you can suspend a complaint assistant analysis task that is in the idle state. After this operation, the complaint assistant analysis task is in the suspended state. NOTE

The system can schedule only the complaint assistant analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1.


2.


.


button is

Resuming a task You can resume a suspended complaint analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by the system. NOTE

Only the complaint assistant analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1.


2. 20-6


.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




20.3.3 Modifying CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks This describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task as required.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA complaint assistant analysis task is created.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click Analysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

. The


For details about the relevant parameters, see 20.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Complaint Analysis Tasks.

l

You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time information, the filtering conditions, and the output counter sets.


20.3.4 Checking CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks This describes how to check CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can check the attributes, the execution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task.

Prerequisite l


l

A CDMA complaint assistant analysis task is created.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


20-7



Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required: Purpose

Operation

Check the attributes of a CDMA complaint Select a task from the task list in the upper-right assistant analysis task. pane. Double-click the task or click . You can check the attributes of the selected task and modify the relevant parameter settings. For detailed operations, see 20.3.3 Modifying CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks. Checking the execution progress of the active task



Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results of the previous execution of the selected task in the Last Running Result column. You can view all the analysis results of a selected task in the lower-right pane. NOTE In the result list, if the result information about tasks that fail to be executed at a certain period already exists in the database, you can right-click the results, and then choose Analyze Result Again from the shortcut menu to analyze the results of this period again. Only the results of tasks that fail to be executed are analyzed again.

----End

Postrequisite l


l

20-8


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




20.4 Querying a Complaint Assistant Analysis Report This describes how to query a complaint assistant analysis report. After receiving a complaint, the system quickly finds the UCERs related to the complaint. You can query the UCERs to analyze the possible causes of the complaint, locates and solves the problem quickly. This facilitates the complaint handling.


Procedure Step 1 Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysis tasks. Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. All the analysis results of the selected task are displayed in the lower-right pane. Step 3 Double-click or right-click an analysis result, and then choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis from the shortcut menu. The CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis window is displayed. This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable. Step 4 In the CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis window, click the 1X item or DO item tab to view the counter information related to the analysis task. l

The 1X item tab page displays all the 1x counter information involved in the analysis task.

l

The DO item tab page displays all the DO connection level counter information and DO streaming level counter information involved in the analysis task.

----End

Postrequisite l

The system enables you to export query results. Right-click the query result list, and then choose Save As from the shortcut menu. After setting the save path and filename, click Save. Then, the query results are saved as a .csv or an .xls file.

l

The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the query result list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords, that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query result that meets the search condition. You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive. You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


20-9



20.5 Reference for the CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis GUI This describes the interface for CDMA complaint analysis and the relevant parameters. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA complaint assistant analysis. 20.5.1 Interface for CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA complaint assistant analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. 20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count Sets This describes the parameters for adding or modifying user-defined counter sets. You can refer to the description when adding or modifying a user-defined counter set. 20.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Complaint Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task. 20.5.4 Parameters for Querying a CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Report This describes the parameters for querying a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report. You can refer to the description when a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report.

20.5.1 Interface for CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis This describes the interface for CDMA complaint assistant analysis. Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface. The complaint assistant analysis result interface displays in the 1X item and DO item tabs, as shown in Figure 20-2 and Figure 20-3. Figure 20-2 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (1)

20-10


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



The 1X item tab page displays all the 1x counter information involved in the analysis task. Figure 20-3 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (2)

The DO item tab page displays all the DO connection level counter information and DO streaming level counter information involved in the analysis task.

20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count Sets This describes the parameters for adding or modifying user-defined counter sets. You can refer to the description when adding or modifying a user-defined counter set.


Description

Counter Set Name

Indicates the name of a counter set, such as index_1. Value range:

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l


l

The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \/,'`

l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive


20-11



Parameter

Description

Note

Indicates the description of the counter set. Value range: l


l

The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \/,'`

20.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Complaint Analysis Tasks This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task.



Indicates the name of a complaint assistant analysis task. Value range: l


l


l

Unique and not null

l

Case sensitive

Task Type

Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Task from the navigation tree.

Execution Type


Note


Time Information

Data Time Scope

l


l



20-12


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Parameter

Description Task Start At


Filtering Information by User

Start Filtering by User

If you select this option, the Nastar filters the calls based on the selected filtering condition.

Filtering Condition Setting

The filtering condition can be Subscriber, IMSI, ESN, MEID, or any combination of these four options.

Select from VIPs or VIP groups

If you select this option, the Nastar filters the required MS numbers from the selected VIP subscribers.

Filtering Information by NE

Start Filtering by NE

If you select this option, the Nastar filters the NEs based on the selected filtering condition.

Filtering Condition Setting

The filtering condition can be Accessed Carriers, Released Carriers, or a combination of the two options.

Counter Information

Select Counters to Be Queried

You can select a set of counters to be exported based on the service requirement.

20.5.4 Parameters for Querying a CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Report This describes the parameters for querying a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report. You can refer to the description when a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report.

Parameters related to the general information about a test carrier

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter

Description

MSC Where Test Carrier Is Located

Indicates the number of the MSC that the test carrier belongs to.

BSC Where Test Carrier Is Located

Indicates the name of the BSC that the test carrier belongs to, for example, BSC_1.

Test Carrier Name



Indicates the number of missing co-channel neighboring cells among the undefined neighboring cells of the test carrier.


Indicates the number of redundant co-channel neighboring cells among the defined neighboring cells of the test carrier.


20-13



Parameter

Description

Number of Neighboring Cells Whose Priorities Are Adjusted

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that are specified as Priority Adjusting in the detailed neighboring cell list of the test carrier.

Parameters related to the detailed information about neighboring cells Parameter

Description


Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.

Weighted Value

Indicates the weighted value calculated through the neighboring-cell weighted algorithm.

Handoff Count

Indicates the number of handovers of a neighboring cell.

Suggestion by Tool

Lists the recommended operations on a neighboring cell and displays whether the neighboring cell is defined.


Indicates the recommended priority of a neighboring cell based on the weighted value of the neighboring cell. The higher the weighted value, the higher is the recommended priority.

Configured Priority

Indicates the priority of an co-channel neighboring cell in the configuration data.

Final Priority


Average EcIo

Indicates the average Ec/Io of a neighboring cell in all the MRs that contain the information about this neighboring cell. Unit: dBm

Distance (m)

Indicates the distance between the carrier and the current neighboring cell.

MSC ID

Indicates the number of the MSC that a neighboring cell belongs to.

BTS ID

Indicates the number of the BTS that a neighboring cell belongs to.

Cell ID


Sector ID

Indicates the ID of the sector that a neighboring cell belongs to.

Frequency Point

Indicates the frequency of a neighboring cell.

Band

Indicates the band of a neighboring cell. The value 0 represents 800 MHz, the value 1 represents 1900 MHz, and the value 5 represents 450 MHz.

20-14


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


21 FAQ

21

FAQ

21.1 How to Solve the Problem That a Neighboring Cell Analysis Task or a Frequency Analysis Task Fails to Be Executed? This provides the causes of the problem that a neighboring cell analysis task or a frequency analysis task fails to be executed and the corresponding troubleshooting methods.

Symptom A neighboring cell analysis task or a frequency analysis task fails to be executed.

Fault Analysis The possible causes are as follows: 1.

The required configuration data and performance data are not imported to the Nastar database.

2.

After the configuration data of the existing network is updated, the Nastar does not collect the new configuration data again. As a result, the configuration data does not match the performance data in the Nastar database.

Troubleshooting l

In the case of the first cause, do as follows: 1.

In the Task Management window of the Nastar client, create a task for importing the configuration data. For details, see 7.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data.

2.

In the Task Management window of the Nastar client, create a task for importing the performance data. For details, see 7.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data.

3. l

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Perform the neighboring cell analysis and frequency analysis task again.

In the case of the second cause, do as follows: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21-1


21 FAQ

1.

In the Task Management window of the Nastar client, create a task for collecting the configuration data. –

Select Period from the Run Type drop-down list box.

–

Select Config data from the Data Type drop-down list box.

–

From the NE navigation tree, select the NEs whose configuration data are modified on the existing network.

–

For details, see 7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task.

2.

In the task list in the right pane of the Task Management window, right-click the new configuration data collection task, and then choose Run At Once from the shortcut menu.

3.

After the configuration data collection task is executed successfully, perform the neighboring cell analysis and frequency analysis tasks again.

21.2 How to Solve the Problem That the NE Information on the Nastar Is Inconsistent with That on the M2000? This provides the causes of the problem that the NE information on the Nastar is inconsistent with that on the M2000 and the corresponding troubleshooting methods.

Symptom After an NE is added, modified, or deleted on the M2000 client, the NE information on the Nastar is inconsistent with that on the M2000. Thus, the Nastar obtains the incorrect NE information. As a result, the created E2E tasks fail to be delivered.

Fault Analysis The EAMInfo file is saved on the M2000 or OMC server and used to record information about NEs and versions. Through this file, the Nastar obtains NE information required for data collection and data analysis from the M2000 or OMC. The EAMInfo file is generated through the system task of the M2000 or OMC, which is executed every four hours by default, but it can be modified to one hour. Thus, the NE information on the Nastar is not updated in real time. As a result, the NE information on the Nastar is inconsistent with that on the M2000.

Troubleshooting Log in to the M2000 or OMC client as user admin, and then perform the following operations: 1.

Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed.

2.

In the navigation tree on the left of the window, choose Task Type > NIC > NE Basic Information Export.

3.

Double-click the NE Basic Information Export task on the right, and then specify the related information in the displayed dialog box. NOTE

You are advised to set the period to one day and select all NEs.

4. 21-2

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


21 FAQ

5.

Select the NE Basic Information Export task in the task list in the right pane, and then right-click Run At Once. The time for executing the task and the result are displayed in the result information pane.

Log in to the Nastar client as user Administrator, and then perform the following operations: 1.

Choose Maintenance > OSS Management. The OSS Management window is displayed.

2.

In the navigation tree on the left of the window, select the OSS node whose NE information is to be synchronized, and then click NE Manager to open the NE Selector dialog box.

3.

Set the NEs that are managed by the selected OSS. The left pane lists the NEs to be selected for the management of the OSS. The right pane lists the NEs that are selected for the management of the OSS. l

In the left pane, you can double-click an NE to add it to the right pane.

l

You can click

l

You can click

l

You can click

l

You can click

to move one or multiple NEs from the left pane to the right pane. to move all the NEs from the left pane to the right pane. to move one or multiple NEs from the right pane to the left pane. to move all the NEs from the right pane to the left pane.

CAUTION If an NE is not added to the right pane, the data of this NE cannot be collected to the Nastar server. 4.

Click OK.

21.3 How to Solve the Problem That the OSS Navigation Tree Cannot Be Displayed Normally in the OSS Management Window? This provides the cause of the problem that the OSS navigation tree cannot be displayed normally in the OSS Management window and the corresponding troubleshooting method.

Symptom After the OSS Management window is opened, only the root node is displayed in the OSS navigation tree in the left pane of the window. The OSSs are already created and the information about the OSSs is displayed on the Nastar clients of other PCs.

Fault Analysis The language of the operating system on the PC that is installed with the Nastar client software is inconsistent with the installation language of the software version on Nastar server. Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


21-3


21 FAQ

Troubleshooting 1.

Choose Start > Control Panel.

2.

Double-click Regional and Language Options to open the Regional and Language Options dialog box.

3.

On the Regional Options tab page, set the language format in the Standards and formats field to a value consistent with the installation language of the software version on the Nastar server. You need to set the language to English for all countries except the countries using English.

4.

Log in to the Nastar client again.

21.4 How to Modify the Default Font Type and Font Size on the Nastar Client? This describes how to modify the default font type and font size on the Nastar client.

Question How to modify the default font type and font size on the Nastar client?

Answer 1.

Open the file \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\locale\zh_CN\mainfrm \General.properties under the installation path of the Nastar client. If the English edition of the software version is installed, the corresponding file is \client \plugins\NastarPA\style\locale\en_US\mainfrm\General.properties.

2.

Modify the related parameters. Figure 21-1 shows the opened configuration file. Figure 21-1 Configuration file

3. 21-4

l

FontFamily refers to the font type. You can change it to any font type name that is supported by the operating system of local PC.

l

FontSize refers to the font size. You can change it to any value.

Log in to the Nastar client again. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


21 FAQ

21.5 How to Query the Detailed Software Version of the Nastar Client? This describes how to query the detailed software version of the Nastar client.

Question How to query the detailed software version of the Nastar client?

Answer 1.

Open the file \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\locale\zh_CN\mainfrm \General.properties under the installation path of the Nastar client. If the English software version is installed, the corresponding file is \client\plugins \NastarPA\style\locale\en_US\mainfrm\General.properties.

2.

Check the value of VersionID. The value behind VersionID= is the detailed software version of the current Nastar client.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


21-5

Nastar Operator Guide(V600R002_06)

Recommend Documents